JP2023166017A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably improving an attention degree to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that, pieces of reservation information are acquired based on ball entry to actuation ball entry parts 62, 63 provided in a game region PE, based on the reservation information, a win/loss lottery for determining whether or not to shift to an opening/closing execution mode, is executed sequentially. When shifting to a second normal game state in which, a support mode by an electronic accessory provided on a right side actuation ball entry part 63 is a high frequency support mode and a lottery mode for performing the win/loss determination is a high probability mode, through the opening/closing execution mode, a time shortening number is set, the time shortening number functions as a shift condition to a third normal game state which is further advantageous to a player relative to the second normal game state. In a game round in which shift from the second normal game state to the third normal game state is determined, out of second and third variation display regions ME2, ME3 on a display screen 75a of a pattern display device 75, a pattern combination corresponding to a special winning result or failure result is stop displayed on the second variation display region ME2.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball firing means that shoots a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player. When a game ball fired from a game ball launcher enters a ball entry section provided in a game area, a privilege such as a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2002-78904

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
A game board on which a game area is formed;
special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area;
acquired information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means, or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation is started, and the game repeating operation is set as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment. A game cycle in which the notification means is controlled so that the game cycle operation is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the completion of the operation being regarded as one game cycle. control means;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means for transitioning to a special game state,
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state, a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state, and a third normal gaming state that is even more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. A gaming state is provided,
The predetermined determination information includes first information and second information,
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first information and the transition to the special gaming state occurs, the gaming state is transitioned to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state. A second normal game state transition means,
Upper limit setting means for setting an upper limit for the number of games in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state transitioning means causes the second normal gaming state to be transferred to the second normal gaming state;
The gaming state is determined based on the fact that the number of games played in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit without the judgment result by the judgment means corresponding to the first information in the second normal gaming state. a third normal gaming state transition means for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state;
a pattern display means having a display screen and capable of variably displaying a pattern in a predetermined display area on the display screen;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means, or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of the picture is started in the pattern display means, and the display corresponds to the judgment result by the judging means. and a display control means for stopping and displaying the picture,
The predetermined display area includes a first display area and a second display area larger than the first display area,
The display control means corresponds to the determination result of the determination means in both the first display area and the second display area in game rounds other than the final game round corresponding to the upper limit in the second normal game state. The symbols are stopped and displayed, while the symbols corresponding to the determination result are stopped in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area in the final game round in the second normal game state. It is characterized by being configured to display.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. (a) A front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) a front view of the main display unit. It is a front view of the upper variable winning device. It is a front view of a ball entry unit. (a) A front perspective view of the right operating ball entry portion, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a passage structure related to the right operating ball entry portion. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between passage length and passage time. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. It is a schematic diagram showing the validity table for the lower operation port. It is a schematic diagram showing the validity table for the right operation port. (a) A schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the lower operating port, and (b) a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for the right operating port. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for lower operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for lower operating ports. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for right operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for right operation ports. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st opening-and-closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd opening-and-closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the time of the end of opening/closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a schematic diagram comparing variable display time and fixed display time for each support mode. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display time setting process for a lower operation|movement opening. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display time setting process for the right operation port. It is a schematic diagram showing the difference between variable display time and fixed display time for each game state. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot result and the number of continuations of the high-frequency support mode. It is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of the game ball during the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of the game ball during the third normal game state. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the movement of the game ball during the third normal game state. It is a timing chart showing an increase/decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses. (a) A timing chart showing the flow of the game in the second normal gaming state, and (b) a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the third normal gaming state. It is a timing chart showing changes in the number of pending information as the game progresses. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game at the time of transition to the second normal game state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game at the time of transition to the second normal game state. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a right side operating ball entry section. (a) A timing chart showing the display mode of the through-gate display section in the low-frequency support mode, and (b) a timing chart showing the display mode of the through-gate display section in the high-frequency support mode. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration concerning a notification/performance control device and a display control device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between a game state and a variable display area of symbols. It is a flow chart showing information display control processing executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device. It is a flowchart showing display control processing for special game state. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of display when transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second normal gaming state. It is a flowchart showing display control processing for normal gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows target display control processing. (a) A schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of games and the size of the target display area in the second normal game state, and (b) a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the target display area and the variable symbol display area. It is a flowchart which shows the counter display control process corresponding to a right operation port. It is a flowchart which shows the counter display control process corresponding to a lower operation|movement opening. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing how a counter display is updated. (a) A schematic diagram showing the flow when shifting to the third normal gaming state, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the flow when shifting to the first special gaming state. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when shifting to the third normal game state in the third embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a subtraction pattern of counter display in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a subtraction pattern of a counter display. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of updating a counter display in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of updating a counter display.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 seen from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 2, the structure within the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting plate materials on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. Note that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game parlor.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in an openable/closable state. Specifically, an upper supporting metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a lower support fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion of the lower frame portion and the left frame portion of the outer frame 11. A side support fitting 18 is provided. These upper support metal fittings 17 and lower support metal fittings 18 constitute a support mechanism, and the support mechanism allows the main part 12 of the gaming machine to rotate on the left side when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 11. , can be rotated forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the right side as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

As shown in FIG. 2, the main part 12 of the gaming machine includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack disposed behind the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a unit 15. It should be noted that an inner frame 13 of the main part 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. (See Figure 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a frame body 20 made of synthetic resin whose outer shape is almost the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A generally elliptical window 21 is formed in the center of the frame 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition section that partitions the holding area of the glass panel 23 into front and rear sections, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear directions with the partition section in between. In other words, by securing a predetermined gap between both glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the gaming area PE is covered twice from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make these glass panels face each other front and back with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member in place of the glass panel.

As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination section 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21 . The annular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the gaming state, such as when a jackpot is won or when a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 is provided at the center of the annular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, which lights up in the event of a predetermined error. A ball lamp section 28 is provided. Further, a speaker section 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28, which outputs sound effects and the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge portion 31 and a lower bulge portion 32 that bulge toward the front are vertically arranged in parallel. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32. The upper tray 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out from a payout device described later, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism side described later while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33.

A game ball firing handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball firing handle 41, a game ball is fired from a game ball firing mechanism which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back side of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin, and has a front door-side upper plate passage communicating with the upper plate 33 and a front door-side lower plate passage communicating with the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a socket part that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner thereof, and by partitioning the socket part into left and right sides by a partition wall, the entrance of the upper tray passage on the front door side is formed. section and an entrance section of the front door side lower plate passage are formed into sections. Game balls entering the upper tray passage on the front door side are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls entering the lower tray passage on the front door side are guided to the lower tray 34.

On the rear side of the front door frame 14 on the rotation base end side, protruding shafts are provided at the upper and lower ends thereof. These protruding shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, on the rear side of the front door frame 14, a plurality of hook fittings 49 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be explained in detail based on FIGS. 2 and 3. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height of the resin base 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height of the outer frame 11. Further, the resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain board is arranged below the resin base 50 (specifically, its lower end), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 rests on the curtain board. .

Support fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the front surface of the resin base 50 on the rotation base end side. The support fittings 51 and 52 have shaft holes formed therein, and by inserting the protruding shafts of the front door frame 14 into these shaft holes, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. ing.

Insertion holes for inserting hook fittings 49 provided on the back side of the front door frame 14 are provided on the front side of the resin base 50 on the rotation tip side. In this pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 3, a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is arranged hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked with respect to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened by locking the hook fitting 49 with the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. Further, the locking device 55 has an inner frame hook member 57 extending toward the rear of the inner frame 13 . When these inner frame hook members 57 are hooked on the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main portion 12 is locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated into the locking device 55, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned clockwise, the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right. The locking device 55 is configured so that when the key is turned to the left, the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A generally elliptical window hole 54 is formed in the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from the rear by a game board 60 mounted on the resin base 50. The game board 60 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material covering the front surface of the plywood, and the front surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. In this exposed portion, that is, on the front side of the game board 60, a game area PE is formed in which the game balls flow down. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to being made of wood, but may also be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board 60 (particularly the various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be explained based on FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that pass through the game board 60 in its thickness direction (back and forth direction). A general winning opening 61, operating ball entry parts 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, etc. are arranged in each opening, respectively. When a ball enters the general winning hole 61, operating ball entering parts 62, 63, variable winning devices 64, 65, etc., it is detected by a detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prizes are awarded based on the detection result. Benefits such as the payout of balls are given to the player.

Specifically, when a ball enters the general winning hole 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the lower operating ball entry section 62, 4 balls are paid out. When a game ball is paid out and a ball enters the right operating ball entry section 63, one game ball is paid out, and when a ball enters the upper variable winning device 64, The payout of 14 game balls is executed, and when a ball enters the lower variable winning device 65, the payout of 10 game balls is executed.

An out port 68 is provided at the bottom of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry sections are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and includes not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the gaming area PE after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball passes through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not later ejected from the game area PE. In the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of a game ball into the out port 68, the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 61, the operating ball entering sections 62, 63, the variable winning devices 64, 65, and the through gate 66 will be explained. is also expressed as winning a prize.

In addition, a large number of nails 69 are planted on the game board 60 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged. By various configurations such as the nails 69 and the windmill, the falling paths of the game balls are differentiated, and adjustments are made so that winnings to the above-mentioned general prize opening 61 etc. occur with a moderate probability.

The variable display unit 67 is arranged at the center of the game board 60, and the operating ball entry parts 62, 63, etc. are arranged around the variable display unit 67. The actuating ball entry parts 62 and 63 have a lower actuating ball entry part 62 disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a right actuating ball entry part 63 disposed on the right side of the variable display unit 67. Particularly, the right operating ball entry section 63 is provided with an electric accessory 71 as an opening/closing ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric accessory 71 includes a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter, and when the position of the shutter is changed by the drive unit, the right operating ball entry portion 63 (right operating port 63a) It is possible to switch between an open state (accepting state) in which the ball can enter the ball, and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which the ball cannot enter the ball. It should be noted that the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operating ball entry portion 63 may be switchable between a state where it is easier to enter the ball into the right operating port 63a and a state where it is more difficult to enter the ball into the right operating port 63a.

The through gate 66 is disposed at a position upstream of the right operating ball entry section 63 in the gaming area PE (right route described later in detail), more specifically at a position to the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67. There is. The through gate 66 allows game balls to pass through in the vertical direction, and the game balls that enter the through gate 66 flow downstream in the game area PE without being ejected from the game area PE. There is. If the player wins in a lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the through gate 66, the electric accessory 71 will be switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time.

The above-mentioned upper variable winning device 64 is disposed at a position between the through gate 66 and the right operating ball entry section 63 on the right route. The upper variable winning device 64 is formed with a top prize opening into which a plurality of game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the top prize winning hole. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the big prize opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (auxiliary state or acceptance state) in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the ball, and a closed state (non-assistance state or non-acceptance state) in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the ball. It has become. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and under normal conditions, the shutter is maintained in the closed state and enters the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state or opening/closing execution state) in the internal lottery. It is designed so that it can be switched to the open state if the transition result is as follows.

The lower variable prize winning device 65 is disposed at a position on the downstream side of the right operating ball entering portion 63 on the right route. The lower variable winning device 65 is formed with a lower large winning hole into which a plurality of game balls can enter at the same time, and is provided with an opening/closing mechanism as an opening/closing means for opening and closing the lower large winning hole. The opening/closing mechanism has a shutter as an opening/closing member for the big prize opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (accepting state) in which a game ball can enter the shutter, and a closed state (non-accepting state) in which the game ball cannot enter the shutter. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid), and under normal conditions, the shutter is maintained in the closed state and enters the opening/closing execution mode (special gaming state or opening/closing execution state) in the internal lottery. It is designed so that it can be switched to the open state if the transition result is as follows.

Here, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game enters when a jackpot or special win occurs. The opening mode of the variable prize winning device 65 in the opening/closing execution mode is, for example, when a predetermined period of time (30 sec or 0.8 sec in this embodiment) or a predetermined number of prizes (9 in this embodiment) is won. The shutter is set to be opened after a predetermined number of rounds (in this embodiment, 1, 2, 6, 8, and 16 rounds) as the upper limit.

Next, the variable display unit 67 will be explained. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays symbols (fluctuatingly displays) using winnings in the operating ball entering sections 62 and 63 as a trigger.

The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, on the left, in the middle, and on the right, and these symbols are scrolled in the vertical direction and displayed in a variable manner. When a jackpot or special win occurs, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Note that the symbol display device 75 does not necessarily need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

Further, a center frame 76 is disposed in the variable display unit 67 so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side, and when it is fixed in this way, it stands up from the front of the game board 60, so that the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 The gap size between the game ball and the game ball is configured to be smaller than the diameter size of the game ball. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area PE are prevented from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the falling path of the game balls flowing down the game area PE is set so that the variable display unit 67 (more specifically, the center frame 76) is on the right side. The route is roughly divided into the right route, which detours from the center, and the left route, which detours from the left side.

In addition, the above-mentioned right-side operation ball entry section 63, variable prize winning devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and for game balls flowing down the left route, these right-side operation ball entry section 63, variable prize winning devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route. Winning to the devices 64, 65 and the through gate 66 is avoided. On the other hand, the lower operating ball entering section 62 is arranged on the left route, and game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from entering the lower operating ball entering section 62. The player can advance the game advantageously by selecting the launch destination of the game ball (downward path of the game ball) from the right route or the left route depending on the game situation.

A main display unit 81 is disposed on a protective member for the guide rail 100 disposed outside the gaming area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 faces the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that makes the gaming area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the facing portion includes: A main display section D is provided on which predetermined pictures and the like are displayed. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device to be described later, and the display contents of the main display section D are controlled by the main control device.

The main display section D includes a display section DL for the lower operating hole that displays the lottery results based on winnings in the lower operating ball entering section 62 (lower operating opening 62a), and a right operating ball entering section 63 (right operating opening 63a). ), and a right operating port display section DR for displaying the lottery results based on winnings.

In the display section DL for the lower actuating opening, a variable display of the pattern is performed using the winning of the lower operating ball entry part 62 (lower operating opening 62a) as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the lower operating ball entering part The results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings in 62 are clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the lower actuating entrance part 62 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the fluctuating display is stopped on the lower actuating opening display part DL, After a predetermined picture is displayed as a result of the stop, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the display section DR for the right operating port, a variable display of the symbol is performed using the winning of the right operating ball entering section 63 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the symbol is displayed on the right operating ball entering section 63 (right operating opening 63a). The results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings will be clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the prize entered into the right operating ball entry section 63 is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot or special win, the fluctuating display will be stopped on the right operating opening display section DR, and as a stop result. After a predetermined pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode according to the result.

Here, based on winning in either of the operating ball entering sections 62, 63, a variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display section DL, DR, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variable display is stopped. The period until the game is played corresponds to one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, for example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning occurs in either of the operating ball entry parts 62, 63, that single display area is displayed. In a configuration in which a variable display is performed in one display area, a game cycle starts from the variable display in the single display area until the variable display is stopped while displaying a predetermined stop result. One time.

The main display section D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a lower operating port holding number display section SL and a right operating port holding number display section SR. The reserved number display section SL for the lower operating port corresponds to the lower operating port 62a, and the number of times the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 62a is reserved up to 4 times, and is indicated by the lighting of the reserved number display section SL for the lower operating port. The number of reservations is now displayed. The right operating port reserved number display section SR corresponds to the right operating port 63a, and the number of times the game ball has entered the right operating port 63a is held up to 4 times, and the right operating port reserved number display section SR lights up. The number of pending items is displayed.

In addition to the above-mentioned various display sections, the main display section of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through-gate display section DS that displays lottery results based on winnings in the through-gate 66. In the through-gate display section DS, a winning pattern in the through gate 66 is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and as a result of stopping the changing display, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the through gate 66 is displayed. be made explicit. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 66 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display section DS and a variable display is performed. After this is stopped, the state shifts to the open state. In the electrically-operated open state, the electrically-driven accessory 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times a game ball passes through the through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the main display section D of the main display unit 81 displays the number of held balls. A reservation number display section SS for through gate is provided.

To explain the structure of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 2, below the mounting area of the game board 60 on the resin base 50, a game ball is ejected toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball firing mechanism 110 is provided to fire the ball. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game ball launcher located at the launch standby position. The main components include a ball feeding device 113 that supplies balls and a base plate 114 on which various components 111 to 113 are attached, and when the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50, It is integrated against the

The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper is arranged near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the firing rail 112 to keep the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the firing standby position described above. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source/launch control device that will be described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply/launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the firing standby position is moved to the game board 60 side, more specifically, to the game ball. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 attached to the board 60.

The guide rail 100 divides the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is approximately circular. Further, the guide rail 100 consists of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide path 103 is defined by both rails 101 and 102. It is formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion open to the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance part → exit part). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball firing handle 41, the game ball can be shot into the area to the left of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE or to the area to the right of the variable display unit 67 in the same game area PE. It is possible.

In addition, on the forward side of the exit part of the game board 60, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a return prevention member 106 is attached to prevent the game balls that have reached the game area PE from returning to the guide path 103. This prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE first from hindering the launch of the subsequent game ball.

The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the launch rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip end portion of the launch rail 112 diagonally face each other across the lower edge of the game board 60. In other words, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are shifted from side to side near the lower edge of the game board 60. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower edge of the game board 60, and a gap at a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112.

A foul ball passage 46 is provided below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage 46 is integrally formed with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return inside the guide path 103 as foul balls, those foul balls will enter the foul ball path 46 through the above-mentioned gap. becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower tray passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in FIG. 1. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be fired.

In the resin base 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front and back direction, and a passage forming member is inserted into this through hole. 121 are arranged. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage and a main body side lower plate passage. The upstream sides of the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage communicate with a game ball distribution section to be described later. Further, a socket portion of a passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and a front door side upper tray passage is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage. A front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage.

An opening/closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the resin base 50. The opening/closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at its lower end, and further includes a biasing member that biases the opening/closing member 124 to a forward position that closes the main body side upper plate passage and the main body side lower plate passage. It is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening/closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure and closes the main body side upper tray passage and the main body side lower tray passage. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened with game balls stored in the main body side upper tray passage or the main body side lower tray passage, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open by the socket provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14 against the urging force. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage are in communication, and the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage are in communication.

Next, the back structure of the inner frame 13 (resin base 50 and game board 60) will be explained based on FIG.

Bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically in parallel on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50. Bearing parts are formed in the bearing fitting 132 at vertically spaced intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing parts.

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back side of the game board 60 will be explained.

A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 arranged in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification/presentation control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap with the display control device. The notification/performance control device unit 142 is configured to include a notification/performance control device 143 and a mounting base 144, and the notification/performance control device 143 is mounted on the mounting base 144.

The notification/effect control device 143 includes a notification/effect control board that controls audio, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device, which will be described later.The notification/effect control board is made of transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 145 consisting of, etc.

On the back side of the game board 60, as shown in FIG. 3, a collection board 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67. The gathering board 150 is provided with a game ball collection mechanism that collects game balls that have won into various winning holes, a detection mechanism that detects the entry of game balls into various winning holes, and the like.

To explain the game ball collection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with collection passages that individually correspond to various ball entry parts such as the general prize opening 61. These recovery passages descend from the ball entry portions along the back side of the game board 60, and define the falling paths of the game balls. Each collection passage joins near the lower end of the game board 60, and all the game balls that have passed through the ball entry part such as the general prize opening 61 gather at the bottom of the game board 60 via the collection passage. becomes. The exit portion of each collection path is open downward, and a discharge path, which will be described later, is provided on the forward side (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection path are led out to the discharge path. It should be noted that the out port 68 similarly communicates with the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

To explain the detection mechanism, the collection board 150 is provided with detection sensors that individually correspond to various ball entry parts such as the general winning hole 61. These various detection sensors are placed in the middle of each collection passageway that connects to the ball entry section such as the general prize opening 61, and are used to detect the game balls when the falling path of the game ball is defined in the collection passageway. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects the entry of a ball into a ball entrance, such as the general winning opening 61, by the game ball passing through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection path. Specifically, a magnetic sensor is employed that detects changes in the magnetic field that occur when a game ball passes through the detection area.

These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (more specifically, the main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are sent to the main control device. The configuration is such that it is output as follows. The main controller unit 160 and its associated configuration will be described below.

The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collection board 150 from the rear side, and is mounted on a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main control device 162 is equipped with a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 163 consisting of, etc.

The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion serving as a sealing means, thereby sealing the board box 163. A plurality of sealing parts are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing part as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner; It is intended to be irrevocably bound. The sealing process performed by the sealing section is to prevent unauthorized opening after the seal has been sealed, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, it will be possible to detect this situation early and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pawl into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing parts. When opening the board box 163, such as when a problem occurs with the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part in which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is removed. disconnect. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, if the sealing process is to be performed again, insert the locking claw into the long hole of the other sealing part. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 163 that the board box 163 has been opened in an unauthorized manner.

A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side of the board box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These joining pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of pieces to be joined formed on the mounting base 161, and the sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the joining pieces and the joined pieces. be exposed.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be explained based on FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by a back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, to which a dispensing mechanism section 202, a discharge passage panel, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 3, it includes a base part 211 to which the payout mechanism part 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover part 212 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. and has. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the top surface are closed, and only the bottom surface is open, and has a size sufficient to at least surround the variable display unit 67.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 on the upper right side thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are outputted to the management control device on the gaming hall side through these output terminals. In addition, a pair of upper and lower latching pins are provided on the right end of the base portion 211 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the latching pins are inserted into a bearing fitting 132 (specifically, a bearing portion) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, a fastener for fastening to a fastened hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating tip of the base portion 211, and by fitting the fastening tool into the fastened hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

The dispensing mechanism section 202 is disposed on the base section 211 so as to bypass the protective cover section 212. The payout mechanism section 202 is provided with a tank 221 which is disposed at the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Ru. A tank rail that slopes gently toward the downstream side is connected to the lower part of the tank 221, and a case rail that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A dispensing device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls put out by the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution section provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

The game ball distribution section has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is located on the main body side described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 33 via the upper plate passage and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage and the front door side lower plate passage. .

As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge passage board and control device assembly unit 204 is attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end in the front and rear directions. A discharge passageway that is open to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage board 203 facing the control device assembly unit 204 , and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204 . The discharge passage is formed to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are delivered to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage. be discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally elongated mounting base, and the payout control device 181 and the power source/firing control device 191 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 181 and the power supply/launch control device 191 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 181 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is housed in a board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects outside the board box. For example, when a state recovery switch is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 222, the ball jam is cleared.

The power source/launch control device 191 has a power source/launch control board housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined power required by various control devices, and furthermore, the power source/launch control board is housed in a board box. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the handle 41. Further, the power supply/launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, so that even in the event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power is restored, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power outage. It has become. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure, such as when an amusement hall closes, the state before the power off will be retained, but if you turn on the power while holding down the RAM erase switch, the RAM data will be initialized. It has become.

This embodiment is characterized by the configurations related to the right-side operating ball entry section 63 and the variable winning devices 64 and 65 disposed on the right route. Hereinafter, supplementary explanations of the various ball entry parts will be given with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 5 to 8. 5 is a front view of the upper variable winning device 64, FIG. 6 is a front view of the ball entering unit, FIG. 7(a) is a perspective view of the right operating ball entering section 63 seen from the front, and FIG. 7(b) is the right side. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the passage structure in the operating ball entry portion 63, and FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the passage length and the required passage time.

(Upper variable winning device 64)
The upper variable winning device 64 has a housing 310 in which a ball passage 312 through which game balls pass is formed, and the housing 310 bulges out from the front of the game board 60 toward the front of the game machine. It is attached to the game board 60. The housing 310 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and game balls and the like flowing down the ball passage 312 can be visually recognized through the outer part of the housing 310.

In the portion of the housing 310 that bulges toward the front side of the game board 60, an upper prize opening 311 that constitutes an entrance portion of the ball passage 312 is formed. The University of Japan winning hole 311 faces the midstream part (the part extending vertically) of the right route from the side (right side) of the gaming machine, and the University of Japan winning hole 311 is connected to the middle part of the right route (the part extending vertically). A shutter 315 is disposed to cover the downstream area (right side).

The shutter 315 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60, and is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the upper prize winning opening 311 by rotating around the pivot point. It is configured to be displaced between a position and an open position that allows the inflow of game balls into the top prize opening 311.

A drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162. The shutter 315 is configured to stand by at a closed position when no drive signal is output from the main controller 162 (non-excited state).

When the shutter 315 is placed in the open position (open state), approximately half of the downstream area (flow path) in the midstream portion of the right route is cut off by the shutter 315, and most of the game balls flowing down the right route are It is configured to flow into the upper variable winning device 64 (ball passage 312) through the upper large winning opening 311.

The ball passage 312 branches into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at an intermediate position. A flow path switching member 316 that can switch the destination of the game ball to the first branch path 313 and the second branch path 314 is disposed in this branch portion. A drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162. The flow path switching member 316 is configured to stand by at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 312 when no drive signal is output from the main controller 162 (non-excited state).

When the flow path switching member 316 is disposed at the protruding position, the entrance portion of the second branch passage 314 is blocked by the flow path switching member 316. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branch part are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 314, and these game balls will flow into the first branch passage 313.

When the main controller 162 outputs a drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 316, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position where protrusion into the ball path 312 is avoided, and the second branch path 314 The entrance part will be opened. As a result, the destination of the game balls is changed. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branch part are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 313, and these game balls will flow into the second branch passage 314.

Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is predefined depending on the type of jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a normal jackpot result described below, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position. It is specified that it returns to the protruding position immediately after that. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the branching portion. Therefore, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the flow into the second branch passage 314 is substantially avoided.

On the other hand, in the case of a variable jackpot result, which will be described later, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, but after that the shutter 315 closes. It is specified that it waits in the protruding position until it returns to the position. For this reason, in the case of a variable jackpot result, most of the game balls that have flowed into the top prize opening 311 will flow into the second branch passage 314.

An upstream detection sensor 317 is disposed in a portion of the ball passage 312 that is upstream of the branching portion, and is installed in a portion of the ball passage 312 that is downstream of the branching portion, specifically, the first branching passage 313 and the second branching passage. Downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are arranged in the branch passage 314. The upstream detection sensor 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 controls the upper variable prize winning device 64 based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream detection sensor 317. The presence or absence of a winning is determined, and if a winning occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Furthermore, the remaining status of game balls is monitored based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream detection sensor 317 and the downstream detection sensors 318 and 319.

In the main controller 162 shown in this embodiment, the ball enters the second branch passage 314 during the opening/closing execution mode based on detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 318 attached to the first branch passage 313. If it is determined that this has occurred, the lottery mode is switched from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Although details will be described later, in the high probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result is higher than in the low probability mode, and the player can advance the game advantageously. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second branch passage 314 will be referred to as the "advantageous ball entry section 314."

Of the game balls fired to the right route, most of the game balls that pass through the upper variable prize winning device 64 go to the ball entering unit 70 disposed downstream of the upper variable winning device 64 on the right route. Become. The ball entering unit 70 is formed by integrating the above-mentioned right side operating ball entering section 63 and lower variable winning device 65. The ball entering unit 70 will be described below with reference to FIG.

(Entering unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 has a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 forming a part of the right route (specifically, the downstream region) is formed, and the housing 320 bulges forward beyond the front surface of the game board 60. It is fixed to the game board 60 in this state. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center side (left side). An inlet portion 321a of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed at the upper right of the bulged portion of the housing 320, and an outlet portion 321a of the ball entry unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed at the lower left. 321b is formed to face leftward.

The outlet portion 321b is located directly below the lower operating ball entry portion 62, and the game balls flowing out from the outlet portion 321b are guided below the lower operating ball entry portion 62. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 is prevented from entering the lower operating ball entry portion 62.

The housing 320 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (for example, game balls flowing down the ball passage 321) can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the sense of unity between the right-side operating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque and the internal structure may be configured to be difficult or impossible to see.

The ball passage 321 has a passage width, a passage height, etc. defined so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the same place at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step is generated at an intermediate position in the passage direction. Specifically, the ball passage 321 includes a horizontally long upstream passage part 322 that forms an upstream part of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the gaming machine, and a horizontally long upstream passage part 322 that forms a downstream part of the ball passage 321 and slopes downward toward the center of the gaming machine. Horizontally long downstream passages 324 that slope downward toward the center are provided so that they are shifted vertically and horizontally so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side, creating a difference in height. 322 and the downstream passage section 324 are connected by an intermediate passage section 323 (corresponding to a "communication passage section") extending in the vertical direction.

The upstream passage section 322 is also provided with the right-side operating ball entry section 63 . Specifically, the right operating port 63a of the right operating entry ball portion 63 is open upward, and the upstream passage portion 322 is formed to cross above the right operating port 63a. The electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 63 includes a shutter 331 that can be slid back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60), and an electric accessory drive section 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331. It has. The electric accessory drive unit 332 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driving state (non-excited state) in which a drive signal is not output from the main controller 162, the shutter 331 is placed in a closed position covering the right operating port 63a from above, and a drive signal is output to drive the electric accessory. When the portion 332 is in the driven state (excited state), it moves (retreats) to an open position that does not cover the right operating port 63a.

Here, when the shutter 331 is placed in the closed position, the shutter 331 forms the bottom of the upstream passage section 322, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the housing 320 includes an upstream bottom portion 322a that forms a bottom portion upstream of the right operating port 63a in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322, and a right operating port 63a. A downstream bottom part 322b forming a bottom part on the downstream side is provided, and these upstream bottom part 322a, downstream bottom part 322b, and shutter 331 form a rolling surface for the game ball. In the following description, the region where a flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331 in the upstream passage section 322, that is, the region facing the right operating port 63a with the shutter 331 in between in the upstream passage section 322 will be referred to as the "first section". 1 specific area SE1'' (see FIG. 6).

When the shutter 331 is placed in the open position and the upstream passage 322 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off, the game ball that reaches the first specific area SE1 moves in the direction of the upstream passage 322. It becomes difficult to move to the right operating port 63a, and it flows into the right operating port 63a.

In this embodiment, the first specific area SE1 is designed to slow down the game ball passing through the first specific area SE1 to increase the chance of winning the right operating port 63a. The invention will be described below with reference to FIG. 7(b). In addition, in FIG. 6(b), the route (channel) through which the game ball passes is illustrated using a dashed line.

Projections 335a and 336a that protrude toward the first specific region SE1 are provided on the front wall 335 and rear wall 336 that define the passage of the upstream passage 322 in the housing 320. . The protrusions 335a and 336a extend vertically perpendicular to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322. In the following description, the protrusion 335a provided on the front wall 335 will be referred to as the "front protrusion 335a", and the protrusion 336a provided on the rear wall 336 will be referred to as the "rear protrusion 336a". ”.

The gap dimension D1 between the rear wall part 336 and the front protruding part 335a is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball, and the gap dimension D2 between the front wall part 335 and the rear protruding part 336a is also set. It is set to be larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. A plurality of front protrusions 335a (two in this embodiment) are arranged in the passage direction (guiding direction) of the upstream passage 322 with a gap larger than the diameter D of the game ball. The side protrusions 336a are also arranged in a plurality (two in this embodiment) in the passage direction (guiding direction) of the upstream passage 322 with a gap larger than the diameter dimension D of the game ball. These front side protrusions 335a and rear side protrusions 336a are arranged alternately, so that the flow path of the game ball meanders back and forth with respect to the passage direction of the upstream passage 322.

Here, when the amount of protrusion of the front side protrusion portion 335a, the amount of protrusion of the rear side protrusion portion 336a, and the diameter dimension D of the game ball are added, the width is larger than the passage width of the upstream passage portion 322. (D3 < D). Thereby, the game ball is prevented from running through the first specific area SE1 so as to avoid collision with the protrusions 335a and 336a.

The game balls passing through the upstream passage section 322 collide with the protrusions 335a and 336a. Due to such a collision, the moving speed of the game ball in the first specific area SE1 decreases (decelerates). In other words, the first specific area SE1 of the upstream passage section 322 functions as a deceleration section for forcibly decelerating the game ball. By thus decelerating the game ball passing through the upstream passage section 322, the game ball passes through the first specific area SE1 compared to the case where the protrusions 335a and 336a are defective. This is prolonging the time required to complete the process.

Note that the protruding portions 335a and 336a are disposed in the first specific region SE1 so as to be biased toward a position closer to the intermediate passage portion 323. Thereby, the game ball is configured to decelerate at a position immediately upstream of the intermediate passage portion 323.

In this embodiment, the degree of deceleration is defined as follows. In other words, the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1 is determined from the sum (1.2 sec) of the variable display time and fixed display time of the pattern on the through gate display section DS in the low frequency support mode. is also short, and is specified to be longer than the firing cycle of game balls (0.6 sec). The details will be described later, but as a result, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route during the low frequency support mode, the game balls flowing down the right route will pass through the right side actuation entry ball part 63 and move downward. The configuration is such that at least one ball enters in most cases when the ball reaches the variable winning device 65 and the right-side operation ball entry section 63 is in the open state.

The game balls that have not flown into the right operating port 63a continue to move along the ball path 321, and most of them reach the downstream path section 324. Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the downstream passage section 324 and the lower variable winning device 65 attached thereto will be explained.

The lower large prize opening 341 of the lower variable prize winning device 65 is open upward, and a downstream passage portion 324 is formed so as to cross above the lower large prize winning opening 341. The lower variable winning device 65 includes a shutter 345 that can be slid back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60) and a drive unit (solenoid) for the shutter 345. The drive section for the shutter 345 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162. In a non-driving state (non-excited state) in which a drive signal is not output from the main controller 162, the shutter 345 is placed in a closed position that covers the lower prize opening 341 from above, and a drive signal is output to the drive unit. is in a driving state (excited state) and moves (retreats) to an open position that does not cover the lower large prize opening 341.

Here, when the shutter 345 is placed in the closed position, the shutter 345 forms the bottom of the downstream passage section 324, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom part that forms a bottom part downstream of the lower prize opening 341 in the passage direction of the downstream passage part 324, and these downstream bottom parts and the shutter 345 close the game ball. A rolling surface is formed. In the following description, the region where a flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345 in the downstream passage section 324, that is, the region facing the lower prize opening 341 with the shutter 345 in between in the downstream passage section 324 will be referred to as " "Second specific area SE2".

When the shutter 345 is placed in the open position and the downstream passage 324 (more specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off, the game ball that reaches the second specific area SE2 moves in the direction of the downstream passage 324. It becomes difficult to move to the lower prize winning opening 341.

Note that the second specific area SE2 is also provided with a deceleration section consisting of protrusions 375a and 376a (see FIG. 8), but the specific configuration of this deceleration section is the same as that of the first specific area SE1. Therefore, the explanation is used.

The above-mentioned intermediate passage section 323 extends upward from the upstream end of the shutter 345. The left passage wall forming the intermediate passage 323 is located on an extension of the upstream passage 322, and the game ball that has passed through the upstream passage 322 changes direction by colliding with the left passage wall. , and falls down the intermediate passage section 323 toward the shutter 345.

An opening through which game balls can pass is formed in the right passage wall surface forming the intermediate passage section 323, and a portion of the game balls passing through the intermediate passage section 323 flows into the opening. A discharge passage is formed between the right-side actuated ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, through which the game balls that have flowed into the opening are discharged from the ball entry unit 70. A part of the game balls flowing down the ball path 321 will be discharged from the ball entering unit 70 through the opening → discharge path before reaching the lower variable winning device 65 (shutter 345). Note that the game balls passing through this discharge passage are guided directly to the back side of the game board 60, so that movement to the out port 68 is avoided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, a supplementary explanation will be given of the relationship between the path length of each part of the ball path 321 and the time required for the game ball to pass. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the ball entry unit 70 viewed from the front. In the following explanation, the path length of the first specific area SE1 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is referred to as "path length PL1", and the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is referred to as "required time T1", when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The path length of the second specific area SE2 is "path length PL3," the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is "required time T3," and the time required to pass through the second specific area SE2 is the "required time T3." The path length will be referred to as "path length PL2," and the time required to pass between the first specific area SE1 and second specific area SE2 will be referred to as "required time T3."

Comparing the path lengths PL1 to PL3, they become longer in the order of path length PL2 < path length PL1 < path length PL3. As already explained, the passage path of the game ball in the first specific area SE1 and the second specific area SE2 is meandering, but even if this meandering is taken into account, path length PL2 < path length PL1 < path length. The length increases in the order of PL3.

Although the details will be described later, the time T1 required in the first specific area SE1 is the minimum interval time (0.7 sec) when the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 is continuously opened in the low-frequency support mode. The required time in the second specific area SE2 is set to be longer than the minimum interval time (1.2 sec) when the right-side actuated ball entrance part 63 is continuously opened in the high-frequency support mode. T3 is set to be longer than the minimum interval time (1.7 sec) when the lower variable winning device 65 is opened continuously when special wins occur continuously.

For example, when the lower variable prize winning device 65 is in the open state, the game balls that have avoided the right side operation ball entry section 63 will head toward the lower variable prize winning device 65. By reducing the distance between the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the impression is given that the game ball that avoids the right-side operating ball entering section 63 quickly heads toward the lower variable winning device 65. It's getting easier. Thereby, the expectation of winning the lower variable winning device 65 can be suitably increased.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 9.

An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 602, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603. It is a device that includes a certain RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, such as the functions of the ROM 603 and the functions of the RAM 604, may be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 602 are a power outage monitoring board 605 provided in the main control device 162, a payout control device 181, various detection sensors, and the like. A power supply/launch control device 191 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 605, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power outage monitoring board 605. In addition, as part of the various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the lower operating ball entry section 62, a detection sensor 391c for the right operating ball entry section 63, and an upper variable winning device 64. Detection sensors 317 to 318 for the lower variable winning device 65, detection sensor 391e for the through gate 66 are connected, and detection information from these various detection sensors 317 to 318, 391a to 391e ( Based on the detection signal), the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a winning determination (ball hitting determination) for each ball entering section. Furthermore, the MPU 602 executes a jackpot lottery based on winnings in the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating opening 62a) and the right operating ball entry portion 63 (right operating opening 63a).

A power outage monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, and a notification/performance control device 143 (specifically, a notification/performance control board 651) are connected to the output side of the MPU 602. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on the winning determination result in the winning ball entering section. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting the prize ball command. Then, when a winning to the general winning hole 61 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output, and when a winning to the upper university winning hole 311 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the ball is output, and when a winning to the lower large winning hole 341 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the paying out of 10 game balls is output, and the winning ball to the lower operating hole 62a is output. When a winning is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output, and when a winning to the right operating port 63a is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output. is output.

Various commands such as a variation start command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification/effect control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Note that each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

In addition, on the output side of the MPU 602, an electric accessory drive section 332 that drives the electric accessory 71 attached to the right side operation ball entrance section 63, a variable winning drive section 451 that drives the shutter 315 of the upper variable winning device 64, and an upper side A flow path switching drive unit 452 that drives the flow path switching member 316 of the variable winning device 64, a variable winning driving portion 461 that drives the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65, the main display unit 81, etc. are connected. The main control board 601 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the variable winning drive section 451 of the upper variable winning device 64 and the variable winning driving section of the lower variable winning device 65 are controlled in the MPU 602 so that the upper large winning hole 311 and the lower large winning hole 341 are opened and closed. 461 drive control is executed. Further, for example, in each game round, the MPU 602 executes display control of the lower operating port display portion DL and the right operating port display portion DR in the main display portion D of the main display unit 81.

Furthermore, an external terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal board 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal and the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. For example, when the game result is a jackpot, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side through a jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, in normal times, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result is achieved, a HI level signal is output. Note that the output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power outage monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power source/launch control device 191, and also monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 191. The payout control device 181 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power source/launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 601, payout control device 181, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. More specifically, the power supply and firing control device 191 is connected to an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball firing handle 41. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball firing handle 41, and based on the information from this operation level detection sensor, the firing intensity (launching speed) of the game ball by the game ball firing mechanism 110 is determined. ) will be determined. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player touches the game ball firing handle 41, and the power supply/launch control device 191 uses this information to determine whether the player touches the game ball firing handle 41. The configuration is such that it is possible to ascertain whether or not the The game ball is launched when it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on the information from the touch sensor, and when the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is being operated. will be permitted.

Note that the information from the touch sensor will be transmitted to the main control device 162, as well as the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 via the power supply/launch control device 191.

The notification/performance control device 143 includes a notification/performance control board 651 on which an MPU 652 is mounted, and the MPU 652 includes a ROM 653 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 653. A RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. during execution, is built-in.

The notification/effect control device 143 drives and controls the lamp sections 26 to 28 and the speaker section 29 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 710. It is something. Specifically, the notification/performance control device 143 controls the variable display mode of the symbols on the symbol display device 75 and the stop display mode of the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed (for example, the display mode of the symbols to be stopped and displayed) based on various commands input from the main control device 162. In addition to determining the type of combination (combination type), the presence or absence of a ready-to-win effect, the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc. are determined, and the determined contents are added to the above command and transferred to the display control device 710.

The display control device 710 has a display control board on which an MPU is mounted, and the MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM. Built-in RAM is a memory for temporarily storing data such as a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM stores image data, and a video RAM temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM. There is. The MPU executes display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 143.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 will be explained. The display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is provided with a variable display area in which three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed. On the display screen 75a, the symbols of each of these symbol rows are periodically displayed in a scrolling manner in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom).

Although details will be described later, in each variable display area, one symbol is displayed in a stopped state for each symbol row, so that a total of three symbols are displayed in a stopped state. For example, if the fluctuating display stops in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row, and the fluctuating display of all symbol rows ends with the predetermined symbol combination formed on the active line, the jackpot result or special win result A video etc. showing the transition to the special gaming state corresponding to the game is displayed.

In addition, considering that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). row), and the middle symbol row can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

Incidentally, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but may be arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged vertically, and the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to be horizontal.

A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The holding display area is a holding number display for the upper operating port, which is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit holding display areas as the maximum holding number when game balls enter the lower operating opening 62a are lined up in the left and right direction. area and a reserved number display area for the lower operating port, which is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit reserved display areas as the maximum number of reserved balls when game balls enter the right operating port 63a are lined up in the left and right direction. It is configured.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the lower operation port 62a, the maximum number of balls to be held is 4, and correspondingly, the number-of-retention display area for the lower operation port includes a first unit hold display area. , a second unit reservation display area, a third unit reservation display area, and a fourth unit reservation display area are set. In addition, when a game ball enters the right operating port 63a, the maximum number of reserved balls is four, and correspondingly, the number of reserved balls display area for the right operating port includes a first unit pending display area, a second unit A hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set.

For example, if the number of reserved balls is one when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a, a predetermined pending image is displayed only in the first unit pending display area, and the game ball enters the lower operating port 62a. When the number of reserved items in the case of winning is four, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area to the fourth unit pending display area.

(About various counters)
Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 10, a configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

During a game, the MPU 602 uses various counter information to perform lottery selection to enter a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode), settings for display on the main display unit 81 (main display section D), settings for displaying symbols on the symbol display device 75, etc. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 is used to draw lots for jackpots and special wins, the winning type counter C2 is used to judge the type of jackpot results, and the symbol display. Occurrence of reach display when device 75 misses and fluctuates Reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of hit random number counter C1, and display for entry part of main display unit 81 A variation type counter CS is used to determine the variable display time of the symbols in the section and the variable display time of the symbols in the symbol display device 75. Furthermore, an open random number counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is to be opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604.

The RAM 604 stores a holding area Ra for the lower operating port, a holding area Rb for the right operating port, a first execution area AE1 for the holding area Ra for the lower operating port, and a second execution area Rb for the right operating port. A reserved ball storage area 632 consisting of area AE2 and a storage area for the total number of reserved balls is provided. Then, in this reserved ball storage area 632, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are displayed in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls entered into the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. It is stored as follows.

In detail about each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of "0" to "599", and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = "0" to "599"). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. More specifically, when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 604, and when a game ball enters the right operating port 63a, it is stored in the right operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 604. is stored in

The random number value that results in a jackpot win or the random number value that results in a special win is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 621 as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the validity table will be explained using the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 11 and 12. As the win/fail table, a win/fail table for the lower operating port 62a (see FIG. 11) and a win/fail table for the right operating port 63a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In the lottery based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a, the winning/failure table for the right operating port 63a is referred to.

(Acceptance table for lower operating port)
In the win/fail table for the lower operating port 62a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the values of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot results are "7" and "507''. That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0" to "599", "7" and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of a jackpot is 2/600. The low probability mode compatible propriety table for the lower operating port 62a does not include random number values that correspond to special winning results, and other than the random number values that result in jackpot results, the lottery results correspond to negative results. There is.

In the win/fail table for the lower operating port 62a that is referenced when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 11(b), the values of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot results are "7", " 107'', ``207'', ``307'', ``407'', and ``507''. That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, The probability of hitting the jackpot is 6/600. The high probability mode compatible propriety table for the lower operating port 62a does not have random number values corresponding to special winning results, and other than random number values that result in jackpot results, the lottery result corresponds to a winning result. There is.

(Acceptance table for right operating port)
In the win/fail table for the right operating port 63a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the values of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot results are "7" and "507''. That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7" and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of a jackpot is 2/600, so the lower operating port 62a This is similar to the validity table for . However, in the win/fail table for the right operating port 63a, "1", "2", "3"... "597", "598", "599" correspond to special winning results, The probability of this outcome is 593/600. In addition, other than the random number value that results in a jackpot result or the random number value that results in a special win result, in detail, "4", "104", "204", "404", and "504" will result in a winning lottery result. It is configured as follows.

In the win/fail table for the right operating port 63a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the values of the random numbers corresponding to the jackpot results are "7", " 107'', ``207'', ``307'', ``407'', and ``507''. That is, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0" to "599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result, This is similar to the win/fail table for the lower operating port 62a in that the probability of a jackpot is 6/600. However, in the win/fail table for the right operating port 63a, "1", "2", "3"... "597", "598", "599" correspond to special winning results, The probability of this outcome is 593/600. In addition, other than the random number value that results in a jackpot result and the random number value that results in a special win result, specifically, "404" is configured so that the lottery result becomes a losing result.

In this way, the probability of a jackpot result is the same regardless of whether a prize is won at the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. However, when comparing the lower operating port 62a and the right operating port 63a, the possibility of a special winning result is set higher for the right operating port 63a. In other words, when comparing the probability that a certain number of balls can be expected to be released, the right operating port 63a is given preferential treatment over the lower operating port 62a.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10 again, the winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of "0" to "99", and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). There is. The winning type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. More specifically, when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 604, and when a game ball enters the right operating port 63a, it is stored in the right operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 604. is stored in

The distribution destinations of game results for the winning type counter C2 are stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 622 serving as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. In this embodiment, the type of jackpot result is determined with reference to the winning type counter C2 and the distribution table. The jackpot results are 2R normal jackpot result, 8R normal jackpot result, 2R fixed variable jackpot result, 6R fixed variable jackpot result A, 6R fixed variable jackpot result B, 6R fixed variable jackpot result C, 6R fixed variable jackpot result D, 6R fixed variable jackpot result E, There are 8R certain variable jackpot results, 16R certain variable jackpot results A, and 16R certain variable jackpot results B.

(Distribution table for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the distribution table for the lower operating port, a total of 50 of the values of "0" to "49" of the winning type counter C2 of "0" to "99" are 8R normal jackpots. A total of 10 pieces from ``50'' to ``59'' correspond to 6R probability variable jackpot result A, and a total of 8 pieces from ``60'' to ``67'' correspond to 6R probability variable jackpot result B. A total of 6 pieces from “68” to “73” correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result C, a total of 4 pieces from “74” to “77” correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result D, and “ A total of 2 pieces from ``78'' to ``79'' correspond to the 6R probability variable jackpot result E, a total of 18 pieces from ``80'' to ``97'' correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot result A, and ``98'' to `` 99'' in total correspond to 16R probability variable jackpot result B.

(Distribution table for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 13(b), in the distribution table for the right operating port, a total of 35 of the values of "0" to "34" of the winning type counter C2 of "0" to "99" are 2R normal jackpots. A total of 5 pieces from “35” to “39” correspond to the 2R definite variable jackpot result, and a total of 10 pieces from “40” to “49” correspond to the 6R definite variable jackpot result A. Therefore, a total of 4 pieces from “50” to “53” correspond to 6R variable jackpot result B, a total of 3 pieces from “54” to “56” correspond to 6R variable jackpot result C, and “57” ” to “58” correspond to the 6R definite variable jackpot result D, “59” corresponds to the 6R definite variable jackpot result E, and “60” to “95” correspond to the 16R definite variable jackpot result A. A total of four numbers “96” to “99” correspond to 16R probability variable jackpot result B.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10 again, the reach random number counter C3 is configured such that, for example, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a or the right operating port 63a. More specifically, when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a, it is stored in the lower operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 604, and when a game ball enters the right operating port 63a, it is stored in the right operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 604. is stored in Based on the ready-to-reach table stored in the ready-to-reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether or not to generate the ready-to-reach display (ready-to-reach state).

Here, the ready-to-reach display is equipped with a symbol display device 75 that is capable of displaying symbols (pictures) in a variable manner (or variable display), and in a game where the game result corresponds to the opening/closing execution mode. In a gaming machine where a stop display result after display can become a special display result, at a stage after the start of variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 75 and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, This is a display state that makes the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the above-mentioned special display result.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established. This is a display state in which possible combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode is established on a preset valid line on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A ready-to-reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of ready-to-reach symbols, and symbols are fluctuated and displayed by a final stopped symbol sequence under the situation where the ready-to-reach line is formed.

To explain in more detail the display contents on the display screen 75a, first, when the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the right symbol column, and then after the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the left symbol column, when the symbol hits any active line, A reach line is formed when the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination are stopped and displayed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row, resulting in a reach. will be displayed. When a jackpot occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination of winning symbols are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbols in the middle symbol row are displayed in a fluctuating manner. is terminated.

In addition, in the reach display, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, the remaining symbol rows display fluctuating symbols, and the background screen displays a predetermined character etc. as a moving image. These include those that perform a reach effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols. In addition, when the reach display is being performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is the variation display time of the symbol in the lower operating port display section DL and the right operating port display section DR of the main display unit 81 (main display section D) and the symbol variable display time in the symbol display device 75. The MPU 602 is used to determine the following. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the lower operation opening display section DL and the right operation opening display section DR (when the symbol display device 75 starts changing the symbols). Ru.

The open random number counter C4 for the electric accessory 71 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The open random number counter C4 is updated regularly and stored in the power storage area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, the electric accessory 71 is selected by referring to the stored value of the open random number counter C4 and the support lottery table (win/fail information group) stored in the win/fail table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. An opening lottery (support lottery) is held to determine whether or not to control the open state. Please note that the probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (249/250 in detail) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (248/250 in detail). mode is given preferential treatment.

(About various processes executed by MPU 602 of main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 602 in the main control device 162 to advance the game in each game round will be explained. In addition to the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 602 executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). , a description of these processes will be omitted.

(timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 14. This process is started by the MPU 602 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing for various detection sensors (for example, the above-mentioned detection sensors 317 to 319, 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. For example, if it is determined that a winning has occurred in the lower operating port 62a, a winning detection flag for the lower operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and it is determined that a winning has occurred in the right operating port 63a. In this case, a winning detection flag for the right operating opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635, and when it is determined that a winning has occurred in the upper variable winning device 64, a winning detection flag for the upper large winning opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635. When it is determined that a winning has occurred in the advantageous ball winning section 314, the winning detection flag for the advantageous ball winning section is stored in the various flag storage area 635, and the lower variable winning device 65 When it is determined that a winning has occurred, a winning detection flag for the lower major winning opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635.

Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

After that, in step S104, the winning process for the through gate is executed in accordance with the winning in the through gate 66, and in the subsequent step S105, the winning process for the actuating opening is executed in accordance with the winning in the actuating ports 62a and 63a. Terminates timer interrupt processing.

(Win processing for through)
In the through prize winning process of step S104, first, it is determined whether the game ball has won the through gate 66 or not. If the game ball enters the through gate 66 and the number SN of accessory items reserved is less than the upper limit (more specifically, 4), the number SN of accessory items reserved is incremented by 1 and updated in step S103 above. The value of the open random number counter C4 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the power storage area 633 of the RAM 604. After that, the main winning process ends.

If it is determined that the game ball has not entered the through gate 66, or if it has been determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 66 but the accessory retention memory number SN has reached the upper limit, the value of the open random number counter C4 is The main winning process ends without storing.

In addition, in the winning process for through, the display control process of the pending number display section SS for through gate of the main display unit 81 is executed. Specifically, the light emission control process is executed so that the same number of light emitters as the number SN of accessory hold memory are lit on the reservation number display section SS for the through gate consisting of four light emitters (LEDs).

(Winning process for actuation port)
In the winning process for the operating port, first, whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating port 62a) is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 for the lower operating port. The determination is made based on whether or not the winning detection flag is stored. If it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, if a detection signal indicating that a winning ball has entered the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating opening 62a) is received, the payout control is performed. A prize ball command for causing the device 181 to pay out four game balls is set. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the game hall side, which indicates that a game ball has won a prize in the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating opening 62a). As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has occurred in the lower operating ball entry portion 62 (lower operating opening 62a).

Thereafter, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the lower operation opening (start hold storage number) is updated (added by 1). Subsequently, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and the main winning processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the winning detection flag for the lower operating port is not stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 and the winning detection flag for the right operating port is stored, the payout control device 181 Set a prize ball command to pay out one game ball. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

Next, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the hall computer HC on the gaming hall side, which indicates that a game ball has won a prize in the right operating ball entrance portion 63 (right operating opening 63a). As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has occurred in the right operating ball entering portion 63 (right operating opening 63a).

Thereafter, the value stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the right operating port (start hold storage number) is updated (added by 1). Subsequently, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and the main winning processing is ended.

In addition, if the game ball does not win in either of the lower operating ball entering section 62 and the right operating ball entering section 63, the main winning process is immediately terminated.

(normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As a general outline, the process of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as commands set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if commands for effects are set, such as commands that correspond to effects for game cycles such as a fluctuation start command, type command, and variation end command, or commands that correspond to effects for opening/closing execution mode, it will be notified. - Send to the production control device 143. Further, output settings for the external terminal board 213 are performed according to information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604.

Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

In the following step S203, a game round control process is executed to advance the game of each game round. In this game round control process, judgments are made on whether or not there is a jackpot, etc., and the distribution of the jackpot type is determined, as well as setting of variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 75, and display for the operating opening on the main display unit 81 (main display section D). Controls display of sections DL, DR, etc.

Thereafter, in step S204, a gaming state transition process is executed to shift the gaming state. Although the details will be described later, this gaming state transition process shifts the gaming state to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, or the like.

In the following step S205, an electrical support process for controlling the drive of the electrically powered accessory 71 attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is executed. In this electrical support process, information stored in the electrical storage area of the RAM 604 is used to determine whether or not the electrically powered accessory 71 should be opened. Performs display control of the gate display section DS, etc.

In the following step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined process is performed on the condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply/launch control device 191 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball firing mechanism 110 is energized once during the firing period (0.6 sec in this embodiment). As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE. In other words, if an irregular hit such as a so-called stop shot is not performed, the game ball is repeatedly fired at a predetermined period on the condition that a firing operation is performed.

In the following step S207, it is determined whether a power outage flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The power outage flag is set when the occurrence of a power outage is confirmed on the power outage monitoring board 605 and a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power outage flag is not set, it means that the last process of the multiple processes that are repeatedly executed has finished, so in step S208, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S206 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power outage flag is set, this means that a power outage has occurred, and the power outage processing from step S211 onwards is executed. Specifically, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited in step S211, the RAM judgment value is calculated and saved in step S212, and access to the RAM 604 is prohibited in step S213, and then the power is completely shut off. The infinite loop continues until the process can no longer be executed.

(Game time control processing)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 20, supplementary explanation will be given of the game time control process of step S203. As shown in FIG. 16, in the game cycle control process shown in this embodiment, first in step S301 it is determined whether or not the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag (opening/closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening/closing execution mode flag storage area (opening/closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. do. The opening/closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in a gaming state transition process to be described later, and is cleared when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the same gaming state transition process.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S301, the main game round control process is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S301, the process proceeds to step S302 to process the game time control process for the game time related to the winning to the lower actuating ball entry portion 62 (lower actuating port 62a) (game time control corresponding to the lower actuating port). processing, lower operating port control processing), and in step S303, the game round control process (game round control corresponding to the right operating port After executing the control processing for the right operating port), the present game round control processing is ended. These two control processes have the same basic flow. Hereinafter, the control process for the lower operating port will be explained first with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, and then the control processing for the right operating port will be explained with reference to FIGS. Control processing will be explained.

(Control processing for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 17, in the lower operating port control process, first in step S401, it is determined whether or not a game round related to the lower operating port 62a is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lower operation opening display section DL of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game of the game is being executed. Note that this determination is made when the game run flag (game run information) for the lower operation opening is stored (stored) in the game run flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether the The game round flag for the lower operating port is stored when variable display is started on the lower operating port display section DL, and is erased when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the fixed display ends.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the right operating port 63a is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the right operating port display section DR of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game of the game is being executed. This determination is made when the game run flag (variable display information) for the right operating port is stored (stored) in the game run flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether the The game round flag for the right operating port is stored when starting a variable display on the right operating port display section DR, and the final display ends after the symbols, etc. corresponding to the lottery result (game result) are stopped and displayed. will be deleted if

If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the process advances to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result or special win result in the game round related to the right operating port 63a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S403, the present lower operating port control process is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S403 or step S402, the process advances to step S404. In step S404, the total number of reservations storage area of the reservation ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of reservations stored for the lower operation opening CRN (more specifically, the number of reservations stored for the lower operation opening 62a) which is the number of reservation information stored on hold is It is determined whether or not the number) is "0". If the number of reserved memories CRN for the lower operation opening is "0", the game round control process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the lower operating port retention memory number CRN is not "0", the process advances to step S405. In step S405, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the lower operating port 62a, first, the lower operating port reserved memory number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, the data stored in the first area of the lower operation opening holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the lower operation opening holding area Ra is shifted. Execute the processing to do so.

This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, in which the data in the first area is cleared, and the data is shifted from the second area to the first area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. Then, one LED that is lit in the reservation number display section for the lower operation port is turned off. In this light extinguishing process, contrary to the lighting process that is executed when reservation information is added, the LEDs of the reservation number display section SL for the lower operation port are turned off in order from the bottom.

After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S406, the lower operating opening is changed in order to start the variable display of the symbol on the lower operating opening display section DL and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75. After executing the start process (lower operation opening variation start process), this game round control process is ended. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the lower operating port variation start process of step S406 will be described.

(Fluctuation start processing for lower operating port)
In the lower operating port variation start process, first, in step S501, a propriety determination process is executed. In the win/fail determination process, the win/fail table for the lower operating port is referred to, and the information for the win/fail determination among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information acquired from the winning random number counter C1, is determined to be the jackpot numerical value described above. Determine whether it matches the information. If the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, numerical information acquired from the winning type counter C2 is grasped. Also, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the information for type determination grasped above corresponds to the information group corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variable jackpot result A. Information group, information group corresponding to 6R probability variable jackpot result B, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, 16R probability variation jackpot It is specified which of the information group corresponding to result A and the information group corresponding to 16R probability variable jackpot result B is included.

In step S504, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed. Specifically, the stop result table for jackpot results is stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (lower operation opening display section DL) of the main display unit 81 in the game round is stored in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for jackpot results, and in step S504, information indicating the symbols according to the jackpot results is stored in the RAM 604. In addition, in step S504, the current game results are 8R normal jackpot result, 6R probability variable jackpot result A, 6R probability variation jackpot result B, 6R probability variation jackpot result C, 6R probability variation jackpot result D, 6R probability variation jackpot result E, 16R probability variation jackpot result. Information for the MPU 602 to specify whether it is the result A or the 16R probability variable jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if it is an 8R normal jackpot result, the 8R normal flag is stored, if it is a 6R probability variable jackpot result A, the 6R probability variation A flag is stored, and if it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result B, the 6R flag is stored. The probability variable B flag is stored, and if the 6R probability variation jackpot result is C, the 6R probability variation C flag is stored, and if the 6R probability variation jackpot result is D, the 6R probability variation D flag is stored, and the 6R probability variation jackpot result is E. If the result is a 16R probability variable jackpot result A, the 16R probability variation A flag is stored; if the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the 16R probability variation B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S504, the process advances to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the right operating port 63a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S505, the process advances to step S506. In step S506, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game round (fluctuating display of symbols) related to the right operating port 63a is being executed, the game round (fluctuating display of symbols) related to the right operating port 63a is forcibly stopped midway based on this forced termination flag. It will be terminated. More specifically, if the game round associated with the lower operating port 62a corresponds to a jackpot result, and the gaming round associated with the right operating port 63a may be executed beyond the timing at which the confirmation display for the relevant game round is performed. In this case, the game times related to the right operating port 63a are shortened, and the gaming times related to the right operating port 63a end at the same time as the gaming times related to the lower operating port 62a end. In such a case, the picture that is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the right operating port 63a corresponds to the winning result.

Returning to the explanation of step S502, if the determination result in step S501 is a negative result, a negative determination is made in step S502, and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, a stop result setting process for a deviation result is executed.

Specifically, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (lower operation opening display section DL) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current variation is set to the winning pattern that is stored in advance in the ROM 603. It is specified from the stop result table for results, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the processing in steps S506 and S507, or when a negative determination is made in step S505, the process advances to step S508. In step S508, a variable display time (display continuation time) setting process is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S509. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrence, so Even if the start command does not include information on whether a reach has occurred, the notification/effect control device 143, which is a sub-side control device, can identify whether a reach has occurred from the information on the variable display time. . In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation start command may include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred.

After executing the setting process in step S509, the process proceeds to step S510, and after starting the variable display of the lower operating port display section DL in the main display unit 81, the lower operating port variation start process is ended. In the process of step S510, the game round flag for the lower operation opening is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Thereby, in subsequent processing, it becomes possible to specify that the game round (for example, variable display) related to the lower operating port 62a is being executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the symbols in the first operating port display section D1 and the symbols in the symbol display device 75 is started in accordance with the lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the variable display of the symbols to start before the lottery.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, that is, if it is determined that the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is in progress, the process advances to step S407. In step S407, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the symbol corresponding to the special winning result in the game round related to the right operating port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the process advances to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the right operating port 63a. If negative determinations are made in steps S407 and S408, the process advances to step S409.

In step S409, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed for the variable display time set in step S508. If a negative determination is made in step S409, the process for variable display is executed in step S410, and then the control process for the lower operating port ends. In the process for variable display in step S410, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a process of lighting/extinguishing each LED constituting the lower operating port display section DL.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S409, the process advances to step S412. In step S412, a variation end process is executed. In the variation end process, display control is performed on the main display unit 81 so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the lower operating port display section DL in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, a final display of a symbol corresponding to a lottery result (game result) is executed. Note that the game round flag for the lower operating port stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased when the confirmation display ends.

After setting the fluctuation end command in the subsequent step S413, the present game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S413 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/performance control device 143 executes processing for ending the performance in that game round based on receiving the variation end command. In addition, the fluctuation end command is sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/performance control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the fluctuation end command to respond to the game results, etc. of the game round. The selected combination of symbols is displayed as a final stop on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It should be noted that a structure may be adopted in which the notification/performance control device 143 or the display control device 710 independently ends the performance of the game cycle without transmitting the variation end command.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S407 or step S408, a stop pattern rewriting process is executed in step S410, and after each process in steps S412 and S413 is executed, the main lower operating port is Terminates control processing. In the stop result rewriting process, first, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special winning result. If it does not correspond to a special winning result, rewriting of the stop symbol (picture corresponding to a miss result) determined in the lower operation opening variation start process is avoided. On the other hand, if the current game result corresponds to a special winning result, the stop symbol (picture corresponding to the special winning result) determined in the lower operation mouth fluctuation start process will correspond to the result. Rewrite the image to the one you want.

Next, the right operating port control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20.

(Control processing for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 19, in the right operating port control process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the right operating port 63a is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the right operating port display section DR of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game of the game is being executed. This determination is made when the game run flag (variable display information) for the right operating port is stored (stored) in the game run flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether the The game round flag for the right operating port is stored when variable display is started on the right operating port display section DR, and is erased when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the fixed display ends.

If the game is not in progress, a negative determination is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not a game relating to the lower operating port 62a is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lower operation opening display section DL of the main display unit 81 is in the variable display to fixed display, that is, whether one game of the game is being executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process advances to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operation opening 62a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the control process for the right operating port is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if a negative determination is made in step S602, the process advances to step S604. In step S604, the total number of reservations storage area of the reservation ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the number of reservations stored for the right operating port CRN (more specifically, the number of reservations stored for the right operating port 63a) is the number of pending information stored in the storage area 632. It is determined whether or not the number) is "0". If the number of reserved memories CRN for the right operating port is "0", the game time control process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the number of reserved memories CRN for the right operating port is not "0", the process advances to step S605. In step S605, data setting processing is performed.

In the data setting process for the right operating port 63a, first, the right operating port reserved memory number CRN is decremented by one. After that, the data stored in the first area of the holding area Rb for the right operating port is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 10), and the data stored in the storage area of the holding area Rb for the right operating port is shifted. Execute the processing to do so.

This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, in which the data in the first area is cleared, and the data is shifted from the second area to the first area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: third area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. Then, one LED that is lit in the reservation number display section for the right operating port is turned off. In this lights-out process, contrary to the lighting process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold lamp section for the right operating port are turned off in order from the bottom.

After performing the data setting process detailed above, in step S606, the right operating port is opened to start variable display of the symbol on the main display unit 81 (main display section D) and variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 75. After executing the variation start process for the right operating port (variation start process for the right operating port), the present game time control process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the right operating port variation start process in step S606 will be described.

(Fluctuation start processing for right operating port)
In the right operating port variation start process, first, in step S701, a propriety determination process is executed. In the win/fail determination process, the right/failure table for the right operating port is referred to, and the information for the win/fail determination among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information related to the winning random number counter C1, is determined to be the jackpot numerical value described above. Determine whether it matches the information. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

In step S703, type determination processing is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination among various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, numerical information obtained from the winning type counter C2 and the distribution stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603. With reference to the table, the information for type determination grasped above is an information group corresponding to the 2R regular jackpot result, an information group corresponding to the 2R probability variable jackpot result, an information group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result A, and a 6R probability variation jackpot. Information group corresponding to result B, information group corresponding to 6R probability variable jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R probability variation jackpot result E, information corresponding to 16R probability variation jackpot result A It is specified which of the information groups corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result B is included in the information group.

In step S704, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed. Specifically, the stop result table for jackpot results is stored in advance in the ROM 603, and the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (right operating mouth display section DR) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for jackpot results, and in step S704, information indicating the symbols corresponding to the jackpot results is stored in the RAM 604. In addition, in step S704, the current game results are 2R normal jackpot result, 2R probability variable jackpot result, 6R probability variation jackpot result A, 6R probability variation jackpot result B, 6R probability variation jackpot result C, 6R probability variation jackpot result D, and 6R probability variation jackpot result. E, 16R probable variable jackpot result A, or 16R probable variable jackpot result B is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 with information for the MPU 602 to specify. Specifically, if it is a 2R normal jackpot result, the 2R normal flag is stored, if it is a 2R probability variable jackpot result, the 2R probability variation flag is stored, and if it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R probability variation A is stored. If the result is 6R probability variable jackpot result B, the 6R probability variation B flag is stored; if the result is 6R probability variation jackpot result C, the 6R probability variation C flag is stored; if the result is 6R probability variation jackpot result D, the 6R probability variation B flag is stored; stores the 6R probability variable D flag, if the 6R probability variable jackpot result E, stores the 6R probability variation E flag, if the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, stores the 16R probability variation A flag, and stores the 16R probability variation jackpot result B. If so, the 16R probability variable B flag is stored.

After executing the setting process in step S704, the process advances to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process advances to step S706. In step S706, the forced termination flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game round (fluctuating display of symbols) related to the lower operating port 62a is being executed, the gaming round (fluctuating display of symbols) related to the lower operating port 62a is forcibly stopped midway based on this forced termination flag. It will be terminated. More specifically, if the game round associated with the right operating opening 63a corresponds to a jackpot result, and the gaming round associated with the lower operating opening 62a (corresponding to a winning result) exceeds the timing at which the confirmation display for that gaming round is performed, ) can be executed, the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is shortened, and the gaming cycle related to the lower operating port 62a ends at the same time as the gaming cycle related to the right operating port 63a ends. In such a case, the picture that is stopped and displayed in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a corresponds to the winning result.

Returning to the explanation of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is a special winning result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and an affirmative determination is made in step S707, and the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, a stop result setting process for special winning results is executed. Specifically, the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (right operating port display section DR) of the main display unit 81 in the relevant game round is set as the stop result for the special winning result stored in advance in the ROM 603. It is specified from the table and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. A plurality of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section D are set in this stop result table for the special win result, and in step S703, information indicating the symbol corresponding to the special win result is stored in the RAM 604. Incidentally, if the current game result is a special winning result, the special winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604.

After executing the process in step S707, the processes in steps S704 and S705 described above are executed.

If the determination result in step S701 is a negative result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and step S707, and the process advances to step S709. In step S709, a stop result setting process for a deviation result is executed. Specifically, the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section D (right operating port display section DR) of the main display unit 81 in the game round related to the start of the current variation is set to a symbol that is pre-stored in the ROM 603. It is specified from the stop result table for results, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

After executing the process in step S706 or step S709, or if a negative determination is made in step S705, the process advances to step S710. In step S710, a variable display time (display continuation time) setting process is executed. Details of this variable display time setting process will be described later.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S710, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S711. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is different from the variable display time obtained by referring to the variable display time table for reach occurrence, so Even if the start command does not include information on whether or not a reach has occurred, the notification/effect control device 143, which is a sub-side control device, can identify the presence or absence of a reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this respect, it can be said that the fluctuation start command includes information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Note that the fluctuation start command may include information directly indicating whether or not a reach has occurred. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the symbols on the second operating port display section D2 and the symbols on the symbol display device 75 is started in accordance with the lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the variable display of the symbols to start before the lottery.

After executing the setting process in step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, and after starting the variable display of the right operating port display section DR in the main display unit 81, the present right operating port variation start process is ended. In the process of step S712, the game round flag for the right operating port is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Thereby, in subsequent processing, it becomes possible to specify that the game round (eg, variable display) related to the right operating port 63a is being executed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 19 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game round related to the right operating port 63a is in progress, the process advances to step S608. In step S608, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operation opening 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S608, the process advances to step S609.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the timing has elapsed for the variable display time. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the control process for the right operating port is ended after executing the process for variable display in step S610. In the process for variable display in step S610, a pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a process of turning on/off each LED constituting the right operating port display section DR.

If the result in step S609 is positive stabilization, the process advances to step S612. In step S612, a variation end process is executed. In the variation end process, display control is performed on the main display unit 81 so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the right operating port display section DR in a predetermined manner.

After setting the fluctuation end command in the subsequent step S613, the present game round control process is ended. The variation end command set in step S613 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/performance control device 143 executes processing for ending the performance in that game round based on receiving the variation end command. In addition, the fluctuation end command is sent to the display control device 710 via the notification/performance control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the fluctuation end command to respond to the game results, etc. of the game round. The selected combination of symbols is displayed as a final stop on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It should be noted that a structure may be adopted in which the notification/performance control device 143 or the display control device 710 independently ends the performance of the game cycle without transmitting the variation end command.

Returning to the explanation of step S608, if an affirmative determination is made in step S608, the process advances to step S611. That is, if it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game round related to the lower operation opening 62a, the process advances to step S611. In step S611, the stop result is rewritten.

In the stop result rewriting process, first, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a special winning result. If it does not correspond to a special winning result, rewriting of the stop symbol (picture corresponding to a miss result) determined in the right operating port variation start process is avoided. On the other hand, if the current game result corresponds to a special winning result, the stop symbol (picture corresponding to the special winning result) determined in the right operating mouth fluctuation start process will correspond to the result. Rewrite the image to the one you want. After executing the process in step S611, each process in steps S612 and S613 described above is executed, and then the control process for the right operating port ends.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the gaming state transition process in step S204 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 25. As already explained, in this embodiment, there is a normal game state in which the game progresses based on balls entering the operating ports 62a and 63a, and a special game state in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened (opening/closing execution mode). ) is provided. Regarding the normal game state, the first normal game state is the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is a low frequency support mode, and the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is a high frequency support mode. A second normal game state that is a support mode, a third normal game state where the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is a low frequency support mode, a lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support by the electric accessory 71. It consists of a fourth normal game state where the mode is a high-frequency support mode, and the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state are switched via a special game state corresponding to a jackpot result, etc.

In the gaming state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the timing has come to end the game round (specifically, the confirmation display). If it is not the timing at which the game round has ended, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

If the game round has ended, more specifically, if the preset stop display time (fixed display time) has elapsed after the end of the variable display, the process advances to step S803, and the current It is determined whether the game result of the game round (the result of the above-mentioned win/fail lottery) corresponds to the transition to the special game state (opening/closing execution mode). Specifically, the above-mentioned 8R normal flag, 2R normal flag, 2R definite variable flag, 6R definite variable A flag, 6R definite variable B flag, 6R definite variable C flag, 6R definite variable D flag, 6R definite variable E flag, 16R definite variable A are stored in the RAM 604. It is determined whether either the flag or the 16R probability variable B flag is stored. If none of the above-mentioned flags are stored, the main game state transition process is immediately ended.

If any of the above flags is stored, in step S804, opening/closing execution mode start processing is executed. In the start process, first, an opening standby time (starting standby time) is used to make the variable winning device 65 stand by without starting to open the upper prize opening 311 of the variable winning device 65 for the opening of the opening/closing execution mode. Set. Specifically, opening standby time information previously stored in the ROM 603 is set in the standby time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 .

The opening waiting time (opening time) in this embodiment differs depending on the type of win. Specifically, the waiting time for the opening in the case of a jackpot result is 5 seconds, whereas the waiting time for the opening in the case of a special winning result is shorter than that, specifically 8 msec. It has become.

In the following step S805, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round number counter RC provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "2", and if the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, the round number counter RC is set to "6". ", and if the current jackpot result is an 8R jackpot result, set the round number counter RC to "8", and if the current jackpot result is a 16R jackpot result, set the round number counter RC to "16". ”. The round number counter RC is decremented each time the round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes "0", the current special gaming state ends.

In the following step S807, if the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the high frequency support mode flag is deleted. As a result, the support mode is maintained at the low-frequency support mode during the special game state corresponding to the jackpot result.

Returning to the explanation of step S805, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if the special game state is triggered by a special winning result, the process advances to step S808. In step S808, a second winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Thereafter, in step S809, the round number counter is set to "1". In the subsequent processing, based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set, it is determined that the current special game state corresponds to the special winning result.

After executing the process of step S807 or step S809, the process advances to step S810. In step S810, opening command setting processing is performed. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode on the symbol display device 75, and this determined display mode is outputted from the notification/performance control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. In the display control device 710, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 143, the display control device 710 displays a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, as a display content corresponding to a jackpot. Display control of the symbol display device 75 is executed so that moving images of characters, etc. are displayed, background images, etc. are switched.

After the opening command setting process is executed in step S810, the external signal setting process is executed in step S811, and the main gaming state transition process ends. In the external signal setting process of step S811, it is determined whether the RAM 604 stores any of the various jackpot flags and special win flags, and if any of the flags is stored, the game hall side A signal indicating that a jackpot or special win has occurred is output to the management control device (hall computer HC). By receiving this external signal, the management control device recognizes that the special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) has been entered.

Returning to the explanation of step S801, if the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for opening has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is ended. If the waiting time for opening has elapsed, a big winning opening opening/closing process is executed in step S813.

Here, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 24.

(Big prize opening/closing process)
As shown in FIG. 22, in the big winning opening opening/closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second winning mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process advances to step S902 and a first opening/closing process is executed. The first opening/closing process is a process executed when the game is in a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to a jackpot result.

(First opening/closing process)
As shown in FIG. 23, in the first opening/closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether the upper variable prize winning device 64 (upper prize winning opening 311) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning drive section 451 of the upper variable prize winning device 64. If the top prize opening 311 is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether the value of the round number counter RC is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the first opening/closing process is directly ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process advances to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is "0". The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referenced when checking the opening time and interval time (interval time between rounds) of the University of Japan winning hole 311, and is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed. The value is subtracted by "1". If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the first opening/closing process ends.

If the value of the round number counter RC is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process advances to step S1004, and the process of opening the upper variable prize winning device 64 (upper prize winning opening 311) is executed. do. Specifically, the variable winning a prize driving section 451 is brought into a driving state in order to open the top prize winning opening 311.

Thereafter, the processing of steps S1005 to S1006 is executed as the closing condition setting processing (opening setting processing) for the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311). Specifically, in step S1005, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 seconds), and in the subsequent step S1006, the winning counter PC is set to "9".

In the following step S1007, it is determined whether it is the first round (first round) in the current special gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the process advances to step S1008. In step S1008, it is determined whether the current special game state corresponds to a probability variable jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, a definite change channel switching process is executed in step S1009. In the definite variable flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive unit 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and a duration time for continuing output of the drive signal is set. . This continuation time is the same as the maximum opening time of the University of Technology prize opening 311. For this reason, when game balls are continuously shot to the right route, winnings will occur in the advantageous ball entry section 314 most of the time, and the shift to the high probability mode will be confirmed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1008, normal flow path switching processing is executed in step S1010. In the normal channel switching process, similarly to the variable channel switching process, a drive signal is output to the channel switching drive section 452 to move the channel switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the drive signal is Set the duration time to continue outputting. This continuation time is shorter than the maximum opening time of the top prize opening 311. More specifically, the time is set shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the top prize winning opening 311 to reach the advantageous ball entry portion 314 (specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319). Therefore, even if the game ball is continuously shot to the right route, winning in the advantageous ball landing section 314 is basically avoided.

After executing the flow path switching process in steps S1009 and S1010, or when a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process advances to step S1011. In step S1011, an open command indicating that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) has been opened is set, and the first opening/closing process is ended. This set release command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 15). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open, the process advances to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether it is time to return the flow path switching member 316 to the protruding position. Specifically, it is determined whether the duration time set in steps S1009 and S1010 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive section 452 is stopped in step S1013, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after executing the return process in step S1013, the process advances to step S1014. In step S1014, it is determined whether the value of timer counter TC1 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process advances to step S1015, and the upstream detection sensor 317 disposed in the upper variable winning device 64 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the upper large winning opening 311. The determination is made based on the detection information (detection signal).

If a winning has occurred, output processing of a winning command is executed in step S1016. The winning command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, and the notification/performance control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1016, the process advances to step S1017. In step S1017, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1018, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or not. If it is not "0", the main winning opening opening/closing process is continued. finish.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1018, that is, the value of the winning counter PC is "0", or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1014 (that is, if the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0") ), it means that the conditions for closing the big winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning drive unit 451 is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311).

In the following step S1020, it is determined whether the flow path switching member 316 is placed in the retracted position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1020, the output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive section 452 is stopped in step S1021, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

After executing the return process in step S1021, or if a negative determination is made in step S1020, the process advances to step S1022, and a process to update the round number counter RC is executed. Specifically, if the value of the round number counter RC is not "0", the relevant round number counter RC is decremented by 1, and if the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the relevant round number counter RC is The value of is maintained at "0".

Thereafter, in step S1023, it is determined whether the updated value of the round number counter RC is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1023, the process advances to step S1024, and the timer counter TC1 is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec).

After executing the process in step S1024, a closing command is set in step S1025, and the first opening/closing process ends. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The notification/performance control device 143 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the received closing command based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

Returning to the explanation of step S1023, if it is determined in step S1023 that the value of the round number counter RC is "0", the process advances to step S1026. In step S1026, ending start processing is executed. In the start processing, an ending standby time (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode to wait without starting the next game round. Specifically, the waiting time information for ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 603, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

After that, in step S1027, an ending command is set, and then the first opening/closing process is ended. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 22, if an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the second opening/closing process in step S903 is executed. The second opening/closing process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 24.

(Second opening/closing process)
In the second opening/closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive section 461 of the lower variable winning device 65. If the lower major winning hole 341 is not being opened, a process for opening the lower variable winning device 65 (lower major winning hole 341) is executed in step S1102. Specifically, the variable winning a prize driving section 461 is brought into a driving state in order to open the lower large winning a prize opening 341.

After that, the processing of steps S1103 to S1104 is executed as the closing condition setting processing (opening setting processing) corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, the timer counter TC1 is set to "400" (corresponding to 0.8 sec), and in the subsequent step S1104, the winning counter PC is set to "9".

Returning to the explanation of step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the lower variable prize winning device 65 (lower large prize opening 341) is open, the process advances to step S1105, and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0". Determine whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process advances to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the lower large winning opening 341 from the ball entering detection sensor disposed in the lower variable winning device 65. Determination is made based on the detection signal.

If a winning has occurred, output processing of a winning command is executed in step S1107. The winning command is output to the notification/performance control device 143, and the notification/performance control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process advances to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the prize winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the following step S1109, it is determined whether the value of the winning prize counter PC is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the second opening/closing process is immediately terminated. do.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, that is, the value of the winning counter PC is "0," or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1105, that is, the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be "0." ), it means that the conditions for closing the big winning opening have been met. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning prize driving section 461 is brought into a non-driving state in order to close the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341).

In the following step S1111, ending start processing is executed. In the start processing, an ending standby time (0.2 sec in this embodiment) is set for the ending of the opening/closing execution mode to wait without starting the next game round. Specifically, the waiting time information for ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 603, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

After that, in step S1112, after setting an ending command, the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 15).

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 21 again, after executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether the round number counter RC is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S814, the main game state transition process is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S814, the process advances to step S815. In step S815, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter RC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S816, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the main game End the state transition process. Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described.

(Transition process when opening/closing execution mode ends)
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, first, it is determined whether the current special game state corresponds to the first winning mode. If it corresponds to the first winning mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process advances to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the current special game state. If a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1203. As a result, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode in the subsequent normal game state.

After executing the process in step S1203, or if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process advances to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether the current special game state corresponds to transition to the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, a high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1205, and in the subsequent step S1206, the number of games provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is set. Set the counter to a value corresponding to the current jackpot result. The number of games counter is decremented each time a game is played, and when the value of the number of games counter becomes "0", the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, for example, if a 16R probability-variable jackpot is achieved based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a in the second to third normal gaming states, , the configuration is such that transition to high-frequency support mode is avoided.

After executing the process in step S1206, or when a negative determination is made in steps S1201 and S1204, the process advances to step S1207. In step S1207, various flags for special gaming states (for example, winning mode flag, jackpot flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and the main transition process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28, the electric role support process executed in step S205 of the normal process (see FIG. 15) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the electric role support process, FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram comparing the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening/closing process.

(Processing for electrical support)
In the power support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether support is being provided. Specifically, it is determined whether the currently supported flag is stored in the currently supported flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 . The support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operating port 63a is switched to the open state, and is erased when it is returned to the closed state.

If the supporting flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1302, and it is determined whether a support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 is won, and is erased when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1303, and it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main power support process is immediately terminated.

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", the process advances to step S1304, and it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the through gate display section DS. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, the off display is set and the timer counter TC2 is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec), and then the main power support process is ended. . By setting the out-of-line display, the fluctuating display of the picture on the through-gate display section DS ends with the out-of-line display stopped and displayed, and this out-of-line display continues for 0.5 seconds (Fig. 27 reference).

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the variable display, the process advances to step S1306, and it is determined whether or not the value of the above-mentioned accessory reserve memory number SN is larger than "0". If the value of the number SN of accessory items being stored is "0", the present electronic role support processing is ended as is. If the value of the number SN of stored accessories is larger than "0", it is determined in step S1307 whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

If the high-frequency support mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S1307, and the process advances to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to provide support using the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric accessory storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and stored in the validity table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 are shifted. The open lottery is performed by referring to the high-frequency support mode lottery table. Also, at the same time as the opening lottery, the CPU 10 sets the timer counter TC2 to "100" (equivalent to 0.2 seconds) by referring to the variable display time table corresponding to the high-frequency support mode stored in the ROM 603. Note that the timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the variable display of the picture on the through gate display section DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 0.2 seconds (see FIG. 27).

In the following step S1309, it is determined whether the result of the open lottery in step S1308 is a winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the process for this electronic support is terminated. If it is a support win, a support win flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1310, and the present electronic role support process ends.

If the low frequency support mode is in effect, a negative determination is made in step S1307, and the process advances to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to provide support using the electric accessory 71. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric accessory storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and stored in the validity table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 are shifted. The open lottery is performed by referring to the lottery table for the low-frequency support mode that has been set up. Further, at the same time as the opening lottery, "350" (corresponding to 0.7 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2 with reference to the variable display time table corresponding to the low frequency support mode stored in the ROM 603. Thereafter, the variable display of the picture on the through gate display section DS continues until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes "0", that is, for 0.7 seconds (see FIG. 27).

In the following step S1312, it is determined whether the result of the open lottery in step S1311 is a winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the process for this electronic support is terminated. If it is a support win, a support win flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1313, and the present electronic role support process ends.

Please note that the probability of winning support in high-frequency support mode (249/250 in detail) is higher than the probability of winning support in low-frequency support mode (248/250 in detail). mode is given preferential treatment.

Returning to the explanation of step S1302 in FIG. 26, if the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1314, where the value of the timer counter TC2 is Determine whether it is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner on the through-gate display section DS, so the main electronic role support process is immediately terminated. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0", a win display is set in step S1315. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the accessory display section 44 is ended while the winning display is stopped and displayed. In the following step S1316, a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 635, and after erasing the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 635, the present electronic role support process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, that is, if the supporting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process advances to step S1317, and the electric accessory 71 is opened/closed. After executing the electric role opening/closing process for control, the main electric role support process is ended. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 28, the electric role opening/closing process will be described.

(Electric opening/closing process)
In the electric accessory opening/closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the electric accessory 71 is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 71 is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 332 is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 71 is opened, the process advances to step S1402, and the number of winnings after the electric accessory 71 is opened reaches the upper limit (10 in this embodiment) for the attached right operating port 63a. Determine whether or not there is. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process advances to step S1403, and it is determined whether the value of timer counter TC2 is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main power opening/closing process is ended as is. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0" or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process advances to step S1404. In step S1404, a closing process is performed to switch (return) the electric accessory 71 to the closed state. Thereafter, in step S1405, the support flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and the present electronic role opening/closing process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1401, if the electric accessory 71 is not in the open state, a negative determination is made in step S1401, and the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is determined whether the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the main power opening/closing process is ended. When the timer counter TC2 is "0", in step S1407, an opening process for switching the electric accessory 71 to the open state is executed.

Thereafter, in step S1408, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is in the high-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "2850" (corresponding to 5.7 sec) in step S1409, and then the main power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is in the low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TC2 is set to "40" (equivalent to 0.08 sec) in step S1410, and then the main power opening/closing process is ended (see FIG. 27).

(Relationship between gaming status and variable display time)
As already explained, in the present embodiment, reservation information is acquired based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a and the right operating port 63a, and the symbols and patterns in the game round are determined based on the acquired pending information. The configuration is such that a variable display to a fixed display is executed. Here, the variable display time of the symbols and symbols is configured to be set according to the gaming state. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31, the configuration related to the setting of the variable display time, etc. (variable display time setting process in the variable start process for the lower actuating port (see FIG. 18) and fluctuation in the variable start process for the upper actuating port. A supplementary explanation will be given of the display time setting process (see FIG. 19). FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process (lower operating port variable display time setting process) in the lower operating port variation start process, and FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display time setting process for the right operating port. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the variable display time.

(Fluctuating display time setting process for lower operating port)
As shown in FIG. 29, in the variable display time setting process for the lower operating port, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the first normal game state is in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the first normal game state setting process is executed in step S1502, and then the present variable display time setting process is ended.

In the first normal gaming state setting process, a table corresponding to the current gaming round is selected from among the various variable display time tables for the first normal gaming state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. However, a variable display time is set depending on the number of pending information stored in the lower operation opening holding area Ra in the holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the winning lottery, and the presence or absence of a reach.

Regarding the variable display time, when comparing jackpot results and miss results, the former is likely to be longer than the latter, and in the case of a miss result but no reach display occurs (complete miss result). (in the case of ), it is configured such that the length becomes shorter as the number of stored hold information increases. FIG. 31(a1) shows an example of the variable display time in the case of a complete loss in the first normal gaming state. For example, if the number of stored hold information is "0" or "1", one of "12, 13, 14 seconds" is set as the variable display time, and the stored hold information If the number is "2", one of "7, 8, or 9 seconds" is set as the variable display time, and if the number of stored hold information is "3" or "4", Any one of "3, 4, and 5 seconds" is set as the variable display time. In addition, in the first normal game state, the fixed display time of the symbol on the lower operating opening display section DL and the fixed display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 29, if a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process advances to step S1503. In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the second normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, the second normal game state setting process is executed in step S1504, and then the present variable display time setting process is ended.

In the setting process for the second normal gaming state, a table corresponding to the current gaming round is selected from among the various variable display time tables for the second normal gaming state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

In the second normal gaming state, unlike the first normal gaming state, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored pending information and the result of the lottery. ing. Specifically, in the second normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec" for any game round (see FIG. 31). (see a2)), the variable display time is shorter than in the first normal game state.

Details will be described later, but in the second normal game state, by firing the game ball to the right route formed in the game area PE, the game is more advantageous to the player than when aiming for the left route. We will move on. The game ball launched to the right route enters the right operating port 63a, and the game progresses mainly based on the reservation information related to the right operating port 63a. Under such circumstances, the player may be confused by the interruption of a game round corresponding to the lower operating port 62a, which is less advantageous than the right operating port 63a. In this embodiment, in consideration of such circumstances, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed by quickly finishing the game round corresponding to the lower operation port 62a after transition to the second normal game state. ing.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503 in FIG. 29, the process advances to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the third normal game state setting process is executed in step S1506, and then the present variable display time setting process is ended.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from among the various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

In the third normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored pending information and the result of the lottery. ing. Specifically, in the third normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec" for any game round (see FIG. 31). a3)).

If a negative determination is made in step S1505 of FIG. 29, that is, if the fourth normal gaming state is compatible with the low probability mode and high frequency support mode, the process advances to step S1507, and the fourth normal gaming state setting process is performed. After execution, this variable display time setting process ends.

In the setting process for the fourth normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from among various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

In the fourth normal game state, unlike the first normal game state, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored pending information and the result of the lottery. ing. Specifically, in the fourth normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec" for any game round (see FIG. 31). a4)).

(Fluctuating display time setting process for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 30, in the variable display time setting process for the right operating port, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state is in the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the first normal game state setting process is executed in step S1602, and then the present variable display time setting process is ended.

In the first normal gaming state setting process, a table corresponding to the current gaming round is selected from among the various variable display time tables for the first normal gaming state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. and set the variable display time. Note that the variable display time table referred to in the variable display time setting process for the right operating port is a different table from the variable display time table referenced in the variable display time setting process for the lower operating port.

In the first normal game state, regardless of various conditions such as the number of pending information stored in the holding area Rb for the right operation port in the pending ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the lottery, the presence or absence of reach, etc. The selection candidates for the variable display time are limited to one. Specifically, in the first normal game state, the variable display time is configured to be "600 sec" and the fixed display time is "1 sec" for any game round (see FIG. 31 (b1)). . Although the game ball fired to the right route in the first normal game state can win to the right operating port 63a, the number of prize balls that can be won by winning to the right operating port 63a is "1", and the right operating port It is necessary to wait 600 seconds until the lottery result based on the prize entered into the slot 63a is released. This suppresses the act of aiming the game ball at the right route in the first normal game state to advance the game advantageously.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 30, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process advances to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the second normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the second normal game state setting process is executed in step S1604, and then the present variable display time setting process is ended.

In the setting process for the second normal gaming state, a table corresponding to the current gaming round is selected from among the various variable display time tables for the second normal gaming state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the second normal gaming state, when comparing the jackpot result, special win result, and loss result, the former is likely to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a losing result and no reach display occurs (in the case of a complete loss), the variable display time is configured to become shorter as the number of stored pending information increases. In addition, in the case of a special winning result, the reach display does not occur as in the case of a complete loss, and in this case as well, the variable display time is configured to become shorter as the number of stored pending information increases. ing.

FIG. 31(b2) shows the variable display time when a special win or a complete miss occurs in the first normal game state. For example, when the number of stored hold information is "0", "13 seconds" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is "1", ``8 seconds'' is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is ``2'', ``4 seconds'' is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is ``3'', ``4 seconds'' is set as the variable display time. ” or “4”, “1 sec” is set as the variable display time. In addition, in the second normal game state, the fixed display time of the symbol on the right operating port display section DR and the fixed display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are both unified to be "1 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S1603 in FIG. 30, the process advances to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state corresponds to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, the third normal game state setting process is executed in step S1606, and then the present variable display time setting process is ended.

In the setting process for the third normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from among the various variable display time tables for the third normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the third normal game state, when comparing the jackpot result, special win result, and loss result, the former is likely to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a losing result and no reach display occurs (in the case of a complete loss), the variable display time is configured to become shorter as the number of stored pending information increases. In addition, in the case of a special winning result, the reach display does not occur as in the case of a complete loss, and in this case as well, the variable display time is configured to become shorter as the number of stored pending information increases. ing.

FIG. 31(b3) shows the variable display time when a special win or a complete miss occurs in the third normal game state. For example, when the number of stored hold information is "0" to "2", "4 seconds" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is "3" to "2". 4", "0.5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In addition, in the third normal game state, the fixed display time of the symbol on the right operating opening display section DR and the fixed display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are both unified to be "1 sec".

If a negative determination is made in step S1605 of FIG. 30, that is, if the fourth normal gaming state is compatible with the low probability mode and high frequency support mode, the process advances to step S1607, and the fourth normal gaming state setting process is performed. After execution, this variable display time setting process ends.

In the setting process for the fourth normal game state, a table corresponding to the current game round is selected from among various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. to set the variable display time.

Regarding the variable display time in the fourth normal game state, when comparing the jackpot result, special win result, and loss result, the former is likely to be longer than the latter. In particular, in the case of a losing result and no reach display occurs (in the case of a complete loss), the variable display time is configured to become shorter as the number of stored pending information increases. In addition, in the case of a special winning result, the reach display does not occur as in the case of a complete loss, and in this case as well, the variable display time is configured to become shorter as the number of stored pending information increases. ing.

FIG. 31(b4) shows the variable display time when the game is completely out in the first normal game state. For example, when the number of stored hold information is "0", "13 seconds" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is "1", ``8 seconds'' is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is ``2'', ``4 seconds'' is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is ``3'', ``4 seconds'' is set as the variable display time. ” or “4”, “2.5 sec” is set as the variable display time. In addition, in the second normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the symbol on the right operating port display section DR and the fixed display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 75 are both unified to be "1 sec".

In this embodiment, diversification of games is realized by switching between the first normal game state and the fourth normal game state. In particular, when transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the hurdle is dependent on the number of times the high-frequency support mode is continued (hereinafter referred to as the "time saving number"). There is. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 32, the relationship between the type of jackpot result and the number of time reductions will be explained.

(Number of time savings)
If an 8R normal jackpot result is obtained based on winning into the lower operation opening 62a, the time saving number is "50" regardless of whether the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning. is set. As mentioned above, in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result, although the advantageous ball entry section 314 is temporarily opened, the game ball that has flowed into the upper jackpot opening 311 is not able to enter the advantageous entry mode. The advantageous ball entry section 314 is closed before the ball reaches the ball section 314, and ball entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 is substantially avoided.

If the 6R probability variable jackpot result is A based on the winning in the lower operation opening 62a, the time saving number is "100" regardless of whether the ball enters the advantageous ball entering section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning. times are set. When the 6R probability-variable jackpot result is B, the number of times saved is set to "70" regardless of whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability-variable jackpot result is C, the number of times saved is set to ``50'' regardless of whether or not a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability-variable jackpot result is D, "30" is set as the time saving number, regardless of whether or not a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning. When the 6R probability-variable jackpot result is E, "10" is set as the time saving number, regardless of whether the ball enters the advantageous entry section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to 6R definite variable jackpot results A to 6R definite variable jackpot results E, if the game ball is continuously launched towards the right route, is configured such that the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 in most of the cases, and prevents the transition to the high probability mode from being avoided even if the result is a probability-variable jackpot. .

If the winning result is 16R variable jackpot result A or 16R variable jackpot result B based on the winning into the lower operation opening 62a, regardless of whether the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning, “0” times is set as the number of time saving times. In other words, with these jackpot results, after the special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) ends, there is no transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. Specifically, when a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, the game shifts to a second normal game state compatible with the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, and a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314. If not, the game shifts to a first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

If a 2R normal jackpot result is achieved based on winning into the right operating port 63a, the time saving number is "50" regardless of whether the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning. is set. As mentioned above, in the special game state (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to the 2R normal jackpot result, although the advantageous ball entry section 314 is temporarily opened, the game ball that has flowed into the upper jackpot opening 311 does not receive an advantageous entry. The advantageous ball entry section 314 is closed before the ball reaches the ball section 314, and ball entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 is substantially avoided.

If a 2R probability-variable jackpot result is achieved based on winning into the right operating port 63a, the time-saving number of times is "50" regardless of whether the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning. Set.

If the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result A based on the winning into the right operating port 63a, "100" is set as the time saving number. Ru. When the 6R probability variable jackpot result A occurs and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, the number of time reductions set differs depending on the gaming state at the time when the 6R probability variable jackpot result A occurs. If the 6R probability variable jackpot result A occurs during the first normal gaming state, "1000" times is set as the time saving count, and the 6R probability variable jackpot result A occurs during the second to fourth normal gaming states. In this case, "100" is set as the number of time saving times.

When the 6R probability variable jackpot result B is obtained based on the winning in the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set depending on whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entering section 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result B in the first normal game state, "100" is the number of times saved. If the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result B in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the time saving number is set as " 70" times is set. On the other hand, if the 6R probability variable jackpot result B occurs in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the time saving number, and the second normal game state - If the 6R probability variable jackpot result B occurs in the fourth normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "70" is set as the time saving number.

When a 6R probability-variable jackpot result C is obtained based on the winning in the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set depending on whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entering section 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result C in the first normal game state, "100" times is set as the time saving number. If the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result C in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the time saving number is set as " 50 times is set. On the other hand, if the 6R probability variable jackpot result is C in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the time saving number, and the second normal game state - If the 6R probability variable jackpot result is C in the fourth normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "50" is set as the time saving number.

When a 6R probability-variable jackpot result D is obtained based on the winning in the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set depending on whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entering section 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result D in the first normal game state, "100" times is set as the time saving number. If the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result D in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the time saving number is set as " 30" times is set. On the other hand, if the 6R probability variable jackpot result is D in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the time saving number, and the second normal game state ~In the fourth normal game state, if the 6R probability variable jackpot result is D and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "30" is set as the time saving number.

When a 6R probability-variable jackpot result E is obtained based on the winning to the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set depending on whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entering section 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result E in the first normal game state, "100" times is set as the time saving number. If the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result E in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the time saving number is set as " 10" times is set. On the other hand, if the 6R probability variable jackpot result E occurs in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the time saving number, and the second normal game state ~In the fourth normal game state, if the 6R probability variable jackpot result is E and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "10" is set as the time saving number.

When a 16R probability-variable jackpot result is obtained based on the winning in the right operating port 63a, the number of time reductions is set depending on whether or not the ball enters the advantageous ball entering section 314 and the gaming state at the time of winning. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 16R probability variable jackpot result A in the first normal game state, "100" is the number of times saved. is set and shifts to the high-frequency support mode (shifts to the fourth normal gaming state). If the ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314 despite the 6R probability variable jackpot result A in the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the time saving number is "0". is set and does not shift to the high frequency support mode (transfers to the first normal gaming state). On the other hand, if the 16R probability variable jackpot result is A in the first normal game state and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "1000" times is set as the time saving number of times, and the mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Transition (transition to the second normal gaming state). In the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, if the 16R probability variable jackpot result is A and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, "0" time is set as the time saving number, and the high frequency support mode (transition to the second normal gaming state).

If the 16R probability variable jackpot result B is based on the winning in the right operating port 63a, the time saving number is set to "0" regardless of whether the ball enters the advantageous ball entering section 314 or the gaming state at the time of winning. times are set. Specifically, if a ball does not enter the advantageous ball entry section 314, the transition is made to a first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode, and the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314. If this occurs, the game shifts to a second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode.

Here, in this embodiment, the special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) to which a jackpot result is obtained is the first winning mode and the second winning mode, which have different variable winning devices to be opened and different opening/closing modes. Broadly classified. If the result is a jackpot, the game shifts to a special game state corresponding to the first winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the first winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the "first special game state"), the upper variable prize winning device 64 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (30 seconds in detail) has elapsed or a predetermined number of openings (in detail, The release is repeated with a maximum of multiple rounds, with the occurrence of 9 balls entering the ball as one round. On the other hand, in the case of a special winning result, the game shifts to a special game card corresponding to the second winning mode. In the special game state corresponding to the second winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the second special game state), the lower variable winning device 65 is set as an opening target, and a predetermined opening time (specifically 0.8 sec) has elapsed or a predetermined number of The second special game state ends when any one of (9 in detail) ball entering occurs. In this way, the first special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively high, and the second special game state is set so that the winning frequency is relatively low, and the number of prize balls that can be won is There is a difference.

(Game flow)
Next, the basic flow of the game will be explained with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game.

In the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, a jackpot lottery is executed when a prize is won in the lower operation opening 62a provided in the game area PE (left route). The first normal game state is set so that the player's advantage is lower than the other normal game states.

When various jackpot results are obtained in the first normal gaming state, the game shifts to the first special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode). In the first special game state, the advantageous entry section 314 is opened depending on the type of jackpot result. If a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes a high probability mode. If no ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes a low probability mode.

Specifically, if the current first special game state is triggered by an 8R normal jackpot result or a 2R normal jackpot result, ball entry into the advantageous ball entry section 314 is substantially avoided. Therefore, the gaming state after the first special gaming state ends becomes the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The fourth normal gaming state is maintained until the number of games played in the fourth normal gaming state reaches a specified number (50 times in this embodiment), and when the number of played games reaches the specified number, A transition is made to a first normal gaming state in which the player's advantage is set to be lower than in the fourth normal gaming state. Regarding the fourth normal game state, although an upper limit is set on the number of games, the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the support of the electric accessory 71. Since the ball can be expected to enter the right operating port 63a, which is given preferential treatment so that the distribution of jackpot results is advantageous to the player, the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state are more advantageous than the fourth normal gaming state. This is a chance to transition to a gaming state.

As already explained, when winnings to the right operating port 63a occur, special winning results are obtained in most of the drawings based on these winnings. That is, in the fourth normal game state, a special winning result is obtained in almost all the game rounds, and the game shifts to the second special game state in each game round. When transitioning to the second special game state, the lower variable prize winning device 65 will be opened, but most of the game balls fired to the right route enter the right operating port 63a and leave the game area PE. This means that winnings to the lower variable winning device 65 are suppressed. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 34, the movement of the game ball in the fourth normal game state will be described.

In the fourth normal game state, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is expanded from 0.08 sec to 5.7 sec, thereby increasing the number of winnings to the right operating port 63a. By shortening the variable display time of the through gate display section DS from 0.7 sec to 0.2 sec, the time for which the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the closed state (first interval time) is shortened, and the right-hand operation The number of game balls that pass through the opening 63a is reduced. As a result, most of the game balls fired to the right route enter the right operating port 63a.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(a) → FIG. 34(b) → FIG. 34(c), the shutter 331 of the electric accessory 71 is moved to the closed position based on the game ball passing through the through gate 66. to the open position, and the upstream passage portion 322 is severed. Thereby, the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 will flow into the right operating port 63a. Here, the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 (the above-mentioned first specific area SE1) is set to be slightly longer than the above-mentioned first interval time. When the game balls are fired continuously, most of the game balls flow into the right operating port 63a and are prevented from moving toward the lower variable winning device 65 side.

The number of prize balls paid out by winning into the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out by winning into the right operating ball entry part 63 (right operating opening 63a) is "10". The number of balls is greater than "1". However, as described above, most of the game balls fired to the right route enter the right operating port 63a, and prize balls that enter the lower large winning port 341 are rare. Therefore, in the fourth normal game state, although it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, it is substantially difficult to increase the number of balls held.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route in the fourth normal game state, the firing interval time is "0.6 sec", and the closing time of the electric accessory 71 is approximately " 0.7 sec'', the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is ``5.7 sec'', the time required for a game round is ``2 sec'', and the time required for the second special game state is ``0.8 sec''. For the above reasons, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route in the fourth normal gaming state, winnings that exceed the holding upper limit of the right operating port 63a, that is, over winnings where no holding information is newly acquired. will occur frequently. Even in this case, the prize ball based on the winning into the right operating port 63a is guaranteed, so the speed at which the number of balls in possession decreases is clearly slowed down.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 33, if the current first special game state is triggered by the 6R certain variable jackpot result A to 6R certain variable jackpot result E or the 2R certain variable jackpot result, continue firing the game ball toward the right route. As long as the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314, the ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314. Therefore, in most cases, the gaming state after the first special gaming state ends is the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode.

In the second normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state is maintained until the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches a specified number (10 to 100 in this embodiment). When the number of games played reaches a specified number, a transition is made to a third normal gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state.

During the second normal game state, a game counter is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as information corresponding to the remaining number of games until the specified number is reached. The displayed game counter is displayed as a countdown as the game progresses, and when the specified number is reached and the remaining number becomes "0", a display effect corresponding to the transition to the third normal game state is displayed. will be executed. This clearly indicates the transition to the third normal gaming state.

The second normal game state also corresponds to the high-frequency support mode like the fourth normal game state, and with the support of the electric accessory 71, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. At this time, although the lower variable winning device 65 is opened by winning the right operating port 63a, most of the game balls fired to the right route enter the right operating port 63a and go downstream of the right operating port 63a. Reaching the disposed lower variable winning device 65 is suppressed. For this reason, it is substantially difficult to increase the number of balls held in the second normal game state as well as in the fourth normal game state. In addition, please refer to FIG. 34 regarding the flow of game balls in the second normal game state.

In addition, in the second normal gaming state, when the number of pending information (number of pending) is "3" to "4", the variable display time becomes "1 sec", and the variable display time ( "2.5 sec"). By shortening the variable display time in this way, the second normal game state is differentiated so that the game progress speed is faster than the fourth normal game state.

When the number of games played without a jackpot result reaches a specified number in the second normal game state, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. In this embodiment, unlike the high-frequency support mode, no upper limit on the number of games can be played in the high-probability mode. Therefore, when the predetermined number is reached, a transition is made to the third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

As already explained, when winnings to the right operating port 63a occur, special winning results are obtained in most of the drawings based on these winnings. That is, in the third normal game state, a special winning result is obtained in almost all the game rounds, and the game shifts to the second special game state in each game round. This point is similar to the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state.

However, when shifting to the second special game state, the lower variable prize winning device 65 will be opened, but some of the game balls fired to the right route will pass through the right operating port 63a and go down. The player heads to the side variable winning device 65, and by winning a prize in the lower variable winning device 65, the number of balls in possession will start to increase. The movement of the game ball in the third normal game state will be described below with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 35 and 36.

The third normal game state corresponds to the low-frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric accessory 71 is shortened from "5.7 sec" to "0.08 sec", and the variable display of the through gate display section DS The time is extended from "0.2 sec" to "0.7 sec". That is, the period in which the electric accessory 71 is in the closed state becomes longer, and the period in which it is in the open state becomes shorter. Here, as described above, the sum of the variable display time "0.7 sec" and the fixed display time "0.5 sec" of the picture on the through-gate display section DS is "1.2 sec" when the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state. This is the actual interval time (hereinafter referred to as the second interval time). This second interval time is set to be longer than the time required for the game ball to pass above the shutter 331 (first specific area SE1). For this reason, a part of the game balls fired to the right route will pass through the right operating port 63a and head toward the lower variable winning device 65. In other words, the number of winnings to the right operating port 63a decreases, and the number of game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a increases. As a result, the number of prizes entered into the lower prize winning opening 341 increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35(a)→FIG. 35(b)→FIG. 35(c), the shutter 331 of the electric accessory 71 is moved to the closed position based on the game ball passing through the through gate 66. to the open position, and the upstream passage portion 322 is severed. Thereby, the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 322 will flow into the right operating port 63a. When a prize is won through the right operating port 63a, most of the lottery results become special winning results, and the lower variable prize winning device 65 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 35(d)→FIG. 36(e), when the game ball that passes through the right operating port 63a enters the lower variable winning device 65 side, "10" prize balls will be paid out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning into the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341) is "1". ``There are more than ``individuals''. This results in an increase in the number of balls held.

Here, the time required to pass through the first specific area SE1 is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball "0.6 sec", and the time required for the electric accessory 71 to change from the open state to the closed state to the open state. The interval time is "1.2 sec". The time "0.08 sec" during which the electric accessory 71 is maintained in the open state is longer than the time required for the game ball placed on the shutter 331 to pass through the right operating port 63a. Therefore, when the game balls are continuously fired to the right route, each time the electric accessory 71 is opened, a prize of 1 is generated to the right operating port 63a, and the ball reaches the ball entry unit 70. Approximately half of the game balls will enter the right operating port 63a.

In addition, in the third normal game state, when the number of stored reservation information (number of reservations) is "3" to "4", the fluctuation display time of the picture on the right operating mouth display section DR is 0.5 seconds. Yes, the confirmed display time will be 1 sec, and the ending time at the end of the second special game state will be 0.2 sec. In other words, when the transition to the second special gaming state is continuous, the interval time required for the lower variable prize winning device 65 to change from the accepting state to the non-accepting state to the accepting state is "1.7 sec". The time required for the game ball that has reached the lower variable winning device 65 to pass through the second specific area SE2 is longer than the interval time. Therefore, of the game balls that have passed through the right operating port 63a, most of the game balls that have reached the lower variable winning device 65 will be won into the lower large winning port 341 (FIG. 36(e), 36(f)). Overall, although some thinning may occur, approximately one out of every two game balls that are fired to the right route and reach the ball entering unit 70 enters the right operating port 63a, and approximately one out of every two balls enters the lower large winning port. 341 is realized.

In addition, in the third normal gaming state, although the number of winnings and the winning rate to the right operating port 63a are not as high as the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the number of balls entering the right operating port 63a is constant. The game progresses as the number of pending information (number of pending) related to the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4". However, strictly speaking, in the 2nd normal gaming state and the 4th normal gaming state, the structure was such that winnings occurred frequently by greatly exceeding the upper limit of the number of reservations, whereas in the 3rd normal gaming state, the number of reservations was Winnings that slightly exceed the upper limit only occur. However, in view of the fact that no new reservation information is acquired when winnings exceeding the upper limit occur, the actual change in the number of reservations is not affected as much as the difference in the number of prizes won or the winning rate. In other words, in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the upper limit of the number of reservations is exceeded so that winnings are likely to occur, and compared to the third normal gaming state, winnings for which reservation information is not obtained are more likely to occur. They are increasingly differentiated.

Here, the condition for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is that the upper limit (specified number of times or time saving number of times) set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state is played. However, this upper limit varies depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the second normal gaming state. For example, for the 2R variable jackpot result, the upper limit is set to 50 times, for the 6R variable jackpot result A, the upper limit is set to 100 times, and for the 6R variable jackpot result B, the upper limit is set to 70 times, and for the 6R variable jackpot result B, the upper limit is set to 70 times. For the probability variable jackpot result C, the upper limit is set to ``50'', for the 6R probability variable jackpot result D, the upper limit is set to ``30'', and for the 6R probability variable jackpot result E, the upper limit is set to ``10''. In other words, the probability of transition to the third normal gaming state increases in the following order: 6R certain variable jackpot result A < 6R certain variable jackpot result B < 6R certain variable jackpot result C, 2R certain variable jackpot result < 6R certain variable jackpot result D < 6R certain variable jackpot result E It is configured as follows. In this way, by providing different hurdles for transition to the third normal gaming state, diversification of games is realized.

If a jackpot result is achieved in the third normal gaming state, the game shifts to the first special gaming state. If the current first special gaming state is triggered by 16R guaranteed variable jackpot result A or 16R probable variable jackpot result B, after the first special gaming state ends, the game immediately returns to the third normal gaming state and holds This is an opportunity to increase the number of balls. On the other hand, if the current third normal gaming state is triggered by a 2R guaranteed variable jackpot result or any of the 6R probable variable jackpot results A to 6R probable variable jackpot results E, after the first special gaming state ends, The game will move to the second normal gaming state, and the game will be played with the aim of moving to the third normal gaming state again.

In this embodiment, although there is still a chance to return to the third normal gaming state in any of the normal gaming states, the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, if When returning to the third normal gaming state is taken into consideration, a difference is provided so that returning to the second normal gaming state is easier than the fourth normal gaming state.

As described in detail above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to generate two states in which the number of balls in possession increases in different ways, and the combination of these two ways of increasing the number of balls is advantageous to the player. This prevents the game progress from becoming monotonous in the game state. Here, with reference to FIG. 37, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the flow of the game and the relationship between the balls held in the pachinko machine 10.

When the game ball is fired to the left route in the first normal game state, the number of balls held decreases as the game progresses. In this situation where investments continue, if a jackpot result is achieved and the state is shifted to the first special game state, the number of balls in possession increases significantly due to frequent wins in the upper variable prize winning device 64. Specifically, the first special game state is configured such that substantially nine balls can land during a round game. Since 14 game balls are paid out for each winning ball, 126 game balls can be obtained in one round. Since this round game is repeated multiple times after an interval of 2 seconds, there is a chance to acquire a large amount of game balls at once.

In the first round in the first special game state, the advantageous entry section 314 is opened. If a ball enters the advantageous ball entry section 314 in this round, a transition is made to a second normal game state after the first special game state ends. In the second normal game state, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 becomes the high-frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls fired to the right route will land in the right operating port 63a, but the number of prize balls paid out by hitting the right operating port 63a is one. Considering that some of the game balls fired to the right route are ejected from the game area PE without entering any of the ball entry areas corresponding to prize balls, even in the second normal game state, the ball held will gradually decrease. However, since the prize ball can be won by hitting the right operating port 63a, the speed at which the number of balls in possession decreases is slower than in the first normal game state.

As already explained, if the number of games played without a jackpot result reaches the upper limit after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the transition to the third normal gaming state occurs. In the third normal game state, although the high probability mode is maintained, the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode, and the number of game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a increases. Then, most of the game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a will be won into the lower prize winning port 341. As for the game balls that have arrived at the ball entry unit 70 as described above, approximately half of them head toward the lower variable winning device 65, and each time the second special game state is entered and the lower variable winning device 65 enters the accepting state. Approximately 1 prize will be won in each. Since the number of prize balls paid out by winning in the lower variable winning device 65 is 10, the number of balls in hand increases by 10 each time the player shifts to the second special game state. In other words, the number of balls held increases by approximately 10 each time the game is played. Considering these circumstances, when transitioning to the third normal gaming state, it is likely that a special winning result will occur and the transition to the third special gaming state will be repeated until the next jackpot result occurs. This is an opportunity to greatly increase the number of balls.

(Save time)
As described in detail above, when the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode is transferred to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, the ball passes through the right-side operation entry portion 63. The number of game balls to be played increases, these game balls enter the lower variable winning device 65, and many prize balls are paid out. As a result, the number of balls held by the player starts to increase. The third normal gaming state continues until a jackpot result (normal jackpot result or variable probability jackpot result) is reached during the third normal gaming state.

A special winning result is repeatedly obtained until the third normal game state ends after the jackpot result is obtained, and the transition to the second special gaming state each time provides a chance to greatly increase the number of balls held. For this reason, it is assumed that in the third normal gaming state, attention to the game will be even higher and the player's desire to play will increase, compared to the second normal gaming state where no substantial increase in the number of balls held is expected. The present embodiment is characterized in that by changing the rhythm of game progress in accordance with changes in the gaming state, the player's sense of excitement is further enhanced as the advantage increases. It is one of the Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 31 again, a supplementary explanation will be given of the configuration related to the rhythm change of game progress. As already explained, FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and fixed display time set in a game round corresponding to a winning result (more specifically, a complete winning result without reach display) or a special winning result.

The variable display time of the symbols on the lower operating port display section DL provided in the main display unit 81 is the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state (Fig. 31 (a2), (a3) )reference). On the other hand, a difference is provided so that the variable display time of the symbols on the right operating opening display section DR is shorter in the third normal gaming state than in the second normal gaming state.

Specifically, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, most of the lottery results based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a are special winning results or missing results. As shown in FIG. 31(b2), in the second normal game state, when the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a is "0", the variable display time corresponding to the special winning result or the missing result becomes "13 seconds", When the pending number is "1", the variable display time corresponding to a special winning result or a losing result is "8 seconds", and when the pending number is "2", the variable display time corresponding to a special winning result or a missing result. is "4 sec", and when the number of reservations is "3" to "4", the variable display time corresponding to the special winning result or losing result is "1 sec". On the other hand, in the third normal game state, as shown in FIG. 31(b3), when the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a is "0" to "2", the result is a special winning result or a missing result. The corresponding variable display time will be "4 sec", and when the number of reservations is "3" to "4", the variable display time corresponding to the special winning result or losing result will be "0.5 sec".

As described above, in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the game ball fired to the right route enters the right operating port 63a and is prevented from entering the lower operating port 62a. Then, under the situation where game balls are continuously fired to the right route, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a is near the upper limit (from "3" to "3") in both the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. Incoming balls constantly occur as the number of pitches fluctuates ("4"). Therefore, when the game ball is continuously fired to the right route, the variable display time in most game times (game machine related to the right operating port 63a) is "1 sec" in the second normal game state. In the third normal game state, the variable display time in most game times (game times related to the right operating port 63a) is "0.5 sec".

Here, with reference to FIG. 38, the flow of the game in each game state will be explained. FIG. 38(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the second normal game state compatible with high probability mode and high frequency support mode, and FIG. 38(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the second normal game state compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the state. In addition, in FIG. 38(a), as the game progresses, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4", and a special winning result is obtained in each game round related to the right operating port 63a. A case where the second normal game state and the second special game state are looped is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 38(b), as the game progresses, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a changes from "3" to "4", and a special winning result is obtained in each game round related to the right operating port 63a. A case where the third normal game state and the second special game state are looped is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the second normal game state, after the variable display (1 sec) of the right operating port display section DR is executed, the final display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result (1 sec) is executed. At the timing when the game ends (completes), the game shifts to the second special game state. As a result, the lower variable winning device 65 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Although the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state for 0.8 seconds, most of the game balls flowing down the right route flow into the right operating port 63a and flow into the lower variable winning device 65. winning is substantially avoided. At the timing when the lower variable winning device 65 returns to the closed state and the ending time (0.2 sec) of the second special game state has elapsed, the variable display of the right operating opening display section DR starts again. From then on, the game progresses as the above-described series of steps are repeated until the number of time savings is exhausted or a jackpot result is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the third normal game state, after the variable display (0.5 sec) of the right operating port display section DR is executed, the final display of the symbol corresponding to the lottery result (1 sec) ) is finished (completed), the second special game state is entered, and the lower variable winning device 65 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Then, as in the case of passing through the second normal game state, the lower variable prize winning device 65 is maintained in the open state for "0.8 seconds". Regarding the game balls flowing down the right route, most of them flow into the right operating port 63a, but some of them pass through the right operating ball entry portion 63 and head toward the lower variable winning device 65. Each time those game balls enter the lower variable prize winning device 65, many prize balls are paid out. At the timing when the lower variable winning device 65 returns to the closed state and the ending time (0.2 sec) has elapsed, the variable display on the right operating opening display section DR starts again, and from then on, it becomes the jackpot result and the first The game progresses as the above-described series of steps are repeated until the game enters the special game state.

In the third normal game state, after the display of symbols starts to change on the display section DR for the right operating port, the symbol changes again on the display section DR for the right operating port via the final display → the second special gaming state. The interval time (2.5 seconds) until the display starts is from the start of variable display of symbols on the right operating port display section DR in the second normal game state to the final display → second special game state. It is shorter than the interval time (3 sec) until the variable display of the picture on the right operating port display section DR starts again after . That is, in the third normal game state, the speed of progress of the game increases slightly compared to the second normal game state.

Since a ball enters the lower variable winning device 65 in the third normal game state, attention to the second special game state increases. Therefore, the second special game state is more conspicuous than the second normal game state in which the ball entering the lower variable winning device 65 is substantially avoided. When switching back and forth between the normal game state and the second special game state, the second special game state stands out and is likely to give the player the impression that the game progress is slow. There is a concern that this will hinder the player's sense of excitement. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, by increasing the speed of game progress in the third normal gaming state compared to the second normal gaming state, it is possible to make it difficult to give such an impression. By shifting to the normal gaming state, the effect of increasing the player's sense of elation can be suitably exerted.

Further, when the lower variable winning device 65 is continuously switched to the open state in the third normal gaming state, the interval time (1.7 sec) during which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the closed state is the second When the lower variable winning device 65 is continuously switched to the open state in the normal gaming state, the interval time (2.2 sec) in which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the closed state is shorter, and the lower variable winning device 65 is The possibility that the game balls that have reached the winning device 65 will pass through the lower variable winning device 65 is reduced. In this way, by shortening the interval time for waiting for the release, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the game is accelerating while suppressing a drastic change in time.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 attached to the right operating ball entrance part 63 can be switched between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, so that the right operating port This makes it possible to create a difference in the frequency of balls entering 63a. Taking these circumstances into consideration, it may be preferable to configure the variable display time to be shorter in the high-frequency support mode in which balls are entered frequently, in order to realize smooth game progress. However, as mentioned above, when comparing the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, it is true that the high-frequency support mode is preferential in terms of being able to obtain more prize balls based on balls entering the right operating port 63a. However, regarding the number of pending information acquired based on ball entry, a storage limit is set for the pending information, and the storage limit is always exceeded for both the first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. There is no difference in that such incoming balls occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned speed of game progress is realized by intentionally shortening the variable display time in the third normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

The third normal gaming state is differentiated from the second normal gaming state in that the number of balls held by the player can be expected to increase by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state. In the third normal game state, the third normal game state/second special game state loops in a rhythmic manner, making it possible to emphasize the lightness of the game. Here, in this embodiment, the game round related to the lower operation port 62a and the game time related to the right operation port 63a are configured to be able to proceed at the same time (play in parallel), and as shown in FIG. As shown, there is no special winning result in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a. In other words, if the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is executed even though the third normal gaming state has been entered, the lightness of the third normal gaming state described above may not be properly conveyed to the player, or it may be wasted. As the game progresses, it may give the impression that the player has lost money. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, an outline of the device will be explained with reference to FIG. 39.

As already explained, during the first special game state, neither the game round related to the lower operating port 62a nor the game round related to the right operating port 63a progresses. For this reason, if the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a results in a guaranteed variable jackpot during the first normal gaming state and the transition to the second normal gaming state occurs, the lower operating port 62a acquired during the first normal gaming state There is a possibility that the pending information related to this will be carried over to the second normal gaming state.

In the second normal game state, the number of time saving times is basically set to be between "10 times" and "100 times". Each time saving number is subtracted by executing the game time related to the lower operation port 62a or the game time related to the right operation port 63a, and the second normal game state continues until the time reduction number becomes "0 times". In this case, the first special gaming state is directly transferred to the third normal gaming state without passing through the first special gaming state. In this embodiment, the number of time reductions set in the second normal game state is set in the third normal game even if the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a remains when the second normal game state is entered. It is stipulated that all of the pending information can be digested before the transition to the state (during the second normal game state). In this way, by avoiding carryover of the pending information to the third normal gaming state, the game will proceed based on the pending information related to the right operating port 63a after transition to the third normal gaming state. . Hereinafter, a supplementary explanation will be given of a specific configuration for realizing such a function with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40 illustrates a case where the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a is "0" at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, and FIG. A case is illustrated in which the number of reservations has reached the upper limit ("4").

As shown in FIG. 40, if the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 62a has reached the storage upper limit ("4") at the timing of transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second normal gaming state, 2 In the normal gaming state, the number of gaming times related to the lower operating port 62a will be executed as many times as the memory upper limit (four times). In the second normal gaming state, regardless of the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 62a, the variable display time of the symbol on the lower operating port display section DL is "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec". ing. Therefore, the time required to execute the above upper limit number of games is (variable display time: 0.5 sec + confirmed display time: 0.5 sec) x storage upper limit: 4 = 4 sec.

With the transition to the first special gaming state, the route advantageous to the player changes from the left route to the right route, so by firing the game ball to the right route, reservation information related to the right operating port 63a is automatically acquired. It will be done. However, during the first special game state, the upper variable prize winning device 64 disposed upstream of the right operation opening 63a is switched to the open state, and the flow of game balls toward the right operation ball entry section 63 is obstructed. Therefore, even during the first special game state, although the right operating ball entry section 63 switches to the open state, most game balls do not reach the right operating ball entry section 63 and enter the right operating opening 63a. is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, when the first special game state ends and the transition is made to the second normal game state, a ball enters the right operating port 63a, and accordingly, a picture is displayed on the right operating port display section DR. The fluctuation display of has started. At this transition timing, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a is "0", so the variable display time on the right operating port display section DR is "13 seconds". Although most of the game rounds related to the right operating port 63a result in special winning results, there is a grace period of at least 13 seconds before the confirmation display corresponding to the special winning result is executed at the right operating port 63a. . This time is longer than the time required to digest all the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a described above. Therefore, all pending information related to the lower operating port 62a is digested until the variable display of the symbol on the right operating port display section DR ends, that is, before the time saving number expires which triggers the transition to the third normal gaming state. The Rukoto. The minimum number of time saving times to be set is greater than the upper limit number (specifically, the upper limit number + 1) of the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a. Therefore, the game does not shift to the third normal game state while the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a remains.

Here, as mentioned above, most of the game balls fired to the right route during the first special game state enter the upper variable winning device 64, but some of the game balls enter the upper variable winning device 64. 64 and enters the right operating port 63a. Most of the first special gaming states that are passed through when transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state result in a jackpot result with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, a 6R probability variable jackpot result), and the ball enters the right operating ball entry section 63. Although the number of flowing game balls has been suppressed, it cannot be denied that the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a may reach the storage upper limit during the first special game state due to accidental deviation or the like. In the right operating port display section DR, it is set such that the larger the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a, the shorter the pattern fluctuation display time. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, when the number of reservations is "4", the variable display time is shortened to "1 sec". Therefore, unlike the example shown in FIG. 40, it is impossible to digest all the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a in one game round related to the right operating port 63a. However, even in such a case, all the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a is digested before shifting to the third normal gaming state. The basis thereof will be explained below with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 62a has reached the storage upper limit ("4") at the timing of transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second normal gaming state. In this case, after the transition to the second normal game state, the number of games related to the lower operating port 62a will be executed for the maximum number of times (four times). In the second normal gaming state, regardless of the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 62a, the variable display time of the symbol on the lower operating port display section DL is "0.5 sec" and the fixed display time is "0.5 sec". ing. Therefore, the time required to execute the above upper limit number of games is (variable display time: 0.5 sec + confirmed display time 0.5 sec) x storage upper limit: 4 = 4 sec.

If the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a has reached the upper limit (“4”) at the timing of transition to the second normal gaming state, the display for the right operating port is displayed at the timing of shifting to the second normal gaming state. The variable display of the picture in section DR is started. The variable display time set in this variable display is "1 sec". Since this pending information corresponds to the special winning result, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the fluctuation display time (1 sec) and fixed display time (1 sec) of the symbol on the right operating port display section DR have elapsed. At this timing, the game will move to the second special gaming state. In other words, the number of pending information related to the lower operating port 62a that is consumed before moving to the second special gaming state is two, and even after the second special gaming state ends, there are two pending information related to the lower operating port 62a. It will remain.

The time required for the second special game state is "1 sec" which is the sum of the time during which the lower variable winning device 65 is maintained in the open state (0.8 sec) and the ending time (0.2 sec). However, during this time, neither the game round related to the lower operating port 62a nor the game round related to the right operating port 63a will proceed, and at the timing when the second special gaming state ends and returns to the second normal gaming state. Thus, the game round related to the lower operating port 62a and the game round related to the right operating port 63a are started at the same time.

Here, even during the second special game state, the main entry destination of the game ball fired to the right route is the right operating port 63a. Therefore, if the game ball continues to be launched toward the right route, the ball will enter the right operating port 63a during the second special game state, and the number of pending balls related to the right operating port 63a will increase. There is a possibility that the memory limit will be reached again. In the example shown in FIG. 41, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a has reached the storage upper limit during the second special gaming state, and after returning to the second normal gaming state, the number of reservations related to the right operating port 63a is executed on the right operating port display section DR. The variable display time of the picture will be "1 sec".

In the game round related to the lower operating port 62a, the variable display time is set to be "0.5 sec" regardless of the remaining number of reservations. Therefore, the third and fourth game rounds related to the lower operating port 62a end during the second gaming session related to the right operating port 63a. In other words, even if the game times related to the right operating port 63a are completed in the shortest time, all the gaming times related to the lower operating port 62a are completed while the game times related to the right operating port 63a are executed twice. It will be digested. The sum (6 times) of the game times related to the lower operating port 62a (4 times) and the game times related to the right operating port 63a (2 times) is the minimum value of the time saving number set in the second normal gaming state. (10 times), all of the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a will be cleared before the number of time reductions is used as a trigger for transitioning to the third normal gaming state.

In other words, in this embodiment, as long as the game ball is fired to the right route during the second normal gaming state, all the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a is cleared by the time the transition to the third normal gaming state occurs. At least in the third normal game state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game using only the game times related to the right operating port 63a.

In addition, in realizing such a function, it is also possible to set the minimum value of the number of time saving times to 6 times instead of 10 times.

As detailed above, although the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is configured to go through the first special gaming state, the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state Since it is configured to shift directly, when the speed of progress of the game is accelerated when moving from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the difference can be highlighted. With such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without making the difference in the display time of symbol fluctuation between the second normal game state and the third normal game state excessively large. Therefore, with the configuration that changes the speed of progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the variable display time of the symbols from becoming extremely short, and to ensure the opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the symbols.

If the right-side operation ball entry portion 63 is configured to be openable and closable, the frequency of entry of game balls can be increased depending on the situation. By combining such a configuration with a configuration in which the fluctuating display time of the symbols on the operating port display section becomes shorter as the number of stored hold information increases, it becomes possible to suitably increase the speed of progress of the game. Here, the variable display time when the number of stored pending information has reached the storage upper limit is subject to period reduction due to the transition from the second normal gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player. With this configuration, the speed of progress of the game can be increased in a situation where balls entering the right-side operation ball entry section 63 occur frequently. Therefore, the effect of increasing the progress speed of the game with the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state can be suitably exhibited.

In the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, the fixed display time of the symbol on the display section DR for the right operating port is the same, and the variable display time of the symbol is longer or shorter before and after switching the gaming state with respect to the fixed display time. If the configuration is such that a player who pays attention to the symbols can compare the lengths of the variable display times based on the same standard (common fixed display time). Thereby, it is possible to clearly convey to the player that the progress speed of the game is increasing.

It should be noted that by shortening the display time of changing symbols for the right operating port 63a, which is the main ball entry destination in the third normal game state, the effect of shortening the time can be suitably exhibited. For the lower operation opening 62a, which is not the main ball entry destination, by making the variable display time of the symbol the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the speed of progress of the game is changed, making it more exhilarating. It is possible to prevent the improvement of the image from becoming a factor that makes the pattern display control process excessively complicated.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, an increase in the number of balls held can be expected by repeating the transition from the third normal gaming state to the second special gaming state. Here, the pace of transition to the second special game state depends on the speed at which the game is completed. As mentioned above, in the third normal game state, by increasing the digestion speed from the second normal game state, the speed at which the number of balls in possession increases can be changed (fastened) without making the various structures provided in the play area, etc. excessively complicated. ) can be made.

Further, if the transition to the second special game state occurs frequently in the third normal game state, the game progress may be delayed by securing the execution time of the second special game state. This may become a factor that prevents the speed of the game from increasing in the 3 normal game state. Therefore, by configuring a structure in which the symbol fluctuation display time is shortened in the case of a special winning result in the second normal gaming state, even if the transition to the second special gaming state is repeated, the game can be continued. It is possible to increase the progress speed and improve the exhilaration of the game.

When a variable jackpot result occurs in the first normal gaming state and the transition to the second normal gaming state occurs, the number of time-saving games (corresponding to the "standard number of times") is set as the number of gaming times that can be executed in the second normal gaming state. Set. Then, when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the set time saving number, the game shifts to the third normal gaming state. Here, the number of time reductions is defined so that all the special information related to the first ball entry section can be digested during the second normal game state. Therefore, if the second normal gaming state changes to the third normal gaming state without a jackpot result, all the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a will be consumed during the second normal gaming state. , carryover to the third normal game state is avoided. That is, in the third normal game state, the game round will proceed based on the hold information related to the right operating port 63a. In this way, by suppressing the intervention of the game times related to the lower operation port 62a, it becomes possible to progress the game in the third normal game state in a rhythmic manner. In particular, in a configuration where the lottery based on the right operating port 63a is given preferential treatment than the lottery based on the lower operating port 62a, the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a should be digested before shifting to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's advantage in the third normal gaming state from decreasing.

(Enrollment validity period)
Regarding the right operating ball entry portion 63 shown in this embodiment, the entrance portion (right operating opening 63a) is enlarged in order to increase the frequency of entry of game balls. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, the width of the right operating port 63a is set to be twice the diameter of the gaming ball so that a plurality of game balls can pass through the right operating port 63a at the same time. It is also shaped to become larger. The game balls that enter the right operating port 63a are guided to a recovery path provided behind the game board 60 through a single ball entry path that is narrowed so that multiple game balls cannot pass through at the same time. . The above-mentioned detection sensor 391d is disposed in the middle of this ball entry path as ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the right operating port 63a. That is, all the game balls that enter the right operating port 63a pass through the detection sensor 391d (specifically, the detection area DE) and head toward the collection path.

Here, when the right operating port 63a is enlarged to expand the receiving range of game balls in the right operating port 63a, due to the above-mentioned passage structure etc., the gaming balls flowing into the right operating port 63a will be detected in the detection area. A certain amount of time lag occurs before passing through DE. In consideration of such a time lag, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d is determined by the main controller 162 according to the time required for the game ball flowing into the right operating port 63a to reach the detection area DE. The time allowed for reading (accepting) information from is extended (see Figure 27). In other words, even after the right operating ball entry section 63 switches to the closed state, detection of game balls remains valid until the above-mentioned required time has elapsed, and game balls that entered the ball just before switching to the closed state are included in the detection target. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the fact that the player cannot receive a bonus even though the ball enters the right operating port 63a from becoming a factor that reduces the player's desire to play.

In addition, arranging the detection sensor 391d away from the right operating port 63a is not only preferable in order to prevent more than one game ball from passing through the detection area DE at a time in order to ensure detection accuracy, but also to prevent unauthorized equipment from passing through the detection area DE. This is also preferable in terms of suppressing unauthorized access to the detection sensor 391d using, for example, the detection sensor 391d.

In this embodiment, by using the effective time of the detection sensor 391d for the right operating port 63a to display a variable pattern and a fixed display on the through gate display section DS, the right operating ball entry section 63 is One of the features is that the interval time during which the closed state is maintained is suppressed from increasing. The relationship between the valid time and the pattern display on the through gate display section DS will be described below with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43(a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game in the low-frequency support mode, and FIG. 43(b) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the gaming machine in the high-frequency support mode.

In the low-frequency support mode, the time during which the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 is maintained in the open state is "0.08 sec." This opening time is sufficient for the game ball located on the shutter 331 placed in the closed position to pass through the right operating port 63a when it falls under its own weight as the shutter 331 is displaced to the open position. It is set as follows. The detection sensor 391d is activated at the timing when the right-side operation ball entry section 63 switches to the open state, and remains activated for "0.7 seconds" even after the right-side operation ball entry section 63 switches to the closed state. will be maintained.

Here, in the through-gate display section DS, while the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is in the open state, even if the electric role hold is stored, the changing display of the symbol is not executed. At the timing when the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 is switched to the closed state, the variable display of the picture is started. In other words, the configuration is such that the variable display of the pattern is started under the condition where the detection sensor 391d is enabled.

During the low-frequency support mode, the variable display time of the picture on the through-gate display section DS is "0.7 sec", so the final display will start at the timing when the above-mentioned valid time has elapsed.

The final display time of the picture on the through-gate display section DS is "0.5 sec". In the example of FIG. 43(a), a case is illustrated in which a support lottery is won, and the right operating ball entry portion 63 switches from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the confirmed display time has elapsed. In this way, when the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is repeatedly switched to the open state, the interval time during which it is maintained in the closed state is the fluctuating display time of the picture on the through-gate display section DS (the effective time of the detection sensor 391d). (1.2 seconds) is the sum (1.2 seconds) of the overtime (0.7 seconds) and the final display time (0.5 seconds) of the picture on the through-gate display section DS. As described above, the time required for the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 to pass through the first specific area SE1 (1 sec) is shorter than the above-mentioned interval time. In other words, during the low-frequency support mode, some of the game balls that have reached the right-side operation ball entry section 63 pass through the right-side operation ball entry section 63 and head toward the lower variable prize winning device 65.

In this way, by configuring the through gate display section DS to display the fluctuations in advance during the effective time of the detection sensor 391d, it is possible to ensure that the ball enters the right-side operating ball entry section 63 to a certain extent, while at the same time It has the technical significance of encouraging the game ball to enter the lower variable winning device 65 side.

On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, the time during which the right operating ball entry portion 63 is maintained in the open state is longer than in the low-frequency support mode, and is expanded to "5.7 seconds". The detection sensor 391d is activated at the timing when the right-side operation ball entry section 63 switches to the open state, and remains activated for "0.7 seconds" even after the right-side operation ball entry section 63 switches to the closed state. will be maintained. This time is the same as in low frequency support mode.

Here, in the through-gate display section DS, as in the low-frequency support mode, while the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is in the open state, even if electric service reservation is stored. The fluctuating display of the picture is not executed, and the fluctuating display of the picture is started at the timing when the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is switched to the closed state. In other words, the variable display of the picture is started under the condition that the detection sensor 391d is enabled.

During the high-frequency support mode, the time for displaying fluctuations in the pattern on the through-gate display section DS is shortened to "0.2 sec". The fixed display time of the pattern on the through gate display section DS is "0.5 sec", and the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (0.7 sec) is the above-mentioned overage of the effective time (0.7 sec). will be the same length. In the example of FIG. 43(b), a case is illustrated in which a support lottery is won, and the right operating ball entry portion 63 switches from the closed state to the open state at the timing when the confirmed display time has elapsed. In this way, when the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 is repeatedly switched to the open state, the interval time during which it is maintained in the closed state is the time period for displaying the fluctuation of the picture on the through-gate display section DS and the through-gate display section DS. Since this exceeds the sum (0.7 sec) of the fixed display time of the picture in (0.7 sec), that is, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d, the state in which the detection sensor 391d is substantially enabled continues.

As described above, the time required for the game ball rolling on the shutter 331 to pass through the first specific area SE1 (1 sec) is longer than the above-mentioned interval time. In other words, during the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls that reach the right-side operation ball entry section 63 enter the right-side operation ball entry section 63 and are suppressed from heading toward the lower variable winning device 65. There is.

The second normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is configured so that almost no ball enters the lower variable winning device 65 in order to differentiate it from the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. There is. By avoiding balls entering the lower variable winning device 65 in this way, an increase in the number of balls held in the second normal game state is suppressed. In the present embodiment, by using the effective time of the detection sensor 391d to display variations and final displays of the picture on the through-gate display section DS, it is possible to quickly detect a right-side ball entering the ball at the timing when the effective time has elapsed. The structure is such that the portion 63 is switched to an open state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the interval time during which the right-side operation ball entering portion 63 is maintained in the closed state to be shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the first specific area SE1.

As shown in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the right operating ball entry portion 63 is frequently switched to the open state in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the effective time of the detection sensor 391d is utilized. By performing variable display or fixed display of the symbols on the through gate display section DS, it is possible to contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

When the right-side actuated ball entry section 63 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the state in which ball entry is valid is maintained for a predetermined period of time even after switching to the closed state. Thereby, for example, a game ball that flows into the right operating port 63a at the same time as switching to the closed state can also be given a benefit. This is preferable in order to avoid becoming a factor that reduces the player's desire to play, such as not being able to obtain the benefits that should originally be obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, if the electric service hold is stored before the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 switches to the closed state, the through gate display is displayed without waiting for the valid time to elapse. The changing display of the symbols in the section DS is started. In this way, if the variable display of the symbol is started during the valid time and the valid time and the variable display time overlap at least in part, the right operating ball entry portion 63 can be changed from the open state to the closed state to the open state. When the game is quickly progressed by switching to , it is possible to suppress the picture fluctuation display time and fixed display time from becoming extremely short. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

In addition, by setting the above-mentioned effective time based on the time required for the game ball to move from the right operating port 63a to the detection area DE, it is possible to prevent the effective time from becoming excessively long in order to secure the interests of the players. It can be suppressed. This is a preferable configuration in order to protect the interests of the players and also to suppress fraudulent activities related to the right-side actuated ball entry section 63.

In the configuration in which the power reserve is acquired based on the passing of the game ball through the through gate 66, the power reserve is not necessarily acquired and stored before the right-side operating ball entry section 63 switches from the open state to the closed state. This is not limited to the case, and there may also be cases where the power reserve is acquired and then stored after switching to the closed state. Therefore, if a new power hold is acquired during the valid time after the right-side activation ball entry part 63 is switched to the closed state, the changing display of the picture on the through gate display part DS during the valid time. By adopting a configuration in which the display starts, it is possible to contribute to smoother game progress compared to, for example, a configuration in which the variable display of symbols is started after the expiration of the valid time.

In this embodiment, information indicating the third normal gaming state to which the game progresses without a jackpot result in the second normal gaming state and the remaining games until shifting to the third normal gaming state are provided. Information such as the number of times is displayed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a). Hereinafter, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 44, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration related to the display of the various information mentioned above.

(Notification/performance control device 143 and display control device 710)
An MPU 602 is mounted on the notification/performance control board 651 of the notification/performance control device 143. The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 602, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 603. It has a built-in RAM 604 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 603 and RAM 604 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 602, and each may be integrated into individual chips.

The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 602, and receives game time control commands (game time control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. . It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, as well as open/close execution mode commands (open/close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already described, the output side of the MPU 602 is connected to the lamp sections 26 to 28 provided on the front door frame 14, the speaker section 29, and the display control device 710. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/effect control device 143 are transmitted to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information format as is.

The display control device 710 includes a display control board 711 on which an MPU 712, which is an element in which a program ROM 713 and a work RAM 714 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 715, a character ROM 716, and a video RAM 717 are mounted. It is equipped with Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 713 and work RAM 714 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 712, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/effect control device 143, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 715 (specifically (generation of internal commands for the VDP 715). More specifically, the MPU 712 executes a process for specifying a variable display pattern for each game round on the symbol display device 75 based on a command sent from the notification/performance control device 143, and also executes a process related to a pending notice, which will be described later. is executed, and drawing processing for the VDP 715 is executed in accordance with the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

The program ROM 713 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 712, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 714 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 712 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 714.

The VDP 715 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP 715 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its substance is what could be called a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 715 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 712, the video RAM 717, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 717 from the character ROM 716 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

The character ROM 716 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75. This character ROM 716 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

Note that it is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 716 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 716. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 713 is stored in the character ROM 716.

The video RAM 717 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 717, the display contents of the symbol display device 75 are changed.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47, a supplementary explanation will be given of the configuration related to the variable display of symbols and the contents of the variable display. FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing an overview of the display in the first normal game state, and FIG. 47(a) is a second normal game state FIG. 47(b) is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the display in the fourth normal gaming state, and FIG. 47(b) is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the display in the third normal gaming state. In addition, in FIG. 46 and the like, for convenience of explanation, the variable display area of the symbol is divided and displayed using two-dot chain lines (imaginary lines).

The character ROM 716 of the display control device 710 stores data of nine types of main symbols representing numbers “1” to “9” and decorations such as characters imitating the numbers “1” to “9” and fish etc. Nine types of sub-symbol data (see FIGS. 45(a) to (i)) are stored in advance.

The variable display area provided on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is roughly divided into a first variable display area ME1, a second variable display area ME2, and a third variable display area ME3. The first variable display area ME1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen 75a, the second variable display area ME2 is arranged at the upper right of the display screen 75a, and the third variable display area ME3 is arranged at the center of the display screen 75a, and the variable display areas overlap each other. has been avoided.

Three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the first variable display area ME1. Each symbol row is formed by arranging the main symbols in a predetermined order, and the symbols in each symbol row are periodically displayed in a manner that scrolls in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom). The first variable display area ME1 is linked to the pattern display on the lower operating port display section DL of the main display section D, and corresponds to the timing when the variable display of the pattern starts on the lower operating port display section DL. The structure is such that the variable display of the symbols is started, and the variable display of the symbols is ended (the fixed display is started) at the timing when the variable display of the symbols is finished (the timing when the fixed display is started). Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result related to the lower operating port 62a is stopped and displayed, thereby informing the player of the game result (see FIG. 46). In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot result, the combination of main symbols with the same number is stopped and displayed, and in the case of a miss result or a special win result, at least one number among the three symbol rows is displayed. Combinations of main symbols that are different from numbers in other symbol rows are stopped and displayed.

Three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the second variable display area ME2. Each symbol row is formed by arranging the main symbols in a predetermined order, and the symbols in each symbol row are periodically displayed in a manner that scrolls in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom). The second variable display area ME2 is linked to the pattern display in the right operating port display section DR of the main display section D, and is synchronized with the timing when the variable display of the pattern starts on the right operating port display section DR. The structure is such that the variable display of the symbols is started, and the variable display of the symbols is ended (the fixed display is started) at the timing when the variable display of the symbols is finished (the timing when the fixed display is started). Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a is stopped and displayed, thereby informing the player of the game result (see FIG. 47). In this embodiment, for example, in the case of a jackpot result, a combination of main symbols with the same number is stopped and displayed, and in the case of a miss result or a special win result, at least one number among the three symbol rows is displayed. The combination of main symbols whose numbers differ from those of other symbol rows will be stopped and displayed.

Three symbol rows on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the third variable display area ME3. Each symbol row is made up of sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order, and the symbols in each symbol row are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction (specifically, from top to bottom) and are variably displayed. Regarding the third variable display area ME3, the pattern display in the lower operating port display part DL and the right operating port display part DR of the main display part D (the pattern display in the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2) ), and the fluctuating display of the symbol starts at the timing when the fluctuating display of the symbol starts on the display section DL for the lower operating port or the display section DR for the right operating port, and the variable display of the symbol ends. The structure is such that the variable display of symbols ends (the fixed display starts) at the timing (the timing at which the fixed display starts). Then, the combination of sub-symbols with the same number corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state, thereby informing the player of the game result (see FIGS. 46 and 47(a)). In this embodiment, with some exceptions to be described later, in the case of a jackpot result, a combination of sub-symbols with the same number will be stopped, and in the case of a miss result or a special win result, three sub-symbol combinations will be displayed. A combination of main symbols in which at least one number among the symbol rows is different from the numbers in other symbol rows is stopped and displayed.

The main symbols displayed in the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2 are simpler than the sub-symbols displayed in the third variable display area ME3. Therefore, even if the size of the pattern is made small, it is easy to ensure discernment. Based on such circumstances, the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2 are smaller than the third variable display area ME3.

Regarding the variable display areas ME1 to ME3, display/non-display of symbols is switched depending on the gaming state. Here, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, the relationship between the gaming state and the variable display area where symbols are displayed will be explained. FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the display/non-display of symbols in each variable display area, with symbols displayed as "〇" and symbols not displayed as "x". There is.

As already explained, in the first normal game state, a difference is provided so that it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball to the left route than to the right route. Therefore, if you try to advance the game even a little, it is assumed that the main destination of the game ball will be the left route. The game ball launched to the left route enters the former of the lower operating port 62a and the right operating port 63a, and the ball entering the latter is avoided. Therefore, in the first normal game state, the game progresses mainly based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a. In this first normal game state, as shown in FIG. 46, symbols are displayed in the first variable display area ME1 and third variable display area ME3, and some of the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 will be described later. It will be hidden with the following exceptions. The display of the sub-symbols in the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the main symbols in the first variable display area ME1. That is, in the first normal game state, the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the picture in the lower operating opening display section DL.

Specifically, at the timing when the fluctuating display of the symbols starts in the lower actuation opening display section DL, the fluctuating display of the main symbol in the first fluctuating display area ME1 and the fluctuating display of the sub-symbol in the third fluctuating display area ME3 are performed. The main symbol in the first variable display area ME1 and the sub-symbol in the third variable display area ME3 are stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower operating opening display section DL. The symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed in the first variable display area ME1 and the third variable display area ME3 are the symbol combinations that correspond to the lottery results related to the lower operation opening 62a.

In addition, when the game round related to the right operating port 63a is executed in the first normal gaming state, the symbols are displayed in a variable to fixed manner on the right operating port display section DR of the main display section D. On the display screen 75a, the symbol will be displayed in the second variable display area ME2 only during this period. That is, in the second variable display area ME2, in response to the variable display to final display of the symbol in the right operating port display section DR, the main symbol is displayed in a variable display to final display, and the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a is clearly displayed. However, when the game round related to the right operating port 63a is not in progress, the display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2 is avoided. In the first normal game state, even if the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is not progressing, the state in which the symbols are displayed in the first variable display area ME1 and the third variable display area ME3 is maintained. However, the second variable display area ME2 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

Incidentally, in the first normal game state, even if the game round related to the right operating port 63a is executed, it is also possible to configure the symbol in the second variable display area ME2 to remain hidden. be.

As already explained, the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state are different from each other so that it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball to the right route than to the left route. Therefore, if you try to advance the game even a little, it is assumed that the main destination of the game ball will be the right route. The game ball launched to the right route enters the latter of the lower operating port 62a to the right operating port 63a, and the ball entering the latter is avoided. Therefore, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the game progresses mainly based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a. In these second to fourth normal game states, as shown in FIG. 47(a), symbols are displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and third variable display area ME3, and the symbols are displayed in the first variable display area ME2. The symbols in ME1 are not displayed except for some exceptions that will be described later. The display of the sub-symbols in the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the main symbols in the second variable display area ME2. That is, in the second normal gaming state, the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized (linked) with the display of the picture in the right operating mouth display section DR.

Specifically, at the timing when the fluctuating display of the symbols starts in the right operating mouth display section DR, the fluctuating display of the main symbol in the second fluctuating display area ME2 and the fluctuating display of the sub-symbol in the third fluctuating display area ME3 are performed. is started, and the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2 and the sub symbol in the third variable display area ME3 are stopped and displayed at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed in the right operating port display section DR. The symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 are the symbol combinations that correspond to the lottery results related to the right operating port 63a.

In addition, when a game round related to the lower operating port 62a is executed in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the lower operating port display section DL of the main display section D. Confirmation will be displayed. On the display screen 75a, the symbol will be displayed in the first variable display area ME1 only during this period. That is, in the first variable display area ME1, in response to the variable display to final display of the symbol in the lower operating port display section DL, the main symbol is displayed in a variable display to final display, and the lottery result related to the lower operating port 62a is clearly displayed. However, if the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is not in progress, the display of the main symbol in the first variable display area ME1 is avoided. In the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, symbols are displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 even if the game round related to the right operating port 63a is not progressing. However, the first variable display area ME1 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

Incidentally, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, even if the game round related to the lower operation port 62a is executed, the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 are maintained hidden. It is also possible to do this.

In this embodiment, the variable display area used in the fourth normal game state is made common to the variable display area used in the second normal game state, and the variable display mode etc. in the variable display area are also made common. ing. Furthermore, other displays on the display screen 75a are also made common in both normal game states. This makes it difficult to visually identify whether the game is in the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state based on the display content in the variable display area. By making it difficult to distinguish between the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, even if the fourth normal gaming state is more disadvantageous than the second normal gaming state, the third normal gaming state It is possible to give the player the expectation that the game may shift to a gaming state.

It should be noted that it is also possible to distinguish the display mode of the display screen 75a in the fourth normal gaming state from the display mode of the display screen 75a in the second normal gaming state to clearly indicate which normal gaming state it is in. .

The third normal game state, like the second normal game state, is a game state in which it is assumed that the game proceeds mainly based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a. In this second normal game state, as shown in FIG. 47(b), symbols are displayed in the second variable display area ME2 of the display screen 75a, and some of the symbols in the first variable display area ME1 will be described later. It will be hidden with the following exceptions. In addition, in the third variable display area ME3, a character image imitating a fairy is displayed instead of the above-mentioned sub-symbol, and the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a is notified by the movement of this character. ing. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot result, the character image imitating a fairy becomes a transformed image, in the case of a special win result, the effect displayed surrounding the character lights up in rainbow colors, and in the case of a miss result, the character image appears in a rainbow color. The effect will be hidden. In this way, the display in the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized with the display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2. In other words, in the third normal gaming state, the third variable display area ME3 is synchronized with the display of the picture on the right operating mouth display section DR.

For example, at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is started in the right actuator opening display section DR, the variable display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2 and the movement of the character image in the third variable display area ME3 are started. , at the same time as the symbols are stopped and displayed in the right actuation port display section DR, the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2 is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the character image, etc. in the third variable display area ME3 is displayed indicating the lottery result. Switch to . The symbol combination that is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 corresponds to the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a, and the character display in the third variable display area ME3 also corresponds to the lottery result related to the right operating port 63a. A corresponding display will be displayed. That is, in the third normal game state, the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 are interlocked (see FIG. 48).

In addition, when the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is executed in the third normal game state, the symbols are displayed in a variable to fixed manner on the lower operating port display section DL of the main display section D. On the display screen 75a, the symbol will be displayed in the first variable display area ME1 only during this period. That is, in the first variable display area ME1, in response to the variable display to final display of the symbol in the lower operating port display section DL, the main symbol is displayed in a variable display to final display, and the lottery result related to the lower operating port 62a is clearly displayed. However, when the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is not in progress, the main symbol is avoided from being displayed in the first variable display area ME1. In the second normal game state, even if the game round related to the right operating port 63a is not in progress, the symbols and character images are displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. Although maintained, the first variable display area ME1 is different in that such a resident function is not provided.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

As already explained, when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number, that is, the time saving number set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. One of the features of this embodiment is that information suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed during the second normal gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47(a), in the upper part of the display screen 75a (specifically, between the first variable display area ME1 and the second variable display area ME2), there is a message indicating that the third normal game state is to be entered. A remaining number display area CE in which a counter image CF, which is information indicating the remaining number of games before transition, is displayed, and a target image, which is information indicating a gaming state to which the standard number of games can be transitioned (for example, the third normal gaming state). An information display area IE is provided which includes a destination display area TE in which TF is displayed.

The counter image CF displayed in the remaining number of times display area CE displays the number of remaining games until the transition to the third normal game state as a number from "0" to "100". In the example shown in FIG. 47(a), the value indicated by the counter image CF (hereinafter referred to as counter value) is "100", and it is necessary to play 100 games to transition to the third normal gaming state. This is indicated. The counter value is decremented and displayed as the game round is completed, and after the counter value reaches "0", the counter image CF is hidden in accordance with the transition to the third normal game state.

The target image TF displayed in the transition destination display area TE is composed of characters "SUPER RUSH" which is the name of the third normal gaming state. This target image TF includes a restraint image LF, which is made up of a plurality of restraint patterns imitating chains that wrap around the target image TF, as an image that gives the player the impression that the transition to the third normal gaming state is being prevented. is included. The details will be described later, but as the number of played games increases, the target image TF is enlarged, and the restraint image LF is enlarged in accordance with this enlargement of the target. Then, the number of constraint patterns constituting the constraint image LF decreases in accordance with this enlargement. This suggests that the third normal game state is approaching.

Here, the display control process (hereinafter referred to as information display control process) of the information display area IE executed by the notification/effect control device 143 will be explained. The information display control process is a process executed by the MPU 602 of the notification/effect control device 143 as part of regular processing.

(Information display control processing)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, in the information display control process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the current state is the first special gaming state corresponding to transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, the process advances to step S1702, and special game state display control processing is executed.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, in the special game state display control process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the ending is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the process advances to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether it is the ending start timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the ending command is received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the present display control process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, the process advances to step S1803. In step S1803, migration information display processing is executed. Specifically, a transition information display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for starting display of transition information is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 displays the target image TF, constraint image LF, and counter image CF described above at the center of the display screen 75a based on the transition information display command. In addition, at this timing, the counter value of the counter image CF is scrolled and displayed (see FIG. 51 (a) → (b)), and the reference number of times (remaining number of games) set in conjunction with the transition to the second normal gaming state is displayed. It is not specified.

Returning to the explanation of step S1801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process advances to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether the timing has come after the variable display of the counter value is ended and the remaining number of games is displayed definitively. If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether it is time to display the remaining number of games. If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the present display control process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, the process advances to step S1806.

In step S1806, final display processing is executed. Specifically, a confirmation display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for confirmation display of the number of remaining games (initial value) is output from the speaker section 29. In response to receiving the final display command, the display control device 710 stops displaying the counter value that is being scrolled. Specifically, the same value as the standard number of times the high-frequency support mode is continued in the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state of the transition destination is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 51(b)→(c)). . Note that FIG. 51(b) illustrates a case where the reference number of times is 100.

In the following step S1807, the remaining number counter provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is set to the same value as the reference number of times. The value of this remaining number of times counter is updated (subtracted) every time a game time is started in the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, and the value of the counter image CF is the same as the value of this remaining number of times counter. It will be updated (subtracted) so that it becomes the value.

Returning to the explanation of step S1804, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, that is, if the remaining number of games has been confirmed and displayed, the process advances to step S1808. In step S1808, it is determined whether it is the timing to display the target image TF etc. displayed in the center of the display screen 75a in a reduced size in the information display area IE at the upper part of the display screen 75a. If a negative determination is made in step S1808, the present display control process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1808, the process advances to step S1809, and after executing the reduced display process, the present display control process ends.

In the reduced display process in step S1809, a reduced display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for reduced display is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on receiving the reduced display command, the display control device 710 moves the target image TF, restraint image LF, and counter image CF currently displayed in the center of the display screen 75a to the upper part of the display screen 75a, and also moves the target image TF to the upper part of the display screen 75a. , constraint image LF, and counter image CF are displayed in a reduced size to match the information display area IE described above. As a result, the overlap between the target image TF and the like and the third variable display area ME3 is eliminated, and the symbol display is restarted in the third variable display area ME3 (see FIGS. 51(c) to 51(d)). Note that at this timing, symbol display is restarted in the second variable display area ME2, and preparations for transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state are completed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 49 again, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process advances to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. If it is not in any normal gaming state, the information display control process is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, the process advances to step S1704, and after executing the normal game state display control process, the information display control process ends.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52, in the display control process for the normal game state, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the variable display of symbols. Specifically, a variation start command related to the lower operating port display section DL (lower operating port 62a) or a variation start command related to the right operating port display section DR (right operating port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. Determine whether the timing is right. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process advances to step S1902, and the value of the remaining number of times counter provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is updated (subtracted by 1).

After executing the process in step S1902, or if a negative determination is made in step S1901, the display control process (target display control process) of the target image TF and constraint image LF is executed in the subsequent step S1903, and in step S1904 After executing the display control process (counter display control process) for the counter image CF, the present display control process ends. First, target display control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the target control process, FIG. 54(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the number of games, the size of the target image TF, and the number of restricted symbols, and FIG. 54(b) is the transition destination display area TE. FIG.

(Target display control processing)
In the target display control process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process advances to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether it is time to start variable display. Specifically, a fluctuation start command related to the lower operating port display section DL (lower operating port 62a) or a variation start command related to the right operating port display section DR (right operating port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. Determine whether the timing is right.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the process advances to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether the value of the remaining number of times counter in the various counter areas 675 has reached the first predetermined number of times. The ROM 653 stores a first predetermined number of times setting table showing the correspondence between each reference number of times set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state and the first predetermined number of times. When transitioning to the normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, the first predetermined number of times is set by referring to the reference number of times and the first predetermined number of times setting table.

For example, when the standard number of times is 100 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 70 times, 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times (see FIG. 54(a)). is 70 times, the first predetermined number of times is 50, 30, 10, 5, and 0 times, and when the reference number is 50, the first predetermined number of times is 50, 30, 10, 5, and 0. is specified to be 30 times, 10 times, 5 times, 3 times, and 0 times, and when the standard number of times is 30 times, the first predetermined number of times is 10 times, 5 times, 3 times, and 1 time. , 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 10 times, the first predetermined number of times is 5 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, and 0 times.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the present target display control process is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the process advances to step S2004. In step S2004, the target image TF and constraint image LF are enlarged and displayed. Specifically, an enlarged display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for enlarged display is outputted from the speaker unit 29. In response to receiving the enlarged display command, the display control device 710 enlarges the target image TF and constraint image LF that are being displayed, and partially hides each constraint pattern constituting the constraint image LF. As a result, the number of restricted patterns is reduced as the target image TF is enlarged.

For example, if the set standard number of times is 100, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the restricted picture until the number of games started reaches 30. When the number of games becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)) and the number of games started reaches 30 (when the remaining number of games reaches 70), the size of the target image TF changes to the third The variable display area ME3 changes from “1/30” to “1/25” and the number of restricted symbols changes from “8” to “7” (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of started game times reaches 50. (when the remaining number of games reaches 50), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols becomes "7". to "6" (display level 3 (LV3)), and when the number of games started reaches 70 (when the remaining number of games reaches 30), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation display. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/25" to "1/20" in area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)), and the number of games started reaches 90. (When the remaining number of games reaches 10), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "5" to " 4" (display level 5 (LV5)), and when the number of games started reaches 100 (when the number of remaining games reaches 0), the size of the target image TF changes to the third variable display area ME3. from "1/10" to "1/2", and the number of restricted symbols changes from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the set standard number of times is 70, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols until the number of started game times reaches 20. becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of games started reaches 20 (when the remaining number of games reaches 50), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation display. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/30" to "1/25" in area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols changes from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of games started reaches 40. (When the remaining number of games reaches 30), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "7" to " 6'' (display level 3 (LV3)), and when the number of games started reaches 60 (when the remaining number of games reaches 10), the size of the target image TF changes to the third variable display area ME3. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/25" to "1/20" and the number of restricted symbols changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)), and the number of games started reaches 65 (remaining When the number of games has reached 5), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "5" to "4". (display level 5 (LV5)), and when the number of started games reaches 70 (when the number of remaining games reaches 0), the size of the target image TF changes to "" in the third variable display area ME3. 1/10" becomes "1/2" and the number of constraint symbols changes from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the set reference number of times is 50, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols until the number of started game times reaches 20. becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of games started reaches 20 (when the remaining number of games reaches 30), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation display. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/30" to "1/25" in area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols changes from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of games started reaches 40. (When the remaining number of games reaches 10), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "7" to " 6'' (display level 3 (LV3)), and when the number of games started reaches 45 (when the remaining number of games reaches 5), the size of the target image TF changes to the third variable display area ME3. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/25" to "1/20" and the number of restricted symbols changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)), and the number of games started reaches 67 (remaining When the number of games is 3), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "5" to "4". (display level 5 (LV5)), and when the number of started games reaches 50 (when the number of remaining games reaches 0), the size of the target image TF changes to "" in the third variable display area ME3. 1/10" becomes "1/2" and the number of constraint symbols changes from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the set reference number of times is 30, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols until the number of started game times reaches 20. becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of games started reaches 20 (when the remaining number of games reaches 10), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation display. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/30" to "1/25" in area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols changes from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of games started reaches 25. (When the remaining number of games is 5), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "7" to " 6'' (display level 3 (LV3)), and when the number of games started reaches 27 (when the number of games remaining is 3), the size of the target image TF changes to the third variable display area ME3. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/25" to "1/20" and the number of restricted symbols changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)), and the number of games started reaches 29 (remaining When the number of games is 1), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "5" to "4". (display level 5 (LV5)), and when the number of started games reaches 30 (when the remaining number of games reaches 0), the size of the target image TF changes to "" in the third variable display area ME3. 1/10" becomes "1/2" and the number of constraint symbols changes from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the set reference number of times is 10, the size of the target image TF is "1/30" of the third variable display area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols until the number of started game times reaches 5. becomes "8" (display level 1 (LV1)), and when the number of games started reaches 5 (when the remaining number of games reaches 5), the size of the target image TF is displayed in the third variation display. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/30" to "1/25" in area ME3 and the number of restricted symbols changes from "8" to "7" (display level 2 (LV2)), and the number of games started reaches 7. (When the remaining number of games is 3), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/25" to "1/20" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "7" to " 6'' (display level 3 (LV3)), and when the number of games started reaches 8 (when the number of games remaining is 2), the size of the target image TF changes to the third variable display area ME3. When the number of restricted symbols changes from "1/25" to "1/20" and the number of restricted symbols changes from "6" to "5" (display level 4 (LV4)), and the number of games started reaches 9 (remaining When the number of games is 1), the size of the target image TF changes from "1/20" to "1/15" in the third variable display area ME3, and the number of restricted symbols changes from "5" to "4". (display level 5 (LV5)), and when the number of games started reaches 10 (when the number of remaining games reaches 0), the size of the target image TF changes to "" in the third variable display area ME3. 1/10" becomes "1/2" and the number of constraint symbols changes from "4" to "3" (display level 6 (LV6)).

When the display level is LV1 to LV5, the destination display area TE (information display area IE) is away from the third variable display area ME3, but when the display level becomes LV6, the destination display area TE (information display area IE) is away from the third variable display area ME3. The TE (information display area IE) is expanded to a position on the display screen 75a that includes at least a part of the range where the third variable display area ME3 is formed (see FIG. 54(b)). This is a contrivance to direct the player's attention to the target image TF and counter image CF.

In addition, when the reference number of times is 100 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 70 times, 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 70 times, the first predetermined number of times is 70 times, 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times. The predetermined number of times is specified to be 50 times, 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 50 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 30 times, 10 times, and 0 times. , when the reference number of times is 30 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 10 times and 0 times, and when the reference number of times is 10 times, the first predetermined number of times is specified to be 0 times. It is also possible to do so. In such a configuration, the initial display level when the reference number of times is 70 times is the above LV2, the initial display level when the reference number of times is 50 times is the above LV3, and the initial display level when the reference number of times is 30 times. It is preferable that the display level is set to the above LV4, the initial display level when the reference number of times is 10 is set to the above LV5, and the step-up of enlarged display is partially shortened.

Returning to the explanation of step S2002 in FIG. 53, if a negative determination is made in step S2002, that is, if it is not the timing to start variable display, the process advances to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether it is time to shift to final display. Specifically, a variation end command related to the lower operating port display section DL (lower operating port 62a) or a variation end command related to the right operating port display section DR (right operating port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. Determine whether the timing is right. If a negative determination is made in step S2005, the present display control process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process advances to step S2006.

In step S2006, it is determined whether the current game round is the last game round in which the value of the remaining number of times counter becomes "0" in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state (the game round in which the reference number of times has been reached). judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2006, the present display control process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, that is, if it is time for the final game display to start, the process advances to step S2007.

In step S2007, target image maximum display processing is executed. Specifically, a maximum display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for maximum display is output from the speaker unit 29. In response to receiving the maximum display command, the display control device 710 erases all constraint images LF being displayed and enlarges and displays the target image TF in the center of the display screen 75a (see FIG. 54(b)). As a result, the player is notified of the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Note that almost the entire third variable display area ME3 is occupied by the maximized target image TF. Although details will be described later, the symbol display in the third variable display area ME3 is not executed in the final game round. By maximizing the target image TF to occupy almost the entire third variable display area ME3, it is possible to suppress the feeling of discomfort caused by the fact that no symbol is displayed in the third variable display area ME3.

Returning to the explanation of step S2001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the process advances to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether it is time to shift to final display. Specifically, a variation end command related to the lower operating port display section DL (lower operating port 62a) or a variation end command related to the right operating port display section DR (right operating port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. Determine whether the timing is right. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009, and a display process corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the variation end command transferred to the display control device 710 includes information for stopping and displaying the pattern combination corresponding to the jackpot result, and information for displaying the target image TF and constraint image LF being displayed corresponding to the jackpot result. Add information for switching to. Then, the speaker unit 29 outputs a sound effect for a jackpot result during the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state.

This display can be roughly divided into two modes. Specifically, the display mode is divided into a display mode when the result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and a display mode when the result is a jackpot other than that. Regarding the former, the display of the target image TF is continued and the constraint image LF is hidden in order to notify the transition to the third normal game state. Regarding the latter, the target image TF and restricted image LF being displayed are divided into small pieces to clearly indicate that the transition to the third normal game state has failed.

Returning to the explanation of step S2008, if a negative determination is made in step S2008, the process advances to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether it is the final display end timing. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the present target display control process is directly terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, the process advances to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is a 16R probability variable jackpot result, that is, whether or not to move to the third normal gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, the present display control process is immediately terminated. As a result, the display of the target image TF continues even in the first special game state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2011, a process to hide the target image TF is executed in step S2012. Specifically, a target image non-display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for non-display is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on receiving the target image hiding command, the display control device 710 hides the target image TF and constraint image LF, which are divided and displayed into small pieces in the information display area IE.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57, the flow of the counter display control process in step S1904, which is executed to update the value of the counter image CF in the remaining number display area CE, and the countdown display in the remaining number display area CE. I will explain about it. In this embodiment, the main control device 162 The value of the game counter is updated, and the value of the counter image CF is also updated accordingly. The counter display control processing is executed in the game round corresponding to the right operating port, which is executed in the game round based on the winning in the right operating opening 63a, and in the gaming round, which is executed in the gaming round based on the winning in the lower operating opening 62a. The counter display control process corresponds to the lower operating port. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing counter display control processing for the right operating port, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing counter display control processing for the lower operating port, and FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of countdown display.

(Counter display control processing for right operating port)
As shown in FIG. 55, in the counter display control process corresponding to the right operating port, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether the current game round (game round based on winning to the right operating port 63a) corresponds to a jackpot result. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the variable display of the symbol in the right operating mouth display section DR, the variable display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2, and the variable display of the sub symbol in the third variable display area ME3. Determine. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which a fluctuation start command related to the right operating port display section DR (right operating port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process advances to step S2103.

In step S2103, it is determined whether the value of the remaining number of times counter in the various counter areas 675 matches the second predetermined number of times. The ROM 653 stores a second predetermined number of times setting table indicating the correspondence between each reference number of times set at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state and the second predetermined number of times. When transitioning to the normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, the second predetermined number of times is set by referring to the reference number of times and the second predetermined number of times setting table.

For example, when the set standard number of times is 100 times, the second predetermined number of times is 90 times, 80 times, 70 times, 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times, and if the standard number of times is 70 times, the second predetermined number of times is 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times, 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times If the standard number of times is 50, the second predetermined number of times is 40, 30, 20, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4. , 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, and 0 times, and when the standard number of times is 30 times, the second predetermined number of times is 20 times, 10 times, 9 times, 8 times, and 7 times. , 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, 0 times, and if the standard number of times is 10 times, the second predetermined number of times is 9 times, 8 times. , 7 times, 6 times, 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, 1 time, and 0 times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process advances to step S2014. In step S2104, the counter image CF is enlarged and displayed. Specifically, a counter enlargement display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for counter enlargement display is output from the speaker section 29. In this embodiment, the display state of the counter image CF is switched between a normal display state, a first enlarged display state that is slightly larger than the normal display state, and a third enlarged display state that is even larger than the first enlarged display state. It is possible. If the value of the remaining number of times counter is a specific number (0 times) of the first predetermined number of times, a second enlarged display command is output as a counter enlarged display command, and the value of the remaining number of times counter is equal to the first predetermined number of times. If the number of times is other than the specified number (0 times), the first enlarged display command is output as the counter enlarged display command. The display control device 710 switches the display state of the counter image CF to the first enlarged display state based on receiving the first enlarged display command, and switches the display state of the counter image CF to the first enlarged display state based on receiving the second enlarged display command. Switch the state to the second enlarged display state.

Note that in the normal display state and the first enlarged display state of the counter image CF, overlapping with the first variable display area ME1 to the third variable display area ME3 is avoided. On the other hand, in the second enlarged display state, the size and position are defined according to the maximum display of the target image TF, and the counter image CF is displayed in the third variable display area ME3.

After executing the process in step S2104, or if a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process advances to step S2105. In step S2105, subtraction display processing is executed. Specifically, a subtraction display command is output to the display control device 710, and the speaker unit 29 outputs a sound effect for subtraction display. The display control device 710 subtracts "1" from the value of the counter image CF based on the reception of the subtraction display command.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57(a)→FIG. 57(b), the counter image CF changes from the normal display state to the start of the variable display of symbols in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. At the same time as switching to the first enlarged display state, the value of the counter is decremented from "51" to "50".

Returning to the explanation of step S2102 in FIG. 55, if a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if it is not the timing to start variable display, the process advances to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether it is the timing to shift to the final display of the symbol in the right operating mouth display section DR and the final display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME2. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which a fluctuation end command related to the right operating port display section DR (right operating port 63a) is received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, this counter display control processing is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process advances to step S2107.

In step S2107, it is determined whether the current game round is the last game round in which the value of the remaining number of times counter becomes "0" in the second normal game state or the fourth normal game state (the game round in which the reference number of times is reached). judge. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, the process advances to step S2108. In step S2108, it is determined whether the counter image CF is being displayed in an enlarged manner. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, this counter display control process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2108, the process advances to step S2109.

In step S2109, the counter image CF is reduced and displayed. Specifically, a counter reduction display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for reduction display is output from the speaker unit 29. In response to receiving the counter reduction display command, the display control device 710 returns the display state of the counter image CF to the normal display state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 57(b)→FIG. 57(c), the counter image CF changes from the first enlarged display state to the final display of the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. Switched to normal display state.

Returning to the explanation of step S2107, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, that is, if it is the timing to shift to the confirmed display in the final game round, the process advances to step S2110 and counter image non-display processing is executed. Specifically, a counter non-display command is output to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 hides the counter image CF based on receiving this counter hide command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 58(a), a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the switching of the display when moving from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state.

When the final game round described above is started in the second normal game state, the target image TF and restraint image LF are enlarged and displayed from LV5 to LV6, as shown in FIG. 58(a1) → FIG. 58(a2). At the same time, the number of pictures constituting the constraint image LF decreases from "4" to "3". Further, the counter image CF switches from the normal display state to the second enlarged display state, and the value of the counter image CF decreases from "1" to "0". As a result, it is announced that this is the final game round in the second normal game state. In the final game round, the main symbols continue to be displayed in the second variable display area ME, while the sub symbols in the third variable display area ME3 are hidden.

In the example shown in FIG. 58(a), the last game round corresponds to the special winning result. In this case, at the end timing of the variable display, the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning result is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2, and the target image TF is displayed at its maximum in the center of the display screen 75a. In line with this, the restraint image LF and the counter image CF are hidden, and a message (the characters "entering") indicating that the transition to the third normal game state has been confirmed is displayed in a position adjacent to the target image TF. That will happen.

Returning to the explanation of step S2101 in FIG. 55, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if the current game round related to the right operating port 63a corresponds to a jackpot result, the process advances to step S2111. In step S2111, similarly to step S2102, it is determined whether it is time to start variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, the processes of steps S2103 to S2105 are executed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2111, the process advances to step S2112.

In step S2112, similarly to step S2106, it is determined whether it is time to shift to final display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2112, the process proceeds to step S2113, and a jackpot result corresponding display process is executed. Specifically, a jackpot result corresponding display command is output to the display control device 710, and a sound effect for the jackpot result is output from the speaker unit 29. Based on receiving this jackpot result corresponding display command, the display control device 710 displays a message indicating that the transition to the third normal gaming state has failed. Specifically, the counter image CF is switched to an image in which the counter image CF is divided into a plurality of small pieces.

If a negative determination is made in step S2112, the process advances to step S2114. In step S2114, it is determined whether it is time to end the final display. If it is not the end timing of the final display, this counter display control process is ended immediately. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2114, the process advances to step S2115. After executing the counter image non-display control process similar to step S2110 in step S2115, this counter display control process ends.

Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 58(b), a supplementary explanation will be given of the display switching when a jackpot result (more specifically, a jackpot result other than the 16R probability variable jackpot result) occurs in the second normal gaming state.

When a game round corresponding to a jackpot result is started in the second normal game state, as shown in FIG. The display mode will be similar. Therefore, it is difficult to discern from the display on the display screen 75a whether or not a jackpot has been achieved at the beginning of a game round.

At the transition timing to the confirmed display, as shown in FIG. 58(b2), the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(b2)→FIG. 58(b3), the target image TF, restraint image LF, and counter image CF are each changed into images broken into a plurality of small pieces, and the fixed display time for these images has elapsed. It will be hidden until then.

Here, in the gaming machine shown in this embodiment, a game round related to the lower operating port 62a may be executed in the second normal gaming state, and a game round related to the lower operating port 62a may be executed. Even in this case, the values of the game play counter and the remaining number of times counter will be updated (subtracted). The counter display control process for the lower operating port will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Counter display control processing for lower operating port)
In the counter display control process for the lower operating port, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether a fluctuation start command related to the lower operating port display section DL (lower operating port 62a) has been received from the main controller 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2202. In step S2202, the remaining number of times counter is subtracted. In the following step S2203, subtraction display processing is executed.

Specifically, a subtraction display command is output to the display control device 710, and the speaker unit 29 outputs a sound effect for subtraction display. The display control device 710 subtracts "1" from the value of the counter image CF based on the reception of the subtraction display command. In the game round related to the right operating port 63a, the value of the counter image CF was decremented by "1" at the start timing of the variable display of symbols in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. On the other hand, in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a, regardless of the start timing of the variable display of symbols in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3, in the game round related to the right operating port 63a, etc. Suddenly, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1".

Returning to the explanation of step S2201, if a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2204. In step S2204, it is determined whether it is the timing to shift to the final display of the pattern on the lower operating port display section DL. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which a fluctuation end command related to the lower operating port display section DL (lower operating port 62a) is received from the main controller 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process advances to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether it is the last game round. If it is the last game round, counter image non-display processing is executed in step S2206, and then the present display control processing is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process advances to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether it is time to end the final display. If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the present display control process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207 or a negative determination is made in step S2205, the process advances to step S2208. In step S2208, it is determined whether the current game round related to the lower operating port 62a corresponds to a jackpot result. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the present display control process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, counter image non-display processing is executed in step S2206, and then this display control processing is ended.

When the game ball is fired toward the right route in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the game round progresses centering on the game round related to the right operating port 63a, but the lower operating port The possibility that the game session related to 62a will intervene cannot be denied. When the game round related to the lower operating port 62a is executed, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted regardless of the change in the display state of the counter image CF, thereby making the subtraction less noticeable.

In the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the symbols in the first variable display area ME1 are not displayed, and the interlocking target of the third variable display area ME3 is the second variable display area ME2. Under such circumstances, if a jackpot result is achieved in the game round related to the lower operating port 62a, at the timing when the symbol corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed on the lower operating port display section DL, The symbol combination corresponding to the miss result is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2. In accordance with this, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area ME3, and the cooperation target of the third variable display area ME3 is switched from the right operating port 63a to the lower operating port 62a. In line with this, the counter image CF is hidden.

In the present embodiment, from a first normal game state in which the game progresses mainly by game rounds related to the lower operating port 62a, to a second normal game state or a fourth normal game state in which the game progresses mainly by game cycles related to the right operating port 63a. Immediately after transitioning to the gaming state, there is a tendency for the remaining number of times counter to be decremented by the number of gaming times related to the lower operating port 62a. Hereinafter, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 59, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the display of the remaining number of times when the game times related to both operating ports 62a and 63a are executed in parallel.

For example, if the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a acquired in the first normal gaming state is carried over to the second normal gaming state via the first special gaming state, the transfer to the second normal gaming state Accordingly, a game round related to the lower operating port 62a is started. In the example shown in FIG. 59, at the timing of ta1 (more specifically, the timing of transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the first special gaming state), the number of pending information related to the lower operating port 62a is 4. In addition, the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is four. In such a case, with the transition to the second normal gaming state, the game round related to the lower operating port 62a and the game round related to the right operating port 63a will be started at the same time.

The value of the counter image CF displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 becomes "98" by subtracting each game number from the initial value "100". The variable display time of the symbol in the display section DL for the lower operating port is determined from the variable display time of the symbol in the display section DR for the right operating port, that is, the variable display time of the symbol in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. is also shorter, and at the time when the picture is stopped and displayed on the lower actuating mouth display part DL, the picture is still being displayed in a fluctuating manner on the right actuating mouth display part DR.

At the timing ta2 before the final display of the pattern on the right operating port display section DR ends, the variable display of the pattern on the lower operating port display section DL is started. As a result, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted from "98" to "97". At timing ta3, when the final display time of the symbol corresponding to the special winning result has elapsed on the right operating opening display section DR, the second special game state is entered. At the timing of ta4 when returning from the second special gaming state to the second normal gaming state, both the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a and the hold information related to the right operating port 63a exist, so the timing of ta4 is Then, similar to the timing of ta1, the game round related to the lower operation port 62a and the game time related to the right operation port 63a are started at the same time.

The value of the counter image CF displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 becomes "95" by subtracting each game number from "97". The variable display time of the symbol in the display section DL for the lower operating port is determined from the variable display time of the symbol in the display section DR for the right operating port, that is, the variable display time of the symbol in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. is also shorter, and at the time when the picture is stopped and displayed on the lower actuating mouth display part DL, the picture is still being displayed in a fluctuating manner on the right actuating mouth display part DR.

At the timing ta5 before the final display of the pattern on the right operating port display section DR ends, the variable display of the pattern on the lower operating port display section DL is started. As a result, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted from "95" to "94". At timing ta6 when the final display of the pattern on the lower operating port 62a is completed, the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a becomes "0". Thereafter, the value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1" each time a game round related to the right operating port 63a is started.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The second normal game state corresponds to a high probability mode, so normally a jackpot result can be expected quickly, but in some cases, unfortunately, the game may proceed without a jackpot result. Even though expectations for a jackpot result are high, if the game progresses without a jackpot result and the support mode switches to the low-frequency support mode, the player's gaming There is concern that motivation will drop significantly. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this embodiment, if the number of games reaches the reference number without a winning result in the second normal game state compatible with the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, Upon reaching this point, a transition is made to a third normal game state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode. The third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state, and by upgrading to the third normal gaming state, it becomes possible to proceed with the game even more advantageously. By providing relief to the players with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

Specifically, in the third normal gaming state, as the frequency of opening of the right operating port 63a decreases, the number of game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a increases, and the number of game balls that pass through the right operating port 63a increases. , most of them will enter the lower major prize opening 341. In other words, although the probability of winning for the ball entering unit 70 as a whole does not change much, the breakdown of the winning places changes, and the number of winnings for the lower major winning opening 341 increases. The lower prize opening 341 is given preferential treatment so that the number of prize balls is larger than that of the right operating opening 63a, and as a result, the number of prize balls obtained by the same investment is increased compared to the second normal game state. becomes. Specifically, as described above, in the second normal game state, the number of balls held gradually decreases as the game progresses, while in the third normal game state, the number of balls held gradually increases as the game progresses. The third normal game state continues at least until the next jackpot result, providing a chance to increase the number of balls held.

In addition, in the third normal gaming state, the time required for a game round is slightly shorter than that in the second normal gaming state, and even if the intervention of the second special gaming state continues. The occurrence of inconveniences such as slow game progress is suppressed.

In addition, in the third normal game state, the opening of the lower large prize opening 341 is triggered by the ball entering the right operating opening 63a. Here, although the winning probability for the right operating port 63a is lower than in the second normal gaming state, the decrease in the winning probability is suppressed to the extent that the reservation information regarding the right operating port 63a can be sufficiently acquired. There is. In other words, the inconvenience that the frequency of opening the lower large prize opening 341 decreases due to the decrease in the winning probability to the right operating opening 63a is suppressed.

If there is a jackpot result during the third normal gaming state, most of them (excluding 2R normal jackpot results and 16R guaranteed variable jackpot results) will cause the transition to the second normal gaming state, and the above-mentioned relief function will be overpowered. This has been avoided. However, even if you are demoted from the 3rd normal gaming state, if the transition destination becomes the 2nd normal gaming state, you can move to the 3rd normal gaming state again, so by being demoted from the 3rd normal gaming state, It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from suddenly decreasing.

During the third game state, the right route is given preferential treatment compared to the left route so that it is more advantageous to the player, so it is assumed that the destination of the game ball is mainly the right route. The game ball fired to the right route is prevented from entering the lower operating port 62a, and enters the right operating port 63a. Here, the number of time saving times set when a jackpot result is achieved in the game round related to the right operating port 63a is greater than the number of time saving times set when a jackpot result is achieved in the gaming round related to the lower operating port 62a. There is also an emphasis on reducing the number of people in general. For this reason, if you get a jackpot result in the third normal gaming state, you will be demoted to the second normal gaming state, but you will be given preferential treatment so that the number of time reductions that will be reset will be relatively small. There is. As a result, the hurdle for activating the relief function is lower in the second normal gaming state transferred from the third normal gaming state than in the second normal gaming state transferred from the first normal gaming state. This is an idea to alleviate the decrease in the desire to play due to the end of the third normal gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the third normal gaming state, the transition to the first normal gaming state is made, and 50 times is set as the number of time reductions, and in the third normal gaming state, If the result is a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the game is configured to shift to the second normal gaming state and set the same number of times as 50 times. In each of these normal gaming states, the display effect on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29, etc. are common, and it is possible to identify which normal gaming state is in from the appearance. is becoming difficult. For this reason, it is unclear whether the player will be promoted to the third normal gaming state or demoted to the first normal gaming state until the set number of time reductions is exhausted. In this way, even if the same number of time reductions is set, the gaming state after the number of time reductions is set is divided into advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the gaming state, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the attention to the game. Can contribute to improvement.

As described above, in a configuration in which the gaming state can change to an advantageous/disadvantageous side by expiring the number of time reductions, the player's attention tends to be directed to the remaining number of games until the number of time reductions is exhausted. If the number of balls held decreases significantly in a situation where attention to gaming is increasing, it is assumed that this, combined with the increased attention to gaming, will likely lead to a decline in the desire to play. Ru. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the high-frequency support mode is supported for both the fourth normal gaming state, which is triggered by the 2R normal jackpot result, and the second normal gaming state, which is triggered by the 2R variable jackpot result. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.

In addition, in a configuration where the game state changes as the number of times is shortened, there is a concern that the progress of the game will be delayed in the process, reducing the impact and hindering the ability to increase the attention level of the game. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, such concerns can be suitably eliminated by smoothing the progress of the game until the number of times is shortened by shortening the variable display time.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the gaming state is divided into an advantageous side and a disadvantageous side by completing the number of time reductions, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the game will increase, but on the other hand, the time required for the number of time reductions to be completed is extended, causing player fatigue. There are concerns that the number will increase. In this respect, smoothing the progress of the game with the above configuration is advantageous in reducing player fatigue by suppressing the length of game rounds and shortening the time-saving process until the number of rounds is exhausted. It is also preferable to set a certain number of time saving times in which branching occurs.

Note that when comparing the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, the former corresponds to the high probability mode, while the latter corresponds to the low probability mode. For this reason, as mentioned above, even if it is difficult to distinguish which gaming state it is by standardizing the display effects, etc., it is possible to contribute to the diversification of gaming by creating differences in the chances of winning a jackpot during the gaming state. can.

As mentioned above, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the first special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit (time saving number). This causes the game to shift to a third normal game state that is even more advantageous to the player. The above upper limit includes "100 times", "70 times", "50 times", "30 times", and "10 times", and the hurdle to transition to the third normal gaming state differs depending on which upper limit is set. occurs. In other words, a second normal gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the third normal gaming state and a second normal gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state will occur. In this way, by diversifying the second normal gaming state and providing multiple hurdles to transition to the third normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal gaming state and increase the attention to the game. I can contribute.

In order to enhance the variety of the game while suppressing excessive bias in the advantage, it is preferable to set the upper limit to a certain degree and suppress the probability of reaching the upper limit. However, on the other hand, if the upper limit becomes too large, it will take longer to play until the upper limit is reached, or the impression that it is virtually impossible to reach the upper limit will become stronger, which will increase the interest of the game by diversifying the games. There are concerns that the effects of aiming for this will not be achieved effectively. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the lottery mode in the second normal game state is defined as a high probability mode, even if the upper limit is lowered, it is possible to prevent the upper limit from reaching the upper limit frequently. The occurrence of the various inconveniences mentioned above can be suitably suppressed.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, but if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it becomes a factor that increases the player's fatigue. Therefore, in the second normal gaming state, an upper limit is set on the number of games to be executed based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a, so that in the second normal gaming state, it is easy for the ball to enter the right operating port 63a. With this configuration, the game can proceed quickly. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game while alleviating the fatigue caused by it.

In addition, by configuring the second normal game state so that the symbol fluctuation display time is shorter than that in the first normal game state, the game can proceed quickly. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game while alleviating the fatigue caused by it.

In particular, in combination with the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time is shortened as the frequency of balls entering the right operating port 63a increases, and this is done in hopes of reaching the upper limit. The game in the second normal game state can proceed smoothly. Thereby, the above-mentioned fatigue alleviation effect can be exerted more suitably.

For players who have experienced completing the number of time reductions without winning the lottery to move to the first special gaming state in the fourth normal gaming state, it is realistic to reach the upper limit when entering the second normal gaming state. It can give the impression that it is something. With such a configuration, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the game when transitioning to the second normal game state will increase.

If there is a jackpot result during the second normal gaming state, it will move to the first special gaming state, and after the end of the first special gaming state, it will return to the second normal gaming state, or it will go to the fourth normal gaming state. This will result in a transition (demotion). Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game. Further, even if a jackpot result occurs while the game is progressing toward the upper limit in the second normal gaming state, there is a possibility that the second normal gaming state will be returned to. When returning to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit is newly set, and it is possible to try again to move to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the desire to play due to the transition to the first special gaming state.

The transition conditions for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the most advantageous third normal gaming state will be relaxed if you get a jackpot result in the second normal gaming state and return to the second normal gaming state after going through the special gaming state. Sometimes. If the configuration is such that the hurdle to the third normal gaming state is lowered when the second normal gaming state loops, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game by using a plurality of normal gaming states in combination can be suitably achieved. be able to.

As shown in this embodiment, in a gaming machine where a jackpot result is the trigger for transitioning (demotion) from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state The game is played with the expectation that the result will not be a jackpot. Here, in the case of a jackpot result, while it may be demoted to the first normal gaming state, it may return to the second normal gaming state and the conditions for transition to the third normal gaming state may be relaxed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from rapidly decreasing when a jackpot result occurs in the second normal gaming state.

Furthermore, in the case of a winning result in the second normal game state, the hurdle to the third normal game state is not necessarily lowered, but also raised, thereby adding a sense of tension to the game. I can do it.

With the structure that steps up in the order of 1st normal gaming state → 2nd normal gaming state → 3rd normal gaming state, even if you have moved to the 2nd normal gaming state, if you get a jackpot result, you will go to the 3rd normal gaming state. If an event occurs frequently in which the transition becomes far away, it is likely that the game in the second normal game state will feel like it has been delayed. This may be an obstacle to increasing the attention to the game. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, if a jackpot result occurs during the second normal game state, by setting the hurdle lowering rate higher than the hurdle raising rate, multiple normal game states can be played. It is possible to easily step up the game state by using the above.

When the game ball is being shot to the left route in the first normal game state, a jackpot lottery is executed based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a. If this lottery results in a jackpot and the game shifts to the second normal game state, a transition condition (number of time reductions) that is relatively difficult to establish is likely to be set. On the other hand, after the transition to the second normal game state, the game ball is fired to the right route, so that the main ball entry destination of the game ball becomes the right operating port 63a. When a jackpot lottery is executed based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a, resulting in a jackpot result, and the return to the second normal gaming state after passing through the first special gaming state, a transition condition that is relatively easy to satisfy ( It is now easier to set the number of time reductions. With such a configuration, the various technical ideas described above can be suitably realized while avoiding complication of the configuration by utilizing the existing configuration of the gaming machine.

In the ball entering unit 70 shown in the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball flowing down the right route to pass over the shutter 331 (first specific area SE1) of the right operating ball entering section 63 is frequently supported. It is longer than the sum of the variable display time and fixed display time of the picture on the through gate display section DS during the mode. For this reason, during the high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls that have reached the ball entry unit 70 (right operating ball entry section 63) will enter the right operating opening 63a. In other words, the game balls fired to the right route during the high frequency support mode flow into the right operating port 63a and are suppressed from entering the lower large winning port 341. On the other hand, the required time is shorter than the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time in the low frequency support mode. For this reason, during the low-frequency support mode, even if the right operating ball entry section 63 is continuously switched to the receiving state, some of the game balls that have reached the shutter 331 will pass through the right operating ball entry section 63 and go down. Head to the grand prize opening 341. In this way, during the high-frequency support mode, the number of balls entering the lower large winning hole 341 is suppressed, while during the low frequency support mode, the number of balls entering the lower large winning hole 341 increases, which improves the progress of the game. It can make a clear difference.

Here, in order to differentiate each support mode, in order to reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the right operating port 63a and head toward the lower prize opening 341 during the low-frequency support mode, the above-mentioned variable display time and fixed display are necessary. Just shorten the time. However, if these times are simply shortened, firing/stopping will be performed according to the result displayed on the through gate display section DS (proceeding with the game in a way that gives the player even the slightest advantage). This becomes difficult, and the significance of providing the through-gate display section DS diminishes. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, it is possible to suppress the fluctuation display time and fixed display time in the through-gate display section DS from becoming extremely short while suppressing the above-mentioned overflow. Thereby, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

In a configuration in which the ball entering the lower large winning hole 341 is given preferential treatment than the ball entering the right operating hole 63a, it is assumed that the player plays the game expecting the ball to enter the lower large winning hole 341. be done. In such a configuration, it is not preferable that an excessive number of balls enter the lower prize opening 341 because it will cause the game to become unbalanced. In this respect, since it is possible to avoid the movement of the game ball toward the lower large prize opening 341 while minimizing the time for which the right-side actuated ball entry section 63 is in the receiving state, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. . In addition, shortening the time period in which the receiving state is set is advantageous in encouraging players' expectations as if the game ball were flowing down towards the lower prize winning opening 341, and the time period in which the receiving state is set is longer. It is possible to suitably suppress the expectation of a ball entering the lower-level winning hole 341.

The lower variable winning device 65 is opened by making the path length of the intermediate passage portion 323 that connects the right operating ball entering portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 shorter than the path length related to the first specific area SE1. If the game ball that reaches the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 can pass through the right-side actuating ball entry section 63 under the situation where the ball enters the right-side actuating ball entry section 63, it will be easier to give the impression to the player that the ball can immediately enter the first ball entry section, This can contribute to increasing attention to the behavior of the game ball that has reached the shutter 331 of the ball entry section 63 and the right-side operating ball entry section 63.

Since most of the game balls that have flowed into the ball entry unit 70 can enter either the right operating port 63a or the lower large winning hole 341, the combination of the right operating port 63a and the lower large winning hole 341 allows one large ball to enter. It can be made to look like the section is being constructed. It is advantageous in improving the player's sense of satisfaction to make it appear as if the opportunity for the game ball to enter the game ball is ensured by the large ball entry section. Here, by making the passage length of the intermediate passage part 323 shorter than the passage length of the passage part (specific areas SE1, SE2) constituted by each shutter, both ball entry parts (the right operating port 63a and the lower large The sense of unity of the prize opening 341) can be strengthened. This can strengthen the above impression.

In this type of large ball entry section, when switching the main ball entry destination between the right operating port 63a/lower large winning hole 341 depending on the situation, the situation is such that the ball entering the lower large winning hole 341 should not occur. When a ball enters the lower prize opening 341, the possibility that the game hall will be disadvantaged increases. If such circumstances are taken into consideration, a communication passage (intermediate passage section 323) is provided between the lower large winning opening 341 and the right operating opening 63a to delay the movement of the game ball toward the lower large winning opening 341. There is technical significance in culling or thinning out. If the intermediate passage section 323 is lengthened to a certain extent, these functions can be optimally exhibited, but on the other hand, the sense of unity between both ball entry sections (the right operating port 63a and the lower large winning port 341) is reduced, making it difficult to There are concerns that the impression that this is a large-volume club will be diminished. In this respect, as shown in the present embodiment, the shutters of both ball entry parts (the right operating port 63a and the lower large winning port 341) are each inclined downwardly to the left, and the intermediate passage part 323 is in a direction that intersects with the direction of inclination. By vertically offsetting the positions of the ball entry portions (the right operating port 63a and the lower large winning port 341), the path length of the intermediate passage portion 323 is increased while both ball entry portions (the right operating port 63a and the lower large winning port 341) are offset vertically. It is possible to reduce the sense of unity between the opening 63a and the lower prize opening 341).

The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passage provided in the middle of the intermediate passage portion 323 are discharged from the gaming area PE as they are, and are prevented from reaching the lower prize opening 341. In this way, by configuring a part of the game balls that have passed through the right-side operating ball entry section 63 to be discharged from the gaming area PE without flowing into the lower prize opening 341, the game balls that have flowed into the intermediate passage section 323 can be removed. Compared to the structure in which the ball heads toward the out port 68, the impression that this is a large ball entry section as described in 1 above can be strengthened.

In a configuration in which the lower prize opening 341 is given preferential treatment to the player than the right operating opening 63a, it is expected that the game ball will pass through the right operating opening 63a and head toward the lower winning opening 341. It is assumed that the firing operation will be executed and the player's attention will be more likely to be directed to the movement of the game ball from the right operating port 63a to the intermediate passage portion 323. Here, in a configuration in which a deceleration part (protrusions 335a, 336a) is provided in the passage part (first specific area SE1) formed by the shutter 331 to prolong the passage time, the deceleration part is placed on the intermediate passage part 323 side. By arranging the ball so as to be biased toward the side, it is possible to easily follow the movement of the game ball with the eye at a location where the player's attention is likely to be directed. This can contribute to further improving the degree of attention.

In this embodiment, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the first special gaming state, when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, the second normal gaming state is started. A transition is made to a third normal game state which is even more advantageous to the player than the current state. Diversifying the games in this way can suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the level of attention to the games, but it is assumed that the complexity of the games will likely cause confusion for players. There is a concern that this will hinder the ability to achieve the effect of increasing attention. In this regard, in the second normal gaming state, by displaying an image indicating the target gaming state (target image TF) and the distance to the target (counter image CF), the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed, and the game The effect of increasing attention to can be suitably exhibited. In particular, by displaying the target image TF and the counter image CF together and suppressing the target image TF from being displayed alone, the current gaming state can be changed from the target image TF displayed in the second normal gaming state. 3. It is possible to reduce the chance of being misunderstood as being in a normal gaming state.

Regarding the counter image CF indicating the remaining number of games (strokes), the counter value is updated according to the progress of the game, thereby making it clear that the transition to the third normal game state is approaching. On the other hand, the target image TF indicating the third normal gaming state, which is the goal, is also sequentially enlarged as the game progresses, thereby indicating that the transition to the third normal gaming state is approaching. can be suitably strengthened.

While the target image TF is enlarged as the game rounds progress, the basic size of the counter image CF is the same except for the final game round. Therefore, as the game progresses, the area ratio between the target image TF and the counter image CF changes, and the target of interest is displayed in a more emphasized manner. With such a configuration, even if a large amount of information is provided to the player at the same time, it is possible to suitably prevent this from becoming a factor that causes confusion for the player.

When displaying the target image TF and the counter image CF on the display screen 75a, the occupied area on the display screen 75a increases as more information is displayed. Although it is effective to enlarge the display area of information in order to improve the degree of attention to the information, expanding the display area causes the occupied area to further increase. This is assumed to be a factor that compresses the area on the display screen 75a for displaying other information. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the size of the display area of the target image TF indicating the goal is increased to emphasize that the goal is approaching, while the counter image CF indicating the journey is By appealing to update information by temporarily expanding the display area, the occupied area on the display screen 75a is suitably suppressed from becoming excessively large in order to perform the notification function.

In the second normal game state, the counter value is updated as the game progresses. Here, if the configuration is such that the target image TF is enlarged when the counter value reaches a predetermined value, the two pieces of information can be associated with each other. With such a configuration, even when the player is gazing at the counter image CF, it is possible to notify the player of the timing at which he or she should gaze at the target image TF, and the size of the target image TF can be This reduces the chance that changes will be overlooked.

The target image TF is configured so that the display range before expansion is included in the display range after expansion, thereby reducing the amount of movement of the player's line of sight while gazing at the target image TF as it approaches the upper limit. be able to. This is advantageous in reducing the chance of missing a change in the target image TF. If the configuration is configured to reduce the chance of missed images in this way, there is no need to increase the amount of change in the size of the target image TF excessively, and even if an upper limit is set on the size of the target image TF, The number of times the size of the target image TF is changed can be suitably increased.

The target image TF shown in this embodiment is accompanied by a constraint image LF, and the number of patterns constituting the constraint image LF is changed as the target image TF is enlarged. With such a configuration, even if the difference in the display range before and after the target image TF is enlarged is small, it is possible to reduce the chance that the enlarged display will be overlooked. This is preferable in order to diversify the manner in which the display range can be changed.

When changing the display range of the target image TF, it is preferable to secure a certain amount of time for the change in order to promote the change. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the display range is changed at the start of a game round as shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to utilize the fluctuation display time of the symbols of the game round as the time for changing the display range of the target image TF. , a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

During the second normal gaming state, a jackpot result may occur and the challenge to the third normal gaming state may end. Here, if you avoid changing the display range based on a jackpot result etc. even though the display range should have been changed in the game round, this will become a foothold and cause the above-mentioned The end of the challenge will soon be revealed. In this regard, when a configuration is adopted in which the display range of the target image TF is changed at the start of a game round as described above, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed by changing the display range regardless of the determination result.

In the configuration shown in this feature, if a predetermined jackpot result does not occur (for example, a losing result or a special winning result) in the second normal gaming state until the final game in which the upper limit is reached, the transition to the third normal gaming state occurs. It is a condition. Here, if a jackpot result is an opportunity to increase the number of balls in hand, it is assumed that emphasizing and displaying lottery results other than the jackpot result will make the player feel uncomfortable. In other words, there is a concern that due to the diversification of games, the effect of increasing attention to the games will not be achieved effectively. Therefore, in the final game round, the relatively large third display area ME3 does not intentionally display the lottery results, but by displaying the lottery results only in the relatively small first display area, such inconveniences can be avoided. can suppress the occurrence of

In game rounds other than the final game round, symbol combinations corresponding to the lottery results are stopped and displayed in both the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. In this way, in order to use both the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 in the previous game round, it is necessary for the player to understand the relationship between the two variable display areas before the final game round. There is a technical significance in that even if the symbols in the third variable display area ME3 are not displayed, it can be suppressed from becoming a factor that confuses the player.

Furthermore, if the symbols in the third variable display area ME3 are hidden in advance, for example, the location and time at which a still image or video indicating a transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed in the third variable display area ME3. can be suitably secured. In particular, in this embodiment, the symbols in the third variable display area ME3 are hidden at the start of the final game round, thereby avoiding variable display of these symbols. In this way, by avoiding the symbols in the third variable display area ME3 from suddenly disappearing during variable display, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the symbols are hidden.

Note that if the symbols in the third variable display area ME3 are hidden as shown in the present embodiment, for example, the symbols in the third variable display area ME3 may remain variable or may be stopped in the previous game round. This prevents the displayed pattern from remaining as it is. This is preferable in order to prevent the player from being confused due to discrepancies in the display of the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3.

Incidentally, in the process from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, symbol combinations that do not correspond to the jackpot result are repeatedly stopped and displayed. If such a display is excessively noticeable, it is bad for players who are playing the game in hopes of winning a jackpot. In this regard, in the present embodiment, by enlarging the target image TF, the area ratio with the third variable display area ME3 changes, and it is possible to encourage the player's attention to turn to the target image TF. This is preferable in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned disadvantages. Furthermore, instead of hiding the symbols in the third variable display area ME3, using the target image TF to suggest a transition to the third normal gaming state compensates for the lack of information caused by the symbols being hidden. The above is also preferred.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 31(b2), the variable display time table that is referred to when a winning result or a special winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state is changed to the second normal gaming state. The same is true for all game rounds in the game state. In this variable display time table, the variable display time is set to be shorter than that in the first normal gaming state in order to facilitate the game progress in the second normal gaming state. Specifically, when the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "0", the variable display time is "13 seconds", and when the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "1", the variable display time is "13 seconds". When the display time is "8 sec" and the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "2", the variable display time is "4 sec", and when the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "3" or more It is specified that the variable display time is "1 sec".

This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration related to setting the variable display time of the picture in the right operating port display section DR. Specifically, as the variable display time table referred to in the second normal gaming state, the first variable display time is referenced until the number of game runs executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number. table, and a second variable display time table that is referred to when the reference number of times is reached, and when comparing the first variable display time table and the second variable display time table, the latter is better than the former. The difference is that a difference is provided so that the variable display time becomes longer.

Specifically, in the first variable display time table, when the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "0", the variable display time is "13 sec", and the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "1". ”, the variable display time is “8 seconds”, and when the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is “2”, the variable display time is “4 seconds”, and the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is “2”, the variable display time is “4 seconds”, and the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is In the case of "3" or more, the variable display time is specified to be "1 sec". On the other hand, in the second variable display time table, when the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "0", the variable display time is "13 sec", and the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "13 seconds". When the number is "1", the variable display time is "8 sec", and when the number of pending information related to the right operating port 63a is "2", the variable display time is "5 sec", and the pending information related to the right operating port 63a is When the number is "3" or more, the variable display time is specified to be "5 seconds".

Further, the configuration related to the setting of the fixed display time of the picture in the right operating port display section DR is also different from the first embodiment. Specifically, a first confirmed display time is set until the number of game runs executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times, and a second confirmed display time is set when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. are different. Specifically, the first confirmed display time is "1 sec" as in the first embodiment, whereas the second confirmed display time is a longer time (more specifically, "2 sec"). ).

That is, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the inciting effect using the target image TF in the final game round and the notification time indicating the transition to the third normal game state can be made longer than in the first embodiment. It is possible. In a configuration where the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state provides a chance to greatly increase the number of balls held, it is possible to buy time to notify the player of the transition to the third normal gaming state. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game and improving player satisfaction.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, measures are taken to increase the execution time of the notification indicating the transition to the third normal gaming state, but the specific configuration is different from that in the second embodiment. It is different from the form of The invention will be described below with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 60. In addition, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the variable display time table that is referred to when a winning result or a special winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state is It is configured to be the same for all game rounds in the game state.

At timing tb1 when the final game round in the second normal game state is started, the display level of the target image TF is LV6, and the number of counter images CF is "0". At timing tb2 when the symbol at the right operating port 63a is definitively displayed in the final game round, the target image TF is displayed at the maximum in the center of the display screen 75a, and the constraint image LF and counter image CF are hidden. As a result, notification of transition to the third normal gaming state is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 60, the last game round corresponds to the special winning result. Therefore, at the timing tb3 when the confirmation display is completed, the game shifts to the second special game state. The transition notification on the display screen 75a will continue even during the second special game state. Note that during this transition notification, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2 on the display screen 75a are maintained in a stopped state.

At timing tb4 when the second special game state ends and shifts to the third normal game state, variable display of the symbols on the right operating port display section DR is started. That is, the first game round in the third normal game state is started. At this timing, although the variable display of the symbols in the second variable display area ME2 is started, the target image TF remains displayed on the display screen 75a, and the symbol display in the third variable display area ME3 is avoided. .

The first game in the third normal gaming state also corresponds to the special winning result, and after the transition to the third normal gaming state, the second special gaming state is immediately entered (timing tb6). The above-mentioned target image TF is maintained until the second special game state ends, and is erased at timing tb7 when the third normal game state is returned. Then, instead of the target image TF, a character image or the like corresponding to the third normal game state is displayed on the display screen 75a. In the third normal game state, the number of prize balls etc. acquired in the third normal game state will be displayed. This display of the number of prize balls includes the number of prize balls acquired while the target image TF is being displayed in the third normal game state.

Note that even if the last game round corresponds to a winning result, the target image TF is displayed until the second game round in the third normal game state is started, that is, the transition to the third normal game state is continued. Announcements will continue.

In addition, if a jackpot result occurs in the first game round in the third normal game state, an image corresponding to the jackpot result will be displayed instead of the target image TF at the timing when the confirmation display of the first game round starts. etc. will be replaced.

In this way, by continuing the transition notification started in the second normal gaming state over at least the first game round in the third normal gaming state, the notification time can be reduced while suppressing delays in game progress. This can be suitably secured.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the value displayed in the remaining number of times display area CE (hereinafter referred to as a counter value) is updated by subtracting "1" each time a game is started, and the counter value is The system is configured to shift to the third normal gaming state after the number becomes "0", that is, to notify the remaining number of games until the transition to the third normal gaming state. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration related to updating the counter value displayed in the remaining count display area CE. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, a configuration related to notification of the remaining number of games in this embodiment will be described.

In this embodiment, a plurality of subtraction levels are provided that differ in the degree of subtraction of the value in the remaining count display area CE. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61(a), subtraction level 1 (LV1) subtracts "1" from the counter value in the remaining number of times display area CE for each game play, and the counter value in the remaining number of times display area CE is subtracted by "1" for each game play. Subtraction level 2 (LV2) that subtracts the value by 2 per game, subtraction level 3 (LV3) that subtracts the counter value of the remaining number of times display area CE by 3 per game, and the counter of the remaining number of times display area CE. There are four subtraction levels 4 (LV4) for subtracting the value by "4" per game, and the MPU 652 of the notification/performance control device 143 refers to the set subtraction level and displays the remaining number of times display area CE. The counter value is decremented.

When the subtraction level is LV1, similarly to the first embodiment, the timing at which the variable display of symbols starts in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3, that is, the right operating port 63a At the timing when the game round starts, the counter value is decremented by "1" (see FIG. 61(b)). On the other hand, when the subtraction level is LV2 to LV4, the timing when the variable display of symbols is started in the second variable display area ME2 or the third variable display area ME3, that is, the game cycle related to the right operating port 63a. At the timing when starts, the counter value is subtracted multiple times according to the subtraction level. For example, when the subtraction level is LV2, the timing when the variable display of symbols starts in the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3, that is, the timing when the game round related to the right operating port 63a starts. Then, the counter value is decremented by "2" (see FIG. 61(b)).

Here, in the present embodiment, the initial value of the counter value (hereinafter referred to as the initial display number) when the counter image CF is displayed upon transition to the second normal gaming state is set by the main controller 162. There are cases in which the notification/performance control device 143 determines the number of times to match the standard number of times determined, and cases in which the notification/performance control device 143 determines the number of times to be greater than the standard number of times. Then, in the notification/performance control device 143, at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, a subtraction pattern of the counter value, that is, a switching pattern of the subtraction level is determined in conjunction with the determination of the initial number of times of display. The relationship between the reference number of times, the initial number of times of display, and the subtraction pattern will be described below with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 62.

For example, when the reference number of times is "100", the initial display number is "100", and in this case, the subtraction pattern for all the 1st to 100th game times is LV1. In other words, the counter value is decremented by "1" every time the game is played. This subtraction pattern is the same as in the first embodiment.

When the reference number of times is "70", the initial number of times of display is "100" or "70". When the initial number of times of display is "70", that is, when the reference number of times and the number of times of initial display match, the subtraction pattern is such that the subtraction level of all the 1st to 70th game times is LV1. In other words, the counter value is decremented by "1" every time the game is played. On the other hand, when the initial display count is "100", that is, when the initial display count exceeds the standard count, there are multiple subtraction patterns, and which subtraction pattern to use is determined by lottery. Ru. Each of these subtraction patterns is configured such that when the number of games started reaches a preset number, the subtraction level is raised and the subtraction speed is increased.

For example, when the standard number of times is "70" and the initial number of times of display is "100", the subtraction pattern set is such that the subtraction level from the 1st to 50th times is LV1, and the subtraction level from the 51st to 65th times is LV2. , a subtraction pattern in which the 66th to 70th subtraction level is LV4, a subtraction pattern in which the 1st to 60th subtraction level is LV1, and the 61st to 70th subtraction level is LV2.

When the reference number of times is "50", the initial display number of times is "100", "70", or "50". When the initial number of times of display is "50", that is, when the reference number of times and the number of times of initial display match, the subtraction pattern is such that the subtraction level of all the 1st to 50th game times is LV1. In other words, the counter value is decremented by "1" every time the game is played. On the other hand, there are multiple subtraction patterns when the initial number of display times is "70" and "100" times, that is, when the initial number of display times exceeds the standard number of times. The decision will be made by lottery. Each of these subtraction patterns is configured such that when the number of games started reaches a preset number, the subtraction level is raised and the subtraction speed is increased.

For example, when the standard number of times is "50" and the initial number of times of display is "70", the subtraction pattern set is such that the subtraction level from the 1st to 30th times is LV1, and the subtraction level from the 31st to 50th times is LV2. A subtraction pattern in which the first to 40th subtraction levels are LV1, and a subtraction pattern in which the 41st to 50th subtraction levels are LV3 are provided.

The subtraction pattern set when the standard number of times is "50" and the initial display number is "100" is LV1 for the 1st to 10th subtraction levels, LV2 and 41 for the 11th to 40th subtraction levels. A subtraction pattern in which the 1st to 50th subtraction level is LV3, 1st to 20th subtraction level is LV1, 21st to 40th subtraction level is LV2, and 41st to 50th subtraction level is LV4. A subtraction pattern is provided in which the first to 30th subtraction levels are LV1, the 31st to 40th subtraction levels are LV2, and the 41st to 50th subtraction levels are LV3.

When the reference number of times is "30", the initial display number of times will be "70", "50", or "30". When the initial number of times of display is "30", that is, when the reference number of times and the initial number of times of display match, the subtraction pattern is such that the subtraction level of all the 1st to 30th game times is LV1. In other words, the counter value is decremented by "1" every time the game is played. On the other hand, in the subtraction patterns when the initial display number is "50" and "70", the subtraction level is raised when the number of games started reaches a preset number, It is configured to increase the subtraction speed.

For example, when the standard number of times is "30" and the initial number of times of display is "50", the subtraction pattern set is such that the subtraction level for the 1st to 10th times is LV1, and the subtraction level for the 11th to 30th times is LV2. A subtraction pattern in which the first to 20th subtraction levels are LV1, and a subtraction pattern in which the 21st to 30th subtraction levels are LV3 are provided.

As for the subtraction pattern set when the standard number of times is "30" and the initial display number is "70" times, the subtraction level for the 1st to 10th times is LV1, and the subtraction level for the 11th to 30th times is LV3. A subtraction pattern is provided.

When the reference number of times is "10", the initial display number is "10", and in this case, the subtraction pattern for all the 1st to 10th game times is LV1. In other words, the counter value is decremented by "1" every time the game is played. This subtraction pattern is the same as in the first embodiment.

In this way, if the subtraction level is changed in the middle of the second normal game state and the subtraction speed is increased, the initial display count will be a large value (for example, 100 or 70 times). Even in such a case, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in expectations for the transition to the third normal gaming state.

Furthermore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the speed of progress of the game in the second normal game state is changing. This is preferable in order to suppress monotony of the game in the second normal game state.

According to the configuration detailed above, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the first special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number (the "upper limit"). (equivalent), the game shifts to a third normal gaming state which is even more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. In the second normal game state, a counter value is displayed in the remaining number of game display area CE of the display screen 75a as numerical information correlated with the number of remaining game times. The player can predict the remaining time until the transition to the third normal gaming state by looking at the counter value displayed on the display screen 75a. Here, LV1 to LV4 are provided as subtraction levels (corresponding to "update state") of the counter value, and the speed of subtraction of the counter value can be changed by switching these subtraction levels. Such a switching function causes a change in the rhythm of the game progress until the transition to the third normal game state, and it is possible to suitably suppress monotony of the game.

By setting the initial value (initial display number) of the counter image CF to a value greater than the product of the reference number and the one-time update value at the minimum subtraction level (LV1), and estimating the number to be greater than the reference number, the subtraction level can be adjusted. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of freedom in setting.

In a configuration in which the second normal game state ends when the reference number of times is reached, the opportunity to switch the subtraction level depends on the reference number of times. Therefore, by predetermining the game times in which the subtraction level is to be switched according to the reference number of times as shown in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to update the count value appropriately.

As shown in this embodiment, if the configuration is such that the number of values subtracted at one time increases by switching the subtraction level, it is possible to increase the updating speed of the counter value toward the third normal gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention of the player to the transition to the third normal gaming state. Note that in this embodiment, when compared using the same standard number of times, the number of updates (number of subtractions) is the same, and by providing a difference in the update width in one update, the sharpness of updating the count value is enhanced. can.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, the rhythm of the game in the second normal game state is changed by having a configuration in which the counter value of the counter image CF can be subtracted multiple times in one game. Here, the remaining count display area CE in which the counter image CF is displayed is larger than the second variable display area ME2 and smaller than the third variable display area ME3. In the present embodiment, by strengthening the cooperation between symbol display and counter value updating in the third variable display area ME3, which has relatively high visibility, it is possible to suppress missed updates of the counter value. This is one of its characteristics. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, the characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the fourth embodiment. Note that in this embodiment, LV1 to LV2 are set as subtraction levels, and other subtraction levels are omitted.

When the subtraction level is LV1, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 63, the counter value is subtracted by "1" for each game. In this case, at the timing tc1 when the variable display of symbols starts in the right operating opening display section DR, the variable display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME and the variable display of the sub-symbol in the third variable display area ME3 occur. The display starts, and in conjunction with this, the counter value of the counter image CF is decremented by "1". Then, at the timing tc2 when the variable display of the symbol is stopped (determined display is started) in the right operating port display section DR, the variable display of the main symbol and the third variable display in the second variable display area ME. The variable display of the sub-symbols in area ME3 ends.

On the other hand, when the subtraction level is LV2, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 64, the manner of variable display of symbols is different between the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3. Specifically, at the timing td1 when the variable display of the symbol starts in the right operating mouth display section DR, the variable display of the main symbol in the second variable display area ME and the sub symbol in the third variable display area ME3 are performed. A variable display of ``1'' is started, and in accordance with this, the counter value of the counter image CF is subtracted by 1. In this respect, it is similar to the case where the subtraction level is LV1.

At the timing td2 when the fluctuating display of the symbols in the right operating opening display section DR and the fluctuating display of the symbols in the second fluctuating display area ME2 are continued, the symbol combination corresponding to the miss result is displayed in the third fluctuating display area ME3. Stop display. That is, the symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the third variable display area ME3. Then, at the timing td3 when the same length of time as the final display time has elapsed from the timing td2, the variable display of the symbols in the third variable display area ME3 is restarted. In accordance with the restart of this variable display, the counter value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1".

At the timing td4 when the symbols are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the right operating opening display section DR, the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning result is stopped and displayed in the second variable display area ME2, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning result is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area. In ME3, the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning result is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, when a plurality of counter values are subtracted in one game, the timing of subtraction is dispersed during one game. In other words, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of counter values are subtracted at the start timing of a game round, whereas in this embodiment, the counter value is subtracted at the start timing of a game round, and in the middle of a game round. The counter value is decremented by 1 at certain timings. By temporarily stopping the fluctuating display of the symbols in the third fluctuating display area ME3 during a game round, and restarting the fluctuating display of the symbols in the third fluctuating display area ME3 at the subtraction timing during the game round, The chances of missing a subtraction can be reduced. In this way, the subtraction rhythm can be changed by increasing the number of subtractions instead of increasing the number to be subtracted at one time.

Furthermore, if the update of the count value is linked to the symbol display (fluctuating→stopping), the display area of the counter image CF can be made smaller to ensure coexistence with other information on the display screen 75a while ensuring that the update is not overlooked. This can reduce the chances of being exposed. In particular, since the third variable display area ME3 located at the center of the display screen 75a is a place where the player's attention tends to be directed, the above effect can be achieved by linking the third variable display area ME3 with the image of the third variable display area ME3. It can be exhibited even more favorably.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments, or it is also possible to apply some or all of them in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the number of balls held decreases (slightly decreases) as the game progresses. It is also possible to change this so that the number of balls held increases as the game progresses even in the second normal game state. However, in order to create a difference in advantage between the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state so that the latter is more advantageous, for example, the speed at which the number of balls in possession in the second normal gaming state increases is higher than the third normal gaming state. It is preferable that the speed of increase in the number of balls held is suppressed to be lower than that in the normal gaming state.

(2) In each of the embodiments described above, if the time saving ends without a jackpot result despite transitioning to the high probability mode, the third normal mode is further advantageous to the player, including the meaning of relief. It is configured to transition to a gaming state. In view of such a rescue function, it is sufficient that the third normal game state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal game state, for example, compared to the second normal game state, the player has a lower ball possession. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the rate of decrease in is slow. In addition, as shown in the above-mentioned modification (1), when using the configuration in which the number of balls in possession increases also in the second normal game state, the speed at which the number of balls in possession in the third normal game state increases is higher than that in the second normal game state. It may be configured to be lower than the state.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, for example, in the case of a 16R probability variable jackpot result B, the high probability mode and low frequency support mode are supported without going through the second normal gaming state that is compatible with the high probability mode and high frequency support mode. Although the configuration is such that the transition to the third normal gaming state is made, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is necessary to go through the second normal gaming state in order to transition to the third normal gaming state, regardless of the jackpot result.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the number of time reductions that function as a hurdle for transitioning to the third normal gaming state, that is, the number of games during which the support mode is maintained in the high-frequency support mode, is varied depending on the type of jackpot result. However, it is also possible to make the number of time reductions constant regardless of the type of jackpot result. For example, it is preferable to unify the number of games maintained in the high-frequency support mode to be N times, regardless of whether the result is a 2R probability variable jackpot result, a 6R probability variation jackpot result, or a 16R probability variation jackpot result. In addition, when making such a change, it is preferable to unify the number of games maintained in the high-frequency support mode when transitioning to the fourth normal gaming state after the 2R normal jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result.

(5) In each of the embodiments described above, if a jackpot result is obtained during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a transition can be made to the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. In other words, the third normal game state is configured to be terminated in response to a jackpot result. In addition to or in place of this, the game may be configured to shift to the low probability mode when the number of games played after shifting to the high probability mode reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, M times). In this case, by increasing the number of games in which the high probability mode is maintained than the number of games (time saving number) in which the high frequency support mode is maintained, the second normal game state is passed through to the third normal game state with a limited number of times. It is possible to realize a configuration that moves to

(6) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the range of the number of time saving times that is set when a winning result to the lower operating port 62a results in a variable probability jackpot result and the winning result to the right operating port 63a is determined based on the variable probability jackpot result. The range of the number of time reductions set in the case of ``0'' to ``100'' is configured, and the distribution of the number of time reductions is differentiated so that the latter is biased toward the lower side than the former. This ensures the superiority of the right operating port 63a over the lower operating port 62a. The expectation is that when a variable probability jackpot result occurs in the second special gaming state and the transition to the second special gaming state occurs again, the hurdle to transition to the third normal gaming state will be lower than before the probability variable jackpot result occurs, that is, the third In order to increase the expectation that the number of games required to transition to the normal gaming state will be reduced, the maximum value of the number of time-savings set in the case of a guaranteed variable jackpot result based on winning to the right operating port 63a should be lowered. It may be configured to be smaller than the maximum value of the number of time saving times that is set when a probability-variable jackpot result is achieved based on the win in the opening 62a. It should be noted that, in the case where a variable probability jackpot result is obtained based on the winning to the right operating port 63a, the time saving number may be set to "0", that is, the transition to the third normal gaming state may be determined.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the time saving number is not shortened in some cases when a probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the second normal gaming state, but the time reduction count is not reduced in some cases, but a probability variable jackpot result is obtained in the second normal gaming state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of time reductions is shortened in all cases. For example, the first time saving number (for example, 50 times) that is set when a variable probability jackpot result is obtained based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a becomes a variable probability jackpot result based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a. The number of time reductions may be set to be greater than the second number of time reductions (for example, 30 times) set in the case where the number of times is reduced. In addition, in order to make it appear as if the number of time reductions remaining at the time when the probability variable jackpot result is achieved in the second normal gaming state is shortened when returning to the second normal gaming state, it is based on the ball entering the right operating port 63a. It is also possible to set the number of times of time saving set to "0" times when the result is a probability-variable jackpot.

(7) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, by configuring the third normal gaming state so that the time period for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol on the right operating opening display section DR is shorter than that in the second normal gaming state, 3. Although the present invention aims to facilitate the game progress in the normal game state, the present invention is not limited to this. The third normal gaming state may be configured to have a longer period of time to display the symbols on the right operating port display section DR than the second normal gaming state, or the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state may be It is also possible to configure the right operating port display section DR to have the same length of time for displaying the changing patterns.

(8) The number of time reductions set when a 2R normal jackpot result is obtained in the second normal game state and the number of time reductions set when a 2R probability variable jackpot result is obtained are both "50". In this case, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 and the speaker section 29 will display the gaming state in both cases of returning to the second normal gaming state after the special gaming state and transitioning (demotion) to the fourth normal gaming state. It may be configured such that it is difficult or impossible for the player to distinguish whether the player is in the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state by using similar effects that suggest the above. If the gaming state is hidden in this way, when the number of time reductions reaches "0", will it move (promote) to the third normal gaming state, which is even more advantageous than the second normal gaming state, or will it move to the third normal gaming state that is even more advantageous than the second normal gaming state? A branch will occur as to whether to move (demotion) to the first normal gaming state, which is more disadvantageous than the normal gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to suitably increase the feeling of tension when the number of time reductions set at the time of transition to the gaming state is completed.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery results based on winnings in the through gate 66 are displayed on the through gate display section DS of the main display unit 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. It is also possible to display the results of the lottery based on winnings in the through gate 66 on another display section such as the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the upper variable prize winning device 64 and the through gate 66 are disposed on the right route upstream of the right operating ball entry section 63, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to arrange the upper variable winning device 64 and the through gate 66 on the right route downstream of the right operating ball entry section 63.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the time period for final display of the picture on the display section DL for the lower operating port is configured to be shorter than the time for the final display of the picture on the display section DR for the right operating port. It is not limited. For example, the final display time of the picture on the display section DR for the right operating port may be configured to be shorter than the final display time of the picture on the display section DL for the right operating port. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the fixed display times of the patterns on the actuating port display section DL are made the same.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the fixed display time of the symbols on the lower operating port display section DL and the right operating port display section DR is not changed in any normal gaming state, but in the normal gaming state. The final display time of the lower operating port display section DL and the right operating port display section DR may be changed depending on the type. For example, the final display time may be configured to become shorter in the order of the first normal game state, second normal game state, and third normal game state.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the lower variable prize winning device 65 is opened in the second special game state, and the right side operating input is placed on the flow path (right route) toward the lower variable prize winning device 65. Although the ball portion 63 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to arrange a structure corresponding to the lower variable prize winning device 65 on the flow path toward the right side operating ball entry section 63.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the protrusions 335a and 336a are provided as deceleration means for decelerating the game balls rolling on the shutter 331 of the right-side operating ball entry section 63; The specific configuration for increasing the time required for this process is arbitrary. For example, the upper limit of the shutter 331 may be provided with unevenness to cause the flow path to meander up and down.

In addition, although the protrusions 335a and 336a are biased toward the downstream portion (the intermediate passage portion 323 side) of the upstream passage portion 322, the protrusion portions 335a and 336a are disposed in the upstream portion and the midstream portion of the upstream passage portion 322. It is also possible to place it in

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the right-side operating ball entry section 63 and the lower variable winning device 65 are arranged vertically shifted and the ball path in the ball entry unit 70 is cranked up and down. It is also possible to arrange the right-side operation ball entry part 63 and the lower variable prize-winning device 65 in a line.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the intermediate passage section 323 as a "communication passage section" is branched at an intermediate position, so that a part of the game ball passing through the intermediate passage section 323 is connected to the lower variable winning device 65. Although the configuration is such that the player is discharged from the game area PE without being guided by the player, it is not necessarily necessary to form the above-mentioned branch in the intermediate passage section 323.

Furthermore, although the game balls flowing out from the intermediate position of the ball path through the intermediate passage section 323 are discharged from the gaming area PE without passing through the out port 68, these game balls are guided to the out port 68. Good as a structure.

(16) Although the right-side operating ball entry portion 63 shown in the above embodiment is configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by sliding the shutter 331 in the front-rear direction, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shutter may be configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by sliding in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. Note that the shutter 331 does not necessarily need to be of a sliding type, and may be of a rotating type.

Similarly, although the shutter 345 of the lower variable prize winning device 65 is configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by sliding in the front-rear direction, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shutter may be configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by sliding in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. Note that the shutter 345 does not necessarily need to be of a sliding type, and may be of a rotating type.

Further, although the upper variable winning device 64 shown in each of the above embodiments has a configuration in which the shutter 315 is rotated parallel to the front surface of the game board 60 to switch between the open state and the closed state, the present invention is not limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the shutter may be configured to switch between the open state and the closed state by rotating in a direction intersecting the front surface of the game board. Note that the shutter 315 does not necessarily need to be of a rotating type, and may be of a sliding type.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter 331 of the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is the interval time during which the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state in the high-frequency support mode. , and shorter than the interval time during which the shutter 331 is maintained in the closed state in the low-frequency support mode, but the predetermined time may be arbitrarily changed.

(18) In each of the above embodiments, the transition to the high probability mode is determined by the ball entering the advantageous ball entering section 314 provided in the upper variable winning device 64, but the advantageous ball entering section 314 is It is also possible to omit this and have a configuration in which the transition to the high probability mode is determined when a probability-variable jackpot result is obtained.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the lottery based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a does not result in a special winning result, but this is changed, and the lottery based on the ball entering the lower operating port 62a It is also possible to have a configuration that results in a special winning result.

(20) In the first embodiment, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is configured to display the remaining time reduction number, that is, the remaining number of games until the transition to the third normal game state. The remaining number of times displayed on the display screen 75a does not necessarily have to match the remaining number of time reductions, and may indicate the remaining number of time reductions.

In this case, for example, it may be difficult to identify from the display which one of "100 times," "70 times," "50 times," "30 times," or "10 times" is set as the number of time saving times. This can improve the interest of the game. When such a display is performed, for example, when the number of games played reaches "10 times," "30 times," "50 times," or "70 times," the game shifts to the third normal game state. By executing a display effect indicating that there is a possibility, it is possible to suppress monotony of the game during the second normal game state.

In addition, in the second normal game state where the number of time savings is "50 times", for example, if "100 times" is displayed as the display corresponding to the number of time savings, the actual number of time savings will be "10 times", "30 times", " There remains a possibility that it will be ``50 times'', ``70 times'', or ``100 times''. In this case, the corresponding display is configured such that, for example, after the number of played games reaches a specific number, the number of subtracted multiple times in one game is increased, and when the time is shortened, "0 times" is displayed as the corresponding display. It is also possible.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, a difference is provided in the variable display time when the number of reservations is "3" or more between the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state, but the invention is not limited to this. do not have. Even if the number of reservations is "3" or more, it is possible to make the variable display time the same.

(22) In the case of a jackpot result in the second normal gaming state, if the newly set number of time savers is less than the remaining number of time savers, this will be notified to the player. It is preferable to adopt a configuration that clearly indicates that the third normal game state is approaching.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the first normal game state to the third normal game state are differentiated by the combination of the support mode and the lottery mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For each normal gaming state, the specific structure is arbitrary as long as a difference is ensured that is advantageous to the player in the order of first normal gaming state < second normal gaming state < third normal gaming state. . For example, a medium probability mode is provided as the lottery mode, which has a higher probability of winning than the low probability mode, and a lower probability of winning than the high probability mode, and the first normal game state is the low probability mode, and the second normal game state is the low probability mode. Differentiation may be achieved such that the state corresponds to the medium probability mode and the third normal game state corresponds to the high probability mode. Even in this case, the configuration is such that the transition to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode is made when the standard number of games has passed without a jackpot result despite the transition to the medium probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress a decline in the player's desire to play. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it is optional whether each normal gaming state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode or the low-frequency support mode, as long as the above-mentioned advantageous and disadvantageous relationship can be ensured. .

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the time period for finalizing the display of the picture on the display section DL for the lower operating port is shorter than the time for displaying the final image on the display section DR for the right operating port, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. It is also possible to make the final display time of the pattern on the lower operating port display section DL longer than the final display time of the pattern on the right operating port display section DR. Further, it is also possible to make the final display time of the pattern on the lower operating port display section DL the same length as the final display time of the pattern on the right operating port display section DR.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the fixed display time of the symbol on the lower operation opening display section DL is defined to be the same in the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, a difference may be provided such that the fixed display time in the first normal gaming state < the fixed display time in the second and fourth normal gaming states < the fixed display time in the third normal gaming state.

In addition, it is not necessarily necessary to unify the fixed display time of the symbol on the display section DR for the right operating port between the first normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state. For example, the fixed display time in the first normal gaming state < Determined display time in the 2nd normal gaming state and the 4th normal gaming state <
A difference may be provided so that the final display time in the third normal game state is determined.

Note that the above-mentioned difference may be provided for both the final display time for the lower operating port display section DL and the final display time for the right operating port display section DR, or the above-mentioned difference may be provided for only one of them.

(26) In each of the above embodiments, the lower operating port 62a is used during the second normal gaming state in consideration of the fluctuating display time and fixed display time of the symbols in the lower operating port display section DL and the right operating port display section DR. Although the minimum number of time reductions in the second normal game state is defined so that all the pending information related to the above is consumed, the present invention is not limited to this. If all the game times related to the lower operating port 62a (not including additional ones) can be played during one game session related to the right operating port 63a, the minimum time saving number is equal to the number of reservations related to the lower operating port 62a. It is also possible to set the number to be one more than the upper limit of .

(27) In each of the above embodiments, the time saving number is subtracted regardless of whether the game time related to the lower operation port 62a or the game time related to the right operation port 63a is executed in the second normal game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to configure such a configuration that the time saving number is subtracted only when the game round related to the right operating port 63a is executed.

(28) Regarding FIG. 31 in each of the above embodiments, the variable display time in the case of a special winning result or a losing result (more specifically, a complete winning result that does not support reach display) is shown, but for example, in the second normal game state ~In the fourth normal game state, it is also possible to unify the variable display time in the case of a jackpot result.

(29) In each of the above embodiments, the game round associated with the right operating opening display section DR is a special winning result, and the gaming round associated with the lower operating opening display section DL is a losing result, and each When the variable display of the pattern on the display section is performed in parallel, the variable display of the pattern on the display section DL for the lower operating port is forced at the timing when the final display of the pattern on the display section DR for the right operating port is executed. will be terminated. In such a configuration, it is not necessarily necessary to make the variable display time of the lower operating port display section DL shorter than the variable display time of the right operating port display section DR in the second normal gaming state. At least, it is configured such that all the pending information related to the lower operation opening display section DL is digested by the time the number of time reductions set in the second normal gaming state is reached and the transition to the third normal gaming state is made. For example, the variable display time of the lower operating port display section DL may be made longer than the variable display time of the right operating port display section DR, or the variable display time of the right operating port display section DR may be set to the same length. Good too.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, when the detection sensor 391d attached to the right-side operating ball entry section 63 is in its valid period, the main controller 162 reads the information from the detection sensor 391d, and during the valid period. Although the main control device 162 is configured not to read the information when the information is not read, the present invention is not limited to this. The sensor is configured to read regardless of whether it is during the valid period, and if it is during the valid period, a reward is given based on the detection of a ball entering the ball, but if it is not during the valid period, a reward is given. A configuration may also be adopted in which no benefit is given even when a ball entering the ball is detected.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, in the second normal game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode, the sum of the variable display time and fixed display time of the symbol on the through gate display section DS is the effective time of the detection sensor 391. Although the configuration is configured to match the overage period, it is also possible to set the sum of the variable display time and fixed display time of the picture on the through gate display section DS to be longer than the overage period of the detection sensor 391. It is.

(32) In each of the above embodiments, the upper variable winning device 64, which is opened in the first special game state, is configured to reduce the number of balls entering the right operating port 63a during the first special game state. In order to strengthen such a function, the through gate 66 may also be arranged downstream of the upper variable winning device 64.

(33) In each of the above embodiments, when transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the hold information related to the lower operation port 62a that was stored at the beginning of the transition to the second normal gaming state is Although the configuration is such that all of the information has been digested, the present invention is not limited to this. The specific configuration is arbitrary as long as the pending information related to the lower operating port 62a can be reduced before transition to the third special gaming state.

(34) In each of the above embodiments, the game round related to the lower operation port 62a and the game time related to the right operation port 63a are made to proceed at the same time, but it is not necessarily necessary to proceed with each game session at the same time. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game times to be executed in the order of acquisition of the reservation information are switched between the game times related to the lower operating port 62a and the game times related to the right operating port 63a. In addition, the game times related to the right operating port 63a are executed in such a way that the game times related to the right operating port 63a are executed with priority over the game times related to the lower operating port 62a. It may be configured to switch between times.

(35) In each of the above embodiments, the second variable display area ME2 and the third variable display area ME3 are provided on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 as display areas for symbols corresponding to the right operating port display section DR. However, a display device provided with a display area corresponding to the second variable display area ME2 and a display device provided with a display area corresponding to the third variable display area ME3 may be provided separately.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the variable display area to be linked with the third variable display area ME3 is changed depending on the situation from the first variable display area ME1 (lower operation opening display part DL) to the second variable display area ME2. (The display section DR for the right operating port) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A variable display area linked to the first variable display area ME1 (lower operating port display part DL) and a variable display area linked to the second variable display area ME2 (right operating port display part DR) may be provided. good.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the counter image CF is displayed as a countdown as the game progresses, but this is changed to a configuration that displays the value of the counter image CF as a count-up as the game progresses. It is also possible to do this. In the case of such a configuration, for example, the value of the counter image CF at which the transition to the third normal gaming state should be determined is determined at the time when the display of the counter image CF is started and when the transition to the second normal gaming state is made. , it is preferable to teach during the second normal game state.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that by setting the value of the counter image CF to "0" in the second normal gaming state, it is taught that the second normal gaming state ends. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is taught that the second normal gaming state ends by setting the value of the counter image CF to a predetermined value other than "0". For example, the reference number of times set by the main control device 162 is "100" times, the initial display number of times on the counter image CF is "100" times, and the value of the counter image CF is subtracted by "1" for each game play. In the case where the reference number of times set by the main control device 162 is "70" times, the initial display number of times in the counter image CF is "100" times, and the value of the counter image CF is "1" for each game play. In the former case, the value of the counter image CF is "0" when the second normal gaming state ends, and in the latter case, the value of the counter image CF when the second normal gaming state ends. It is also possible to configure the value to be "30". In such a configuration, even if the initial number of times of display is "100", it may shift to the third normal gaming state before reaching "0" times ("30" times), so it will not take until the standard number of times is exhausted. In the case where the journey is long, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the desire to play caused by this.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the counter image CF is updated (subtracted) at the timing when a game round is started, but the value is not limited to this, but it is determined at the game round. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value of the counter image CF is updated (subtracted) at the timing of transition to display.

(39) In each of the above embodiments, the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is configured to notify the remaining number of games until the transition to the third normal game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the speaker section 29 may be configured to output a sound indicating the remaining number of games (for example, "30 remaining games", etc.), or the lamp section consisting of a plurality of light emitters may be configured to output a sound indicating the number of games remaining. It may also be configured to display the remaining number of games.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, when transitioning from the first special game state to the second special game state, display of the target image TF and counter image CF is started during the first special game state (during ending). However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display of the target image TF and the counter image CF is started during the second normal gaming state (for example, at the transition timing or the timing immediately after the transition).

(41) In each of the above embodiments, after the transition to the second normal gaming state, the target image TF and the restraint image LF are continuously displayed until at least the transition to another normal gaming state is confirmed. However, this does not negate the configuration in which the target image TF and the constraint image LF are hidden during the second normal game state. For example, when performing a display effect in which there is a possibility that the second normal game state will end during a part of the second normal game state, the target image TF and restraint image LF are hidden during the display effect. It may also be a configuration.

(42) In each of the above embodiments, when transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the target image TF corresponding to the third normal gaming state is continued to be displayed, and the second normal gaming state Although the target image TF is shared between the state and the third normal game state, the present invention is not limited to this. An image indicating that the third normal gaming state is in the third normal gaming state may be provided separately.

(43) In each of the above embodiments, the target image TF (corresponding to "second information") and the counter image CF (corresponding to "first information") are displayed on the display screen 75a, but these It is also possible to configure the information to be displayed on separate display devices.

(44) In each of the above embodiments, when the main controller 162 performs a lottery based on the reservation information, the operating port display parts DL and DR in the main display part D are displayed at the same time as the lottery (in detail, immediately after the lottery). Although the configuration is such that the variable display of the symbols starts in the variable display areas ME1 to ME3 on the display screen 75a, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, prior to the lottery, the variable display of the symbols on the actuating mouth display sections DL and DR and the variable display of the symbols in the variable display areas ME1 to ME3 on the display screen 75a are started.

(45) In each of the above embodiments, the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state are configured so that it is difficult to identify which gaming state they are based on the display content on the display screen 75a. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state so that they can be easily identified. For example, in the second normal gaming state, a target image indicating the third normal gaming state is displayed as the target image on the display screen 75a, and in the fourth normal gaming state, the target image indicating the first normal gaming state is displayed as the target image on the display screen 75a. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is displayed.

In addition, a target image indicating the first normal gaming state is displayed in the second normal gaming state, and the target image is displayed in the third normal gaming state during the second normal gaming state or during the final game of the second normal gaming state. It may be configured to switch to a target image indicating the state.

(46) If the hold information related to the lower actuating port 62a is stored in the second normal gaming state and the hold information related to the right actuating port 63a is not stored, the game round related to the lower actuating port 62a is The variable display of symbols in the third variable display area ME3 may be started at the same time as the start. That is, if only the hold information related to the lower operating port 62a exists, it is also possible to make the lower operating port 62a the cooperation target of the third variable display area ME3. In such a configuration, the game cycle related to the right operating port 63a does not start while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in the third variable display area ME3, and the symbols are displayed in the lower operating port display section DL. is displayed in a stopped state, the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result of the game round related to the lower operation opening 62a is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area ME3, and the variable display of the symbols is stopped in the third variable display area ME3. If the game round related to the right operating port 63a starts while the game is being played, the link target is switched to the right operating port 63a side while maintaining the fluctuating display of symbols (without stopping display), and the right It is also possible to have a configuration in which, when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the actuating mouth display section DR, the symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed in the third variable display area ME3.

(47) In each of the above embodiments, the size of the target image TF is changed as the game progresses, but the specific structure that changes the display mode of the target image TF as the game progresses is as follows. Optional. For example, instead of or in addition to changing the size, it is also possible to change the color, brightness, and shape of the target image TF. Note that even in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the display mode is changed to one that easily attracts the player's attention as the third normal game state approaches.

(48) In each of the above embodiments, the count value of the counter image CF is updated during the second normal gaming state to indicate the process (process, path) until the transition to the third normal gaming state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the process up to the third normal game state, that is, from start to goal, may be displayed using a status bar, and the current location (current position on the status bar) may be displayed using an arrow or the like that can be moved along the status bar ( map display function).

(49) In each of the above embodiments, the display of the target image TF and the display of the counter image CF in the information display area IE are performed in parallel, but which one of the target image TF and the counter image CF is displayed It is also possible to hide the other under circumstances where the

(50) In each of the above embodiments, the size of the target image TF and the size of the counter image CF are changed at the same timing, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which these timings are shifted.

(51) Continue displaying the target image TF displayed in the second normal gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, and continue displaying the target image TF in the third normal gaming state as well. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to make the display position of the target image TF common in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, and to hide the attached constraint image LF in the third normal game state. preferable.

(52) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the counter image CF is displayed on the display screen 75a in the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the counter value of the counter image CF is displayed on the display screen 75a. The remaining game times in the second normal game state are indicated by subtracting and displaying as the game times are completed. The speed of subtraction of the counter value may become faster during the second normal game state, and changing the rhythm of the game can contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game. In order to change the rhythm of the game by changing the subtraction speed in this way, instead of or in addition to the above configuration, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the subtraction speed of the counter value is slowed down in the middle of the second normal game state. . For example, it may be configured such that the subtraction level after the game has been played reaches a predetermined number of times is lower than the subtraction level until the predetermined number of games is reached.

(53) In the fourth and fifth embodiments described above, the display mode of the counter image CF is the same regardless of the set subtraction level, but the display mode of the counter image CF is changed depending on the switching of the subtraction level. It may be changed. For example, for subtraction level 1, the color of counter image CF is white, for subtraction level 2, the color of counter image CF is blue, for subtraction level 3, the color of counter image CF is green, and for subtraction level 4, the color of counter image CF is green. In this case, the color of the counter image CF may be changed so that the color of the counter image CF becomes red. Note that the specific configuration for realizing a change in the display mode of the counter image CF is arbitrary; for example, the brightness of the counter image CF may be changed, or a configuration in which an effect display is attached to the counter image CF is adopted. The color etc. of the effect may be changed on the screen.

(54) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display mode (for example, color and brightness) of the counter image CF shown in the fourth and fifth embodiments is switched depending on the subtraction level. For example, the color of the counter image CF may be switched such that it becomes white when the subtraction level is LV1, blue when it is LV2, green when it is LV4, and red when it is LV5. In a configuration in which the subtraction speed is changed by switching the subtraction level of the count value, the display area for the count value becomes smaller, making the change more likely to be overlooked. Therefore, if the display mode of the count value is switched according to the subtraction level as shown in this modification, it is possible to reduce the chance that the change in the subtraction level will be overlooked without increasing the display area blindly. can.

(55) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is formed on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Furthermore, pachinko machines and slot machines are equipped with a retrieval device, and the reels start rotating when a start lever is operated after the retrieval device has taken in a predetermined number of game balls stored in a storage section. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines in which the

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the embodiments described above are indicated in parentheses, etc., as appropriate; however, the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses, etc.

<Characteristics Group A>
The following features group A are as follows: ``A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball firing means that shoots a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature A1. special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (pending information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (ball entering the operating port 62a) is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
When the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the first upper limit. When the third normal gaming state is entered and the upper limit setting means sets a second upper limit that is larger than the first upper limit, the number of games in the second normal gaming state is set to the second upper limit. A third normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on reaching the third normal gaming state (transition to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) A game machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing processing for

According to feature A1, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, and the player is further The game shifts to the third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. The upper limit includes a first upper limit and a second upper limit, and there is a difference in the hurdle to transition to the third normal gaming state depending on whether the first upper limit is set or the second upper limit is set. In other words, there will be a second normal gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the third normal gaming state, and a second normal gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state. In this way, by diversifying the second normal gaming state and providing multiple hurdles to transition to the third normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal gaming state and increase the attention to the game. I can contribute.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as ``a game board on which a game area is formed, special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the game area. , an acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and a determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information. a determining means that sequentially performs the determination; a pattern display means having a display section and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section; The variable display of the symbols is started in the symbol display means based on the result of the determination, the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed, and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round. game round control means for controlling said pattern display means so that symbols of each game round are variably displayed in accordance with special information stored in an acquired information storage means; and a determination result by said determination means for determining a predetermined determination A special game mode that shifts the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination result corresponding to the information and the symbol corresponding to the determination result being stopped and displayed by the game time control means. a gaming state transition means, and the normal gaming state includes a first normal gaming state, a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state, and a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. A third normal gaming state advantageous to the player is provided, and means for switching the gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state according to the gaming situation. A game machine characterized by having the following.

Feature A2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
When the first upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, the gaming state is changed from the second normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the first upper limit. When the third normal gaming state is entered and the upper limit setting means sets a second upper limit that is larger than the first upper limit, the number of games in the second normal gaming state is set to the second upper limit. A third normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on reaching the third normal gaming state (transition to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) 1. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function for executing processing for processing.

According to feature A2, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, and the player is further The game shifts to the third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. The upper limit includes a first upper limit and a second upper limit, and there is a difference in the hurdle to transition to the third normal gaming state depending on whether the first upper limit is set or the second upper limit is set. In other words, there will be a second normal gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the third normal gaming state, and a second normal gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state. In this way, by diversifying the second normal gaming state and providing multiple hurdles to transition to the third normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal gaming state and increase the attention to the game. I can contribute.

Feature A3. a variable ball entry section (upper variable winning device 64) that can be switched between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
an opening/closing control means (a function for executing the opening/closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the closed state and the open state when the special game state is in place;
The opening/closing control means sets the opening/closing manner of the variable ball entry section in the special gaming state to a predetermined manner when transitioning from the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second upper limit; It is characterized by having means for setting the opening/closing manner of the variable ball entry section in the special gaming state to the predetermined manner when transitioning from the gaming state to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the first upper limit. The gaming machine according to feature A2.

As shown in feature A1 etc., according to the configuration in which the transition hurdle to the third normal gaming state is different, it is possible to suitably suppress monotony of the game. However, if it were possible to identify the hurdle from the opening/closing manner (behavior) of the variable ball entry section in the special gaming state before transitioning to the second normal gaming state, the attention level to the game in the second normal gaming state would be reduced. There is concern that this will decrease. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by making the opening/closing mode of the variable ball entry section the same regardless of whether the first upper limit or the second upper limit is set, the opening/closing mode of the variable ball entry section can be changed. The occurrence of inconveniences such as the upper limit being specified in advance can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A4. The second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which, when the judgment is made by the judgment means, a judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is more likely to be obtained than the first normal gaming state (a normal game corresponding to a high probability mode). The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, characterized in that the gaming machine is in the following state:

In order to enhance the variety of the game while suppressing excessive bias in the advantage, it is preferable to set the upper limit to a certain degree and suppress the probability of reaching the upper limit. However, on the other hand, if the upper limit becomes too large, it will take longer to play until the upper limit is reached, or the impression that it is virtually impossible to reach the upper limit will become stronger, which will increase the interest of the game by diversifying the games. There are concerns that the effects of aiming for this will not be achieved effectively. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the game state is set to be a gaming state (high probability mode) that tends to result in a result corresponding to predetermined judgment information, even if the upper limit is lowered, the occurrence of reaching the upper limit can be suppressed. Therefore, the occurrence of the various inconveniences mentioned above can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A5. According to any one of features A2 to A4, the second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the ball enters the starting ball entry section more easily than the first normal gaming state. gaming machines.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, but if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it becomes a factor that increases the player's fatigue. Therefore, in the second normal game state, an upper limit is set on the number of games to be executed based on the ball entering the starting ball entering section, and in the second normal gaming state, it is easy for the ball to enter the starting ball entering section. With this configuration, the game can proceed quickly. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game while alleviating the fatigue caused by it.

Feature A6. Feature A2 characterized in that the second normal gaming state is a gaming state configured such that a variable display period (variable display time) of the symbols for each game is shorter than that in the first normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5 to A5.

The transition (promotion) to the third normal game state is accompanied by a certain degree of tension, but if such tension continues for an excessively long time, it becomes a factor that increases the player's fatigue. Therefore, in the second normal game state, an upper limit is set for the number of game rounds to be executed based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, and in the second normal game state, the symbols are more variable than in the first normal game state. By configuring the display period to be shortened, the game can proceed quickly. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game while alleviating the fatigue caused by it.

In particular, in combination with feature A5, by configuring the variable display period to be shortened as the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry area increases, the second normal display is performed in anticipation of reaching the upper limit. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the game in the gaming state. Thereby, the above-mentioned fatigue alleviation effect can be exerted more suitably.

Feature A7. The normal gaming state is a fourth normal gaming state (low probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. In addition, a fourth normal game state (compatible with high-frequency support mode) is provided,
A fourth normal gaming state transition means (a function of causing the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to the fourth normal gaming state in response to a normal jackpot result) for shifting to the fourth normal gaming state through the special gaming state;
When the number of games in the fourth normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the first normal gaming state transition means (high frequency control by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) causes the transition to the first normal gaming state. After the end of the support mode, the game mode transitions to the first normal gaming state).
The upper limit setting means is configured such that at least one of the first upper limit and the second upper limit is less than the specified number of times, according to any one of features A2 to A6. Game machine.

For players who have reached the specified number of times in the fourth normal gaming state without winning the lottery to enter the special gaming state, it is realistic to reach the upper limit when entering the second normal gaming state. It can give the impression that there is. With such a configuration, it can be expected that the degree of attention to the game when transitioning to the second normal game state will increase.

Feature A8. The normal gaming state is a fourth normal gaming state (low probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. In addition, a fourth normal game state (compatible with high-frequency support mode) is provided,
The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to a definite variable jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
Means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the judgment result by the judgment means in the second normal gaming state is a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. and,
Means for shifting the gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the judgment result by the judgment means in the second normal gaming state is a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized by comprising:

According to the configuration shown in this feature, if a winning result is obtained during the second normal game state, the game shifts to the special game state. After the special gaming state ends, there will be two cases: a return to the second normal gaming state and a transition to the fourth normal gaming state (demotion). Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game.

Feature A9. The upper limit setting means determines that when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result corresponding to the first determination information before reaching the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means, and after passing through the special gaming state, The gaming machine according to feature A8, further comprising means for resetting the upper limit in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state is entered.

According to feature A9, even if a judgment result corresponding to predetermined judgment information is reached while the game is progressing toward the upper limit in the second normal gaming state, the game returns to the second normal gaming state. There is a possibility that he will return. When returning to the second normal gaming state, the upper limit is newly set, and it is possible to try again to move to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the desire to play due to the transition to the special gaming state.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, wherein a difference between the first upper limit and the second upper limit is smaller than the first upper limit.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the game does not shift to the third normal gaming state when the game time corresponding to the first upper limit is reached, the game time corresponding to the second upper limit is reached from there. By lowering the hurdle to reaching the second upper limit, it is possible to suppress a decline in expectations for reaching the second upper limit. Thereby, even when a plurality of hurdles are used, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the desire to play when the first hurdle fails.

Feature A11. When the second upper limit is set as the upper limit by the upper limit setting means, means for making a predetermined notification at a game time corresponding to the first upper limit and a game time corresponding to the second upper limit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9.

As shown in feature A2 etc., if multiple hurdles are provided for transitioning to the third normal gaming state, for example, even if the first upper limit has not been reached, the third normal gaming state will be reached at the first upper limit. By suggesting that there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal gaming state, attention to the game can be improved.

Feature A12. special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (pending information) when a predetermined acquisition condition (ball entering the operating port 62a) is satisfied;
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (first normal gaming state compatible with low frequency support mode and low probability mode) and a second normal gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal game state (compatible with frequent support mode and high probability mode) and a third normal game state (third normal game state compatible with low frequency support mode and high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal game state (playing state),
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; A function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of upper limits are provided, and the upper limit setting means is configured to set any one of the plurality of upper limits as the upper limit of the number of games in the second normal gaming state.

According to feature A12, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, and the player is further The game shifts to the third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. A plurality of upper limits are set, and the hurdle to transition to the third normal gaming state differs depending on which of these upper limits is set. In other words, there will be a second normal gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the third normal gaming state, and a second normal gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the third normal gaming state. In this way, by diversifying the second normal gaming state and providing multiple hurdles to transition to the third normal gaming state, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game in the normal gaming state and increase the attention to the game. I can contribute.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in Feature A3 to Feature A11 to Feature A12.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature group B is defined as: ``A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that shoots a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
Transition condition setting means for setting transition conditions to the third normal gaming state when transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state (setting the number of time reductions in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162); function),
The transition condition setting means, in the second normal gaming state, when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to predetermined judgment information and the second normal gaming state is entered after passing through the special gaming state, Relaxation means for relaxing the transition condition to the third normal gaming state (the number of time reductions set when a jackpot result related to the right operating port 63a is set when a jackpot result related to the lower operating port 62a is set) A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which the number of time reductions is more preferential than the number of times the game is played.

As shown in this feature, monotony of the game can be suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the advantage increases by transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Here, the transition conditions for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the most advantageous third normal gaming state are the judgment results (hereinafter referred to as winning results) corresponding to predetermined judgment information in the second normal gaming state. This may be alleviated when returning to the second normal gaming state after going through the special gaming state. If the configuration is such that the hurdle to the third normal gaming state is lowered when the second normal gaming state loops, the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game by using a plurality of normal gaming states in combination can be suitably achieved. be able to.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as ``a game board on which a game area is formed, special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the game area. , an acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and a determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information. a determining means that sequentially performs the determination; a pattern display means having a display section and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section; The variable display of the symbols is started in the symbol display means based on the result of the determination, the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed, and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round. game round control means for controlling said pattern display means so that symbols of each game round are variably displayed in accordance with special information stored in an acquired information storage means; and a determination result by said determination means for determining a predetermined determination A special game mode that shifts the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination result corresponding to the information and the symbol corresponding to the determination result being stopped and displayed by the game time control means. a gaming state transition means, and the normal gaming state includes a first normal gaming state, a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state, and a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. A third normal gaming state advantageous to the player is provided, and means for switching the gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state according to the gaming situation. A game machine characterized by having the following.

Feature B2. The transition condition setting means sets an upper limit for the number of games to be executed in the second normal gaming state as the transition condition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state,
The relaxation means is configured to lower the upper limit set when transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the gaming machine is a means for setting a lower upper limit when the gaming state is entered.

As shown in this feature, in a configuration in which the game moves to the third normal gaming state when the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, whether or not this upper limit can be reached will be an advantage for the game. This will be important as we move forward. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when a winning result occurs in the second normal gaming state and the special gaming state returns to the second normal gaming state, the above upper limit may be lowered, and such an event may occur. This can increase expectations for the transition to the third normal game state.

Feature B3. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to a probability variable jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
means for transitioning to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the judgment result by the judgment means corresponds to the first judgment information during the second normal gaming state;
means for transitioning to the first normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the judgment result by the judging means corresponds to the second judgment information during the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2.

As shown in this feature, in a gaming machine where a winning result is the trigger for transitioning (demotion) from the second normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the winning result in the second normal gaming state Games are played with the hope that this will not happen. Here, in the case of a winning result, while the player may be demoted to the first normal gaming state, the conditions for returning to the second normal gaming state and transitioning to the third normal gaming state may be relaxed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a rapid drop in the player's desire to play when a winning result is obtained in the second normal game state.

Feature B4. The transition condition setting means is configured to set the transition condition when the determination result by the determining means in the second normal gaming state corresponds to predetermined determination information and the second normal gaming state is entered after passing through the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B3, further comprising means for setting a transition condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

As shown in this feature, in the case of a winning result in the second normal gaming state, the hurdle to the third normal gaming state is not necessarily lowered, but also raised, making the game more tense. It can give a feeling.

Feature B5. When the determination result by the determination means in the second normal game state corresponds to the predetermined determination information and the second normal game state is reached after passing through the special game state, the transition condition is set by the relaxation means. Feature B4 is characterized in that the probability that the transition condition is relaxed is configured to be higher than the probability that a transition condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the transition condition set in advance by the transition condition setting means is set. The gaming machine described in .

As shown in feature B1, in the structure where steps step up in the order of the first normal gaming state → second normal gaming state → third normal gaming state, the winning result is obtained even though the game has moved to the second normal gaming state. If an event occurs frequently in which the transition to the third normal gaming state is delayed due to this, the impression that the game in the second normal gaming state has been delayed is likely to occur. This may be an obstacle to increasing the attention to the game. Here, as shown in this feature, if a winning result occurs during the second normal game state, the rate of lowering the hurdle is set higher than the rate of raising the hurdle, so that multiple normal game states can be used together. At the same time, it is possible to step up the gaming state easily.

Feature B6. The starting ball entering section includes a first starting ball entering section (lower operating port 62a) disposed in the first channel (left route) in the game area, and a second channel different from the first channel. (right route) and a second starting ball entry part (right operating port 63a),
The transition conditions include a first transition condition (for example, the number of time savings "50" times) and a second transition condition that is easier to satisfy than the first transition condition (for example, the number of time savings "30", "10", "0" times). ) is provided,
The mitigation means is configured to prevent the ball from entering the first starting entry section if the special information corresponding to the ball entering the second starting entry section results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information. The second transition condition is set as the transition condition at a higher rate than when the special information corresponding to the ball results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information,
In the first normal game state, the judgment means has more chances to make a judgment when the game ball is launched into the first flow path than into the second flow path; The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the decision means has more chances to make a decision when the game ball is launched into the second channel.

According to feature B6, when a game ball is launched into the first channel in the first normal game state, a lottery for transition to the special game state is executed based on the ball entering the first starting ball entry section. be done. If this lottery results in a winning result and the game shifts to the second normal game state, the first transition condition, which is relatively difficult to satisfy, is likely to be set. On the other hand, after the transition to the second normal game state, the game ball is fired into the second flow path, so that the main ball entry destination of the game ball becomes the second starting ball entry portion. A lottery to transition to the special game state is executed based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry section, and when the result is a winning result and the return to the second normal game state after passing through the special game state, the relative The second transition condition, which is easy to satisfy, is easily set. With such a configuration, the technical idea shown in feature B1 can be suitably realized while avoiding complication of the configuration by using the existing configuration of the gaming machine.

Feature B7. A plurality of the second transition conditions are provided,
The mitigation means is configured to set one of the plurality of second transition conditions as the transition condition when the special information corresponding to the ball entering the second starting ball entry section results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. The gaming machine according to feature B6, characterized in that the probability that the transition condition that is easiest to satisfy is set is higher than the probability that the other transition conditions are set.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the transition condition set when the second normal gaming state is looped is easier to satisfy than the transition condition set when the second normal gaming state is first entered. Opportunities will increase. Thereby, the relaxation function shown in feature B1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature B8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B7, further comprising a correspondence information display means for displaying transition condition correspondence information corresponding to the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means.

In a configuration where the transition conditions can be relaxed as shown in feature B1 etc., displaying transition condition correspondence information corresponding to the transition conditions can contribute to increasing the attention level to the game.

Note that each of the technical ideas shown in features B1 to B8 may be applied to the feature A group.

<Feature C group>
The following characteristic group C is defined as: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a firing operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, open/close execution mode) that is advantageous for
Switching means (electric accessory 71) for switching between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entry part and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the receiving state. and,
A switching control means (a function for executing electric support support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance state is shorter than the first switching mode. mode) is provided.
The determination mode in which the determination means performs the determination is a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high, and a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high. A low probability mode is provided for
The normal gaming state includes a first normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching mode. mode and a third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode,
The second normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the third normal gaming state,
If the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, the first normal gaming state passes through the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state. A first transition means for transition (a function that executes a process for transitioning to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
a reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time savings in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time saving number) when transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
A second transition means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing processing for transitioning to a third normal gaming state.

According to feature C1, if the number of games reaches the reference number without a winning result in the second normal gaming state that supports the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability mode is triggered by reaching the reference number of times. Then, a transition is made to a third normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. The third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. In other words, if you are in a high probability mode (advantageous gaming state) but are unable to obtain the benefit, it is possible to advance the game even more advantageously by upgrading to the third normal gaming state. Become. By providing relief to the players with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

The third normal gaming state shown in this feature corresponds to the first switching mode and high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal gaming state by the difference in the combination of switching control mode and determination mode. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the games while suppressing the configuration related to the games from becoming excessively complicated, and it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the games.

Feature C2. A special ball entry section (lower variable winning device 65) into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter is provided, and the special ball entry section is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the starting ball entry section. has been
The starting ball entering section is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) that continues to the special ball entering section in the gaming area, and when the starting ball entering section enters the receiving state, the starting ball entering section The structure is such that the flow to the special ball entry section via the flow path is restricted,
In the third normal game state, compared to the second normal game state, the chance that a game ball launched into the predetermined channel enters the starting ball entry section is reduced, but the chance of the ball entering the special ball entry section is reduced. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to increase opportunities to play the ball.

According to feature C2, in the second normal game state, the ball entry into the special entry section, which is set to have a higher advantage than the starting ball entry section, is regulated by the starting ball entry section, and the transition to the third normal game state. By doing so, the relevant regulations will be relaxed. In this way, by increasing the chances of entering the ball into the special ball entry section, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the third normal gaming state over the second normal gaming state.

Feature C3. As the predetermined determination information, first information (information corresponding to a jackpot result) and second information (information corresponding to a special win result) are provided,
The second transition means transitions from the second normal gaming state when the number of games played without a determination result corresponding to the first information in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. It is configured to transition to the third normal gaming state,
a special ball entry section (lower variable winning device 65) capable of switching between an acceptance state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-acceptance state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the acceptance state;
ball entry control means (where the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes opening/closing processing for switching the special ball entry section to the receiving state when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result corresponding to the second information); function) and
Paying out a first predetermined number of game balls based on the balls entering the starting ball entry section, and dispensing a second predetermined number of game balls greater than the first predetermined number based on the balls entering the special ball entry section. A dispensing means (dispensing device 222) for dispensing,
The starting ball entering section is arranged on a predetermined flow path (right route) that continues to the special ball entering section in the gaming area, and when the starting ball entering section enters the receiving state, the starting ball entering section The structure is such that the flow to the special ball entry section via the flow path is restricted,
In the third normal game state, compared to the second normal game state, the proportion of game balls that enter the special ball entry section among the game balls fired toward the predetermined flow path increases. The gaming machine according to feature C1.

According to feature C3, in the second normal game state, entering the special ball entry section, which is set to have a higher advantage than the starting ball entry section, is regulated by the starting ball entry section, and the state shifts to the third normal game state. By doing so, the relevant regulations will be relaxed. In this way, by increasing the chances of entering the ball into the special ball entry section, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the third normal gaming state over the second normal gaming state.

Feature C4. In the special gaming state to which the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result corresponding to the second information and the transition is made, means is provided for maintaining the switching control mode at the switching control mode before the transition to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C3.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the determination result corresponding to the second information is determined during the second normal gaming state and the determination result corresponding to the second information is determined during the third normal gaming state. , it is possible to increase the difference in the frequency of ball entry. This is preferable in order to emphasize the superiority of the special ball entry section as shown in feature C2 and the like.

Feature C5. The reference number setting means is a first setting means,
If the determination result by the determining means corresponds to the first information before reaching the standard number of times and the second normal game state is reached after the special game state, the standard number of times (time saving number) is set. Equipped with a second setting means for newly setting (a function for resetting the number of time reductions when the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 moves from the second normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the first special gaming state) The gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4.

According to feature C5, if a winning result occurs before the rescue function is activated and the game returns to the second normal game state after going through the special game state, the reference number of times is reset. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress the relief function shown in feature C1 from becoming excessive.

Feature C6. The reference number setting means is a first setting means,
third transition means (main) for transitioning to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state when the judgment result by the judging means in the third normal gaming state is a judgment result corresponding to the first information; (a function of executing a process of causing the MPU 602 of the control device 162 to transition to the second normal gaming state);
A third setting means for newly setting the reference number of times when the third transition means moves to the second normal gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 changes the number of times from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state). The gaming machine according to any one of Features C3 to C5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of resetting the number of time reductions when transitioning to .

By moving to the second normal gaming state if a winning result occurs during relief and leaving a way to return to the third normal gaming state, the player's desire to play increases rapidly as the third normal gaming state ends. It is possible to suppress the decline in

Feature C7. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the third setting means includes means for setting the reference number of times to be smaller than the reference number of times set by the first setting means.

When the third normal gaming state changes to the second normal gaming state, preferential treatment is given so that the standard number of times is relatively small, and the demotion of the gaming state becomes a factor that reduces the player's desire to play. can be suppressed.

Feature C8. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, open/close execution mode) that is advantageous for
Switching means (electric accessory 71) for switching between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entry part and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the receiving state. and,
A switching control means (a function for executing electric support support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance state is shorter than the first switching mode. ) is provided,
The determination mode in which the determination means performs the determination is a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high, and a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high. A low probability mode is provided for
When the determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information in the first normal game state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, the second switching mode and the high probability mode are selected. A first transition means for transitioning to a second normal gaming state corresponding to the probability mode (a function for executing processing for transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
When the first transition means shifts from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, a reference number setting means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sets the number of time saving times) sets a reference number of times (the number of time saving times). functions to be set) and
When the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information reaches the reference number of times, the switching control mode is changed from the second switching mode to the second switching mode. A third normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the high probability mode is transferred from the second normal gaming state by maintaining the determination mode in the high probability constant mode while switching to the first switching mode and the high probability mode. 2 transition means (a function for executing a process for causing the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state),
A gaming machine characterized in that the second normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state and more disadvantageous to the player than the third normal gaming state.

According to feature C8, if the number of games reaches the reference number without a winning result in the second normal gaming state that supports the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the high probability mode is triggered by reaching the reference number of times. Then, a transition is made to a third normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. The third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. In other words, if you are in a high probability mode (advantageous gaming state) but are unable to obtain the benefit, it is possible to advance the game even more advantageously by upgrading to the third normal gaming state. Become. By providing relief to the players with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

The third normal gaming state shown in this feature corresponds to the first switching mode and high probability mode, and is differentiated from the second normal gaming state by the difference in the combination of switching control mode and determination mode. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the games while suppressing the configuration related to the games from becoming excessively complicated, and it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the games.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the features C1 to C8 may be applied to the features A group to B group.

<Characteristic group D>
The following feature group D is defined as ``a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launcher that launches game balls into the game area based on a player's launch operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for
The starting ball entry section is switchable between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-receiving state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the receiving state,
comprising a switching control means for controlling the switching means (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The switching control modes by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance state is shorter than the first switching mode. It is provided,
The normal gaming state includes a first type normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and a second type normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode,
When transitioning to the second type normal gaming state, a reference number setting means (time saving number set by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets a reference number of times (time saving number) as the number of games in which the second type normal gaming state is continued. function to set the number of times) and
A first transition means capable of transitioning from the second type normal gaming state to a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second type normal gaming state (transferring to a third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) function to perform the migration process), and
A second transition means capable of transitioning from the second type normal gaming state to a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second type normal gaming state (transferring to the first normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) migration process).
When the number of games executed in the second type normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times, the gaming state is configured to be shifted by either the first transition means or the second transition means. A gaming machine with special features.

In the second type normal game state, the ball enters the starting ball entry section easily, and the game progresses smoothly. When the number of games played in this second type normal gaming state reaches the standard number of times, the game state shifts to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second type normal gaming state or a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. That will happen. By diversifying the games in this way, it is possible to prevent the games from becoming monotonous and contribute to increasing the level of attention to the games.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. and a normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode), a third normal gaming state (normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state; A fourth normal gaming state (fourth normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state is provided,
When transitioning to the second normal gaming state, the first setting means (the second normal function to set the number of time reductions according to the transition to the gaming state),
A first transition means for transitioning to the third normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times (transferring to the third normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162); function to perform the migration process), and
A second setting means for setting the reference number of times as the number of games in which the fourth normal gaming state is to be continued when the fourth normal gaming state is to be entered (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 is used to switch to the fourth normal gaming state). function to set the number of time reductions according to the transition) and
A second transition means for transitioning to the first normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the fourth normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 switches to the first normal gaming state) A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing a transition process.

When the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times, the game is moved (promoted) to a third normal gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the number of games executed in the fourth normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times, the game moves to the first normal gaming state (demotion). In the second normal gaming state, the game is played while expecting to reach the standard number of times, and in the fourth normal gaming state, the game is played while hoping to avoid reaching the standard number of times. In this way, even if the same standard number of times is set, the gaming state after reaching the standard number of times is divided into advantageous and disadvantageous sides depending on the gaming state, thereby suppressing the monotony of the game and increasing the attention to the game. Can contribute to improvement.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as ``a game board on which a game area is formed, special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the game area. , an acquired information storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and a determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information. a determining means that sequentially performs the determination; a pattern display means having a display section and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section; The variable display of the symbols is started in the symbol display means based on the result of the determination, the stop result corresponding to the result of the determination is displayed, and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round. game round control means for controlling said pattern display means so that symbols of each game round are variably displayed in accordance with special information stored in an acquired information storage means; and a determination result by said determination means for determining a predetermined determination A special game mode that shifts the game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the determination result corresponding to the information and the symbol corresponding to the determination result being stopped and displayed by the game time control means. a gaming state transition means, and the normal gaming state includes a first normal gaming state, a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state, and a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. A third normal gaming state advantageous to the player is provided, and means for switching the gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state according to the gaming situation. A game machine characterized by having the following.

Feature D3. The starting ball entry section is switchable between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-receiving state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the receiving state,
comprising a switching control means (a function for executing electrical support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the starting ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state;
The switching control modes by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance state is shorter than the first switching mode. It is provided,
The first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state are gaming states in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode,
The second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state are gaming states in which the switching control mode is the second switching mode,
The first setting means is configured to set the reference number of times as a game time in which the second switching mode is continued in the second normal game state,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second setting means is configured to set the reference number of times as a game time in which the second switching mode is continued in the fourth normal game state. .

As shown in feature D2, in a configuration in which the gaming state can change to an advantageous/disadvantageous side upon reaching the reference number of times, the player's attention tends to be directed to the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached. If the number of balls held decreases significantly in a situation where attention to gaming is increasing, it is assumed that this, combined with the increased attention to gaming, will likely lead to a decline in the desire to play. Ru. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the switching control mode is set to the second switching mode to suppress the decrease in the number of balls held, thereby suppressing the occurrence of such inconvenience.

Furthermore, in a configuration where the gaming state changes depending on the reaching of the standard number of times, there is a concern that the progress of the game will be delayed during this process, which will reduce the impact and hinder the ability to increase the attention level of the game. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the progress of the game until reaching the standard number of times is facilitated, and such concerns can be suitably eliminated.

Feature D4. The game time control means is configured such that the variable display period of the symbol in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state is shorter than the variable display period of the symbol in the first normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature D3.

As shown in feature D3, if it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, it becomes easier for the player to focus his or her main attention on whether or not the reference number of times has been reached. In such a situation, if the variable display period of the symbols is shortened, it is preferable to prevent the player from becoming excessively fatigued in the process of reaching the standard number of games due to extended game rounds and continued tension. can be suppressed to This is a preferable configuration for setting the reference number of times to a certain extent and achieving the attention level improvement effect shown in feature D2 and the like.

Feature D5. The determining means determines the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when making the determination in the second normal gaming state, and the predetermined probability when making the determination in the fourth normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that the probability of a decision result corresponding to the decision information is different.

According to feature D5, the same reference number of times is used when transitioning to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state and when transferring to the first normal gaming state via the fourth normal gaming state. Even if this is set, there will be a difference in the probability of reaching the standard number of times. Thereby, the effect of suppressing monotony of the game can be more suitably exerted.

Feature D6. The determining means is configured such that the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information when making the determination in the second normal gaming state is set to the predetermined probability when making the determination in the fourth normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D5, characterized in that the probability of the determination result corresponding to the determination information is higher than that of the determination result.

According to feature D6, the same reference number of times is used when transitioning to the third normal gaming state via the second normal gaming state and when transferring to the first normal gaming state via the fourth normal gaming state. Even if this is set, there will be a difference in the probability of reaching the standard number of times. Thereby, the effect of suppressing monotony of the game can be more suitably exerted.

In particular, when transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, which is on the advantageous side, the possibility of reaching the standard number of times becomes relatively low, and when moving from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, which is on the disadvantageous side. When transitioning to the state, the possibility of reaching the standard number of times becomes relatively high. With such a configuration, even if it is assumed that the same standard number of times is reached, the hurdle for transitioning to the third normal gaming state can be made relatively high, and the hurdle for transitioning to the third normal gaming state can be made relatively high. A sense of expectation can be suitably aroused.

Feature D7. It is configured such that when the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state are in effect, it becomes difficult or impossible for the player to identify which of the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state the player is in. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D6.

According to feature D7, by making it unclear (difficult to specify) which of the second and fourth normal gaming states, the gaming state to which the game state is transferred after reaching the standard number of times is the first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. A game for guessing which of the game states is added is added. By making it unclear whether to move to an advantageous side or a disadvantageous side, that is, to be promoted or demoted, until the standard number of times is reached, it is possible to contribute to further improving the attention level when the standard number of times is reached.

Feature D8. Means for executing a predetermined effect corresponding to the second normal gaming state over a plurality of game rounds executed in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state is in the second normal gaming state;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D7, further comprising means for executing the predetermined performance when the fourth normal gaming state is entered.

As shown in feature D8, the same display effect (predetermined effect) is executed in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, and which normal game state is in is hidden (difficult to specify). Accordingly, a game is added in which it is necessary to guess which of the first normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state the gaming state will be transferred to after reaching the reference number of times. By making it unclear whether to move to an advantageous side or a disadvantageous side, that is, to be promoted or demoted, until the standard number of times is reached, it is possible to contribute to further improving the attention level when the standard number of times is reached.

Feature D9. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to a definite variable jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to a normal jackpot result),
If the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the first normal gaming state changes from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state. a means of transferring,
If the judgment result by the judgment means in the first normal gaming state is a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, the first normal gaming state changes to the fourth normal gaming state via the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature D7 or feature D8, further comprising means for transferring.

When a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information is obtained in the first normal gaming state, a transition is made to a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state. In this way, by making the transition pattern from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state common, it is possible to make any game before moving to the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the state. Thereby, the attention level improvement effect shown in feature D7 etc. can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D10. a variable ball entry section that can switch between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-receiving state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the receiving state;
ball entry control means for switching the variable ball entry section to the receiving state when the special game state is in place;
The ball entry control means controls the special game state to which the transition occurs when the determination result corresponds to the first determination information, and the special game state to which the transition occurs when the determination result corresponds to the second determination information. The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized in that the switching mode of the variable ball entry section is configured to be the same between the states.

As shown in feature D10, by making the behavior of the variable ball entry section the same when transitioning to the second normal gaming state and when shifting to the fourth normal gaming state, the behavior of the variable ball entry section can be changed from the behavior of the variable ball entry section to the second normal gaming state. It is possible to avoid revealing which of the normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state the game will transition to. Thereby, the effect shown in feature D9 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D11. comprising a suggesting means for indicating the remaining number of times until the reference number of times is reached;
The suggestion mode provided by the suggestion means is a first suggestion mode in which the remaining number of times is made explicit, and a second suggestion mode in which the remaining number of times is hidden,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D10, wherein the suggestion means is switchable between the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode.

As shown in feature D7, etc., in a configuration where the player is divided into an advantageous side or a disadvantageous side depending on the number of times the standard number is reached, by switching the remaining number of times until the number of times the standard number is reached between explicit and non-displayed, the player can enter the game in the process of reaching the number of times the standard number is reached. The degree of attention can be suitably improved.

Note that the technical ideas shown in features D1 to D11 may be applied to the features A to C groups.

<Characteristic group E>
The following feature group E is based on the following: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that shoots game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature E1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A first ball entry part (lower variable winning part) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an accepting state where game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the receiving state. device 65);
A receiving state in which a game ball is disposed on a predetermined flow path (right route) heading toward the first ball entry section in the gaming area and can enter the game ball flowing down along the predetermined flow path, and the receiving state. a second ball entry section (right-side operating ball entry section 63) that can be switched to a non-accepting state in which entry is more difficult;
A predetermined information acquisition means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that obtains predetermined information (value of the open random number counter C4) when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (through gate 66) arranged in the gaming area. function to obtain the value of the open random number counter C4),
Information storage means (power storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means;
A lottery means (a function for executing a support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 )and,
a variable display unit (main display unit 81) having a display unit (through-gate display unit DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display unit;
Display control means that starts variable display of symbols on the display section prior to a lottery by the lottery means or based on the lottery being conducted by the lottery means, and causes a fixed display of a symbol corresponding to a lottery result by the lottery means. (Function for executing picture display processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Switching control means for switching the second ball entry section to the acceptance state when a symbol corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the display section (a function for executing the grand prize opening opening/closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) ) and
The switching control mode by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which pitches are more likely to occur than in the first switching mode. Ori,
The display control means may be arranged such that the variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture in the second switching mode are longer than the first specific period, which is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture in the first switching mode. The second specific period, which is the sum of
The ball entering the first ball entering section is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the ball entering the second ball entering section,
The second ball entry section has an opening (operating port 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass at the same time, and a shutter (shutter 331) that opens and closes the opening, and when the shutter is placed in the closed position, The shutter is configured to enter the non-accepting state and enter the accepting state when the shutter is placed in an open position,
When the second ball entry section is in the non-receiving state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter,
The period required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined channel to pass over the shutter is configured to be longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature E1, the period required for a game ball flowing down a predetermined channel to pass over the shutter is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the symbol in the second switching mode (second specific period). It is longer than. Therefore, during the second switching mode, most of the game balls that reach the second ball entry section will enter the second ball entry section. That is, the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path during the second switching mode flows into the second ball entry section and is suppressed from entering the first ball entry section. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum (first specific period) of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture in the first switching mode. Therefore, during the first switching mode, even if the second ball entering section is continuously switched to the receiving state, some of the game balls that have reached the shutter will pass through the second ball entering section and be transferred to the first ball entering state. Head to the club. In this way, during the first switching mode, the ball enters the relatively advantageous first ball entry section, while during the second switching mode, the ball entry into the first ball entry section is suppressed. This can make a clear difference in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to differentiate each switching mode and reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the second ball entry section and head toward the first ball entry section during the second switching mode, it is recommended to shorten the specific period. good. However, if the specific period is simply shortened, it becomes difficult to fire/stop firing according to the results displayed on the display (proceeding with the game in a way that gives the player even the slightest advantage), and the display The significance of having a department will be diminished. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the above-described overflow while also preventing the variable display period and fixed display period of the picture from becoming extremely short. Thereby, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. The switching control means is configured to switch the second ball entering section to the accepting state based on a lottery result by the lottery means, regardless of whether or not the first ball entering section is in the accepting state. The gaming machine according to feature E1.

As shown in feature E2, in a configuration in which the first ball receiving section may or may not be in the accepting state depending on the lottery result, the player's attention tends to be directed to the display of the lottery result. There is technical significance in applying the technical concept shown in feature E1 to such a configuration to suppress the specific period from becoming extremely short.

Feature E3. A first predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the first ball entering section, and a first predetermined number less than the first predetermined number is paid out based on the ball entering the second ball entering section. 2.Equipped with a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls,
Due to the difference in the number of game balls put out by the payout means, entering the first ball entry section is more advantageous to the player than entering the second ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.

As shown in feature E3, in a configuration where the ball entering the first ball entry section is given preferential treatment than the ball entering the second ball entry section, the player expects the ball to enter the first ball entry section. It is assumed that the game is played by In such a configuration, it is not preferable that the ball enters the first ball entry section excessively, as this will cause the game to become unbalanced. In this regard, in combination with feature E1, it is possible to avoid movement of the game ball toward the first ball receiving part while minimizing the period during which the second ball receiving part is in the receiving state, so that such a situation can be avoided. The occurrence of inconveniences can be suitably suppressed. Shortening the period in which the receiving state is held is advantageous in encouraging players' expectations as if the game ball were flowing down toward the first ball entry section, and the period in which the receiving state is held is lengthened. It is possible to suitably suppress the expectation that the ball will enter the first ball entry section.

Feature E4. The passage length of the communication passage connecting the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part in the predetermined flow path is the passage part defined by the shutter of the second ball entry part in the predetermined flow path. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the passage length is shorter than the path length of the game machine.

As shown in feature E4, by making the passage length of the communication passage section shorter than the passage length related to the second ball entry section, the second ball entry section can be opened in a situation where the first ball entry section is open. This makes it easier to give players the impression that the game ball that has reached the second ball entry section can immediately enter the first ball entry section as long as it passes through the second ball entry section. This can contribute to increasing the attention paid to the behavior of the game ball that has reached the ball entry area.

Feature E5. The first ball entrance part has an opening (big prize opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass at the same time, and a shutter (shutter) that opens and closes the opening, and when the shutter is placed in the closed position, the The shutter is configured to be in a non-accepting state and to be in the accepting state when the shutter is placed in an open position,
When the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter of the first ball entry section,
The passage length of the communication passage connecting the first ball entry part and the second ball entry part in the predetermined flow path is the passage part defined by the shutter of the first ball entry part in the predetermined flow path. Any one of features E1 to E4 is characterized in that the passage length is shorter than either of the passage length of the passage part formed by the shutter of the second ball entrance part in the predetermined flow path and the passage length of the passage part constituted by the shutter of the second ball entrance part. The gaming machine described in .

Most of the game balls flowing down the predetermined flow path can enter either the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section, so the combination of the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section allows for one large ball entry section. It can be made to look like the ball entrance section is constructed. It is advantageous in improving the player's sense of satisfaction to make it appear as if the opportunity for the game ball to enter the game ball is ensured by the large ball entry section. Here, by making the passage length of the communication passage part shorter than the passage length of the passage part constituted by each shutter, the sense of unity between both ball entry parts can be strengthened. This can strengthen the above impression.

In addition, by making the passage length of the communication passage section shorter than the above-mentioned passage length related to the second ball entry section, the game ball that reaches the second ball entry section in a situation where the first ball entry section is open. This makes it easier to give players the impression that if the ball can pass through the second ball entry section, the ball can immediately enter the first ball entry section, and the shutter of the second ball entry section and the game ball that has reached the first ball entry section This can contribute to increasing the attention paid to the behavior of people.

Feature E6. The first ball entrance part has an opening (big prize opening) through which a plurality of game balls can pass at the same time, and a shutter (shutter) that opens and closes the opening, and when the shutter is placed in the closed position, the The shutter is configured to be in a non-accepting state and to be in the accepting state when the shutter is placed in an open position,
When the first ball entry section is in the non-receiving state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter of the first ball entry section,
Feature E4 or E5, characterized in that the shutter of the first ball entry section and the shutter of the second ball entry section extend in a predetermined direction, and the communication passage extends in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. The game machine described.

As described above, if the configuration is such that most of the game balls flowing down the predetermined channel can enter either the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section, the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section. By combining the parts, one large ball entry part can be constructed. It is advantageous in improving the player's sense of satisfaction to make it appear as if the opportunity for the game ball to enter the game ball is ensured by the large ball entry section.

In this type of large ball entry area, when switching the main ball entry destination between the first ball entry area and the second ball entry area depending on the situation, there is a situation where the ball should not enter the first ball entry area. When a ball enters the first ball entry section, the possibility that the game hall will be disadvantaged increases. If such circumstances are taken into consideration, a communication path may be provided between the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section to delay or thin out the movement of game balls toward the first ball entry section. has technical significance. Although it is possible to optimally perform these functions by making the communication passage a certain length, there is a concern that on the other hand, the sense of unity between both ball entry parts will be reduced, and the impression that it is a large ball entry part will be weakened. Ru. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the shutters of both ball entry sections extend in a predetermined direction, and the communication passage extends in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction, so that the ball entry sections are shifted (for example, offset vertically). By adopting this configuration, it is possible to increase the passage length of the communication passage while reducing the sense of unity between the two ball entry parts.

Feature E7. A discharge port (out port 68) through which game balls are discharged from the game region is formed at the most downstream part of the game region,
A branch passage part is formed in the middle of the communication passage part, and the game balls flowing into the branch passage part are discharged from the game area without reaching the discharge port. The gaming machine according to feature E6.

The game balls that have flowed into the branch passage section provided in the middle of the communication passage section are ejected from the gaming area as they are, and are prevented from reaching the first ball entry section. In this way, by configuring a part of the game balls that have passed through the second ball entry section to be ejected from the gaming area without flowing into the first ball entry section, the game balls that have flowed into the branch passage section can be The impression that this is a large ball entry section as described in 1 above can be strengthened compared to the structure that goes toward the discharge port.

Feature E8. A deceleration part (protrusions 335a, 336a) that decelerates the game ball is provided in a part of the predetermined flow path where a passage part is formed by the shutter of the second ball entry part,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E7, wherein the speed reduction section is arranged at a position closer to the communication passage section.

In a configuration where the first ball entry section is more advantageous to the player than the second ball entry section, the game ball may pass through the second ball entry section and head toward the first ball entry section. It is assumed that the firing operation will be performed in anticipation of this, and that the player's attention will be more likely to be directed to the movement of the game ball from the second ball entry section to the communication passage section. Here, in a configuration in which a deceleration part is provided in the passage section formed by the shutter to extend the passage time, the attention of players can be increased by arranging the deceleration part so as to be biased toward the connecting passage part. It is possible to make it easier to follow the movement of the game ball with the eye at a location where the player can easily face the ball. This can contribute to further improving the degree of attention.

Feature E9. The first ball entry section is configured to switch to the receiving state based on the ball entering the second ball entry section,
During the period in which the second ball entry section is in the receiving state in the first switching mode, the game ball passes through a portion of the predetermined channel where a passage is formed by the shutter of the second ball entry section. According to any one of features E1 to E8, the period is shorter than the period required for the first ball entry section to be in the receiving state. gaming machines.

As shown in this feature, the period in which the second ball entering section is in the receiving state in the first switching mode is set so that the portion where the passage section is formed by the shutter of the second ball entering section in the predetermined flow path is Even if the period is shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through, the game ball located above the shutter will enter the first ball entry section when the first ball entry section switches to the receiving state. . Therefore, while increasing the number of game balls that move to the first ball entry section by shortening the period in which the ball is in the receiving state, it is possible to ensure balls entering the second ball entry section.

In addition, in the first switching mode, the period in which the second ball entry section is in the receiving state is set to be shorter than the period in which the first ball entry section is in the receiving state, so It becomes easier to understand from the behavior of these two ball entry parts that the situation is such that a ball entering the ball is likely to occur, and the player's attention can be easily directed to the ball entering the first ball entry part.

Feature E10. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A first acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires information function to execute acquisition processing),
a first storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the first acquisition means;
A first determining means that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the first storage means corresponds to predetermined determining information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 performs a lottery process); function) and
a first display section (for example, an operating port display section DR) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Prior to the determination being made by the first determining means or based on the determination being made by the first determining means, variable display of the picture is started in the first display section, and the result of the determination is Displaying a stop result corresponding to the above and ending the variable display of the symbols is regarded as one game session, and the variable display of the symbols for each game session is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. a first display control means (for example, a function of executing a game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the display of the first display unit so that the game is executed;
A special ball entry section (lower variable prize winning device) provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an accepting state where game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the receiving state. 65) and
The determination result by the first determination means corresponds to predetermined determination information, and the first display control means stops displaying the picture corresponding to the determination result, and the special ball entry section is A first switching control means (a function for executing opening/closing processing of the lower variable prize winning device 65 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching to the acceptance state,
The starting ball entry section is disposed on a predetermined channel (right route) heading toward the special ball entry section, and is in a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the predetermined channel can enter and from the receiving state. It is also possible to switch to a non-accepting state where it is difficult to enter the ball.
A second acquisition means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires prescribed information (value of the open random number counter C4) when a game ball passes through a prescribed passing portion (through gate 66) provided in the gaming area. function to obtain the value of open random number counter C4),
a second storage unit (power storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the second acquisition unit;
a second determining means (a support lottery is executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that determines whether or not to switch the starting ball entry section to the receiving state based on predetermined information stored in the second storage means; function) and
a second display section (through gate display section DS) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Prior to the determination by the second determination means or based on the determination made by the second determination means, variable display of the picture on the second display section is started, and the display corresponds to the determination result by the second determination means. a second display control means (a function for executing a pattern display process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for definitively displaying the selected pattern;
A second switching control means that switches the starting ball entry section to the accepting state when a symbol corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the second display section (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes a grand prize opening opening/closing process); functions) and
The switching control modes by the second switching control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the period in which the starting ball entry section is in the non-accepting state is shorter than the first switching mode. (high frequency support mode) is provided.
The second display control means is configured to select the second switching mode from a first specific period that is a sum of a variable display period and a fixed display period of the picture on the second display section when the second display section is in the first switching mode. The second specific period, which is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture on the second display section, is configured to be shorter when
A first predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is paid out based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section, and a second predetermined number larger than the first predetermined number is paid out based on the ball entering the special ball entry section. Equipped with a payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a number (for example, 10) of game balls,
The starting ball entry section has an opening (right operating port 63a) through which a plurality of game balls can pass at the same time, and a shutter (shutter 331) that opens and closes the opening, and when the shutter is placed in the closed position, The shutter is configured to enter the non-accepting state and enter the accepting state when the shutter is placed in an open position,
When the starting ball entry section is in the non-receiving state, a part of the rolling surface of the game ball in the predetermined flow path is formed by the shutter,
The period required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined channel to pass over the shutter is configured to be longer than the second specific period and shorter than the first specific period. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature E10, the period required for the game ball flowing down the predetermined channel to pass over the shutter is the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the symbol in the second switching mode (second specific period). It is longer than. Therefore, during the second switching mode, most of the game balls that reach the second ball entry section will enter the second ball entry section. That is, the game ball launched into the predetermined flow path during the second switching mode flows into the second ball entry section and is suppressed from entering the first ball entry section. On the other hand, the required period is shorter than the sum (first specific period) of the variable display period and the fixed display period of the picture in the first switching mode. Therefore, during the first switching mode, even if the second ball entry section is continuously switched to the receiving state, some of the game balls that have reached the shutter will pass through the second ball entry section and be transferred to the first ball entry state. Head to the club. In this way, during the first switching mode, the ball enters the relatively advantageous first ball entry section, while during the second switching mode, the ball entry into the first ball entry section is suppressed. This can make a clear difference in the progress of the game.

Here, in order to differentiate each switching mode and reduce the number of game balls (spills) that pass through the second ball entry section and head toward the first ball entry section during the second switching mode, it is recommended to shorten the specific period. good. However, if the specific period is simply shortened, it will be difficult to fire/stop the game according to the results displayed on the display (proceeding the game advantageously), and the purpose of providing the display will be diminished. Put it away. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress the above-described overflow while also preventing the variable display period and fixed display period of the picture from becoming extremely short. Thereby, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the game.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the above features E2 to E9 to this feature.

Further, each of the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E10 may be applied to the features A to D groups.

<Characteristic group F>
The following feature group F is based on the following: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature F1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of the picture is started on the display section, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is displayed. Displaying the symbols and ending the variable display of the symbols is regarded as one game round, and the symbols are displayed so that the symbols of each game round are variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
The game time control means has a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the symbol (a function of setting a variable display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (variable by MPU 602 of main controller 162) that shortens the variable display period of the symbols in the third normal gaming state to be shorter than the variable display period of the symbols in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of switching a display time table.

According to feature F1, the player's advantage increases by switching the gaming state in the order of first normal gaming state → second normal gaming state → third normal gaming state. Here, when shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the variable display period of the symbols is shortened, and the speed of progress of the game is increased. Thereby, the exhilaration of the game when promoted from the first normal game state to the third normal game state via the second normal game state can be suitably improved, and it can contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Regarding the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state, when comparing, for example, the increase or decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses, the second normal gaming state is better than the first normal gaming state. It is preferable to provide a difference so that the third normal gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state.

Feature F2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of the picture is started on the display section, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is displayed. Displaying the symbols and ending the variable display of the symbols is regarded as one game round, and the symbols are displayed so that the symbols of each game round are variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous for
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
If the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, the first normal gaming state passes through the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state. A first transition means for transition (a function that executes a process for transitioning to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
A second transition means for directly transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (a function for causing the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to the third normal gaming state),
The game time control means has a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the symbol (a function of setting a variable display time of the symbol on the actuating opening display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (variable by MPU 602 of main controller 162) that shortens the variable display period of the symbols in the third normal gaming state to be shorter than the variable display period of the symbols in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of switching a display time table.

According to feature F2, the player's advantage increases by switching the gaming state in the order of first normal gaming state → second normal gaming state → third normal gaming state. Here, when shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, the variable display period of the symbols is shortened, and the speed of progress of the game is increased. Thereby, the exhilaration of the game when promoted from the first normal game state to the third normal game state via the second normal game state can be suitably improved, and it can contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, although the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is configured to go through a special gaming state, it is configured to directly transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, when the speed of progress of the game is accelerated when transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the difference can be highlighted. With such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without making the difference in the variable display period between the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state excessively large. Therefore, with the configuration that changes the progress speed of the game, it is possible to prevent the variable display period of the symbols from becoming extremely short, and to ensure the opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the symbols.

Regarding the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, and the third normal gaming state, when comparing, for example, the increase or decrease in the number of balls held as the game progresses, the second normal gaming state is better than the first normal gaming state. It is preferable to provide a difference so that the third normal gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state.

Feature F3. When the first transition means shifts from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, a reference number setting means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sets the number of time saving times) sets a reference number of times (time saving number of times). function),
The second transition means is configured to transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state when the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. The gaming machine according to feature F2.

As shown in feature F3, if the configuration is such that the second normal gaming state shifts to the third normal gaming state as the reference number of times passes, it is possible to make it appear as if the game suddenly accelerates as the reference number of times passes. . With such a configuration, the effect shown in feature F2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F4. Switching means for switching the starting ball entry section to a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the receiving state. (Electric accessories 71) and
A switching control means (a function for executing electric support support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of the special information,
The variable display period setting means is configured to set the variable display period so that the larger the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the shorter the variable display period of the picture on the display section. and
The period shortening means is configured such that at least the variable display period of the symbol, which is set when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the third normal game state has reached the upper limit, 2. Shortening the variable display period by making it shorter than the variable display period of the picture that is set when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured as follows.

As shown in feature F4, if the starting ball entering section is configured to be switchable between an accepting state and a non-accepting state, it is possible to increase the frequency of entering game balls depending on the situation. By combining such a configuration with a configuration in which the variable display period becomes shorter as the number of special information stored increases, it becomes possible to suitably increase the speed of progress of the game. Here, the configuration includes a variable display period when the number of memories has reached the upper limit as a period reduction subject to the transition from the second normal gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player. For example, the speed of progress of the game can be increased in a situation where balls frequently enter the starting ball entry section. Therefore, the effect of increasing the progress speed of the game with the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F5. The game time control means has a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period of the symbol (a function for setting the fixed display time of the symbol in the actuating opening display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The stop display period setting means is configured to set the stop display period in the second normal gaming state and the stop display period in the third normal gaming state to be the same period,
The period shortening means is configured such that the variable display period of the symbol in the second normal game state is longer than the stop display period, and the variable display period of the symbol in the third normal game state is shorter than the stop display period. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the variable notation period is shortened in this manner.

If the second normal game state and the third normal game state have a common symbol stop display period (determined display period), and if the variable display period of the symbol is made longer or shorter than the stop display period, then the pattern The player who is paying attention can compare the lengths of the variable display periods based on the same standard (common stop notation period). Thereby, it is possible to clearly convey to the player that the progress speed of the game is increasing.

Feature F6. The period shortening means shortens the variable display period of the symbols in the second normal gaming state to be shorter than the variable display period of the symbols in the first normal gaming state, and reduces the variable display period of the symbols in the third normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the display period is configured to be shortened to be further shorter than the variable display period of the symbols in the second normal gaming state. .

As shown in feature F6, by configuring the game so that the progress speed of the game increases as the game status steps up to become more advantageous to the player, it is possible to suitably improve the player's sense of excitement. .

Feature F7. The starting ball entering section includes a first starting ball entering section (lower operating ball entering section 62) disposed on the first downstream path (left route) in the gaming area, and a first starting ball entering section (lower operating ball entering section 62) that is disposed on the first downstream path (left route) in the game area, and It has a second starting ball entry part (right side operating ball entry part 63) disposed on the second downstream route (right route),
The first downstream path and the second downstream path are such that game balls flowing down the first downstream path cannot enter the second starting ball entry section, and game balls flowing down the second downstream path cannot enter the second starting ball entry section. 1. It is formed so that the ball cannot enter the starting ball entry section,
In the first normal gaming state, by firing the game ball into the first downstream path, it becomes possible to proceed with the game more advantageously for the player compared to the case where the game ball is fired into the second downstream path. , in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, by firing the game ball into the second downstream path, the game is made more enjoyable compared to the case where the game ball is fired into the first downstream path. It is structured in such a way that it is possible to proceed in an advantageous manner to the
The variable display period setting means includes a first setting means for setting a variable display period of the symbol based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering section, and a first setting means for setting the variable display period of the symbol based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering section. a second setting means for setting a variable display period of the picture;
The first setting means sets the variable display period of the symbols in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state to be the same,
The second setting means constitutes the period shortening means, and is configured such that the variable display period of the symbol in the third normal game state is shorter than the variable display period of the symbol in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that the variable display period is shortened.

As shown in feature F7, by shortening the variable display period for the second starting ball entry area, which is the main ball entry destination in the third normal game state, the effect of shortening the period can be suitably exhibited. By making the variable display period the same in the second normal game state and the third normal game state for the first starting ball entry area, which is not the main ball entry destination, the game progress speed can be changed, making it more exhilarating. It is possible to prevent the control process related to the variable display of the picture from becoming excessively complicated.

Feature F8. A variable ball entry section (for example, a lower variable prize winning device 65);
A payout means (payout device 222) that pays out a predetermined number of game balls based on the ball entering the variable ball entry section,
By transitioning to the special gaming state by the special gaming state transition means, the variable ball entry section is switched to the receiving state,
The special game state includes a first special game state and a second special game state in which the variable ball entry section is in the receiving state for a shorter period of time than the first special game state,
The third normal game state is configured such that the probability of a ball entering the variable ball entry section when transitioning to the second special game state is higher than that in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, an increase in the number of balls held can be expected by repeating the transition to the second special game state from the third normal game state. Here, the pace of transition to the second special game state depends on the speed at which the game is played. As shown in feature F1 etc., by increasing this digestion speed in the third normal game state, the speed at which the number of balls in possession increases can be changed (fastened) without overly complicating various structures provided in the game area, etc. be able to.

Feature F9. The predetermined determination information includes first determination information (information corresponding to a jackpot result) and second determination information (information corresponding to a special win result),
The special gaming state transition means is means (main control) for shifting the gaming state to a first special gaming state as the special gaming state when the determination result by the determining means is a determination result corresponding to the first determination information. A function of executing transition processing to the first special gaming state in the MPU 602 of the device 162), and when the judgment result by the judgment means is a judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state. means for transitioning to the second special gaming state (a function for executing transition processing to the second special gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
At least in the third normal game state, the determination result by the determination means is more likely to be the determination result corresponding to the second determination information than the determination result corresponding to the first determination information,
The second special game state is set so that the period during which the special game state is maintained is shorter than the first special game state,
The period shortening means is configured to adjust the variable display period of the symbol when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information in the third normal gaming state to the second judgment information in the second normal gaming state. According to any one of features F1 to F8, the variable display period is configured to be shorter than the variable display period of the picture when a corresponding determination result is obtained. gaming machines.

If the transition to the second special game state occurs frequently in the third normal game state, the game progress may be delayed by securing the execution period of the second special game state. This may become a factor that prevents the speed of the game from increasing in the 3 normal game state. Therefore, by configuring the variable display period of the symbol to be shortened when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the second normal gaming state, it is possible to avoid repeating the transition to the second special gaming state. Even if there is, it is possible to increase the progress speed of the game and improve the exhilaration of the game.

Feature F10. Switching means for switching the starting ball entry section to a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the receiving state. (Electric accessories 71) and
A switching control means (a function for executing electric support support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The variable display period setting means is configured to set the variable display period so that the larger the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the shorter the variable display period of the picture,
The period shortening means determines that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the third normal gaming state has reached the upper limit, and the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information. The variable display period of the symbol that is set when the result is determined by the determination means when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit. According to feature F9, the variable display period is set to be shorter than the variable display period of the picture that is set when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information. Game machine.

As shown in this feature, by making it possible to switch the starting ball part between the accepting state and non-accepting state and securing the number of special information (for example, by keeping it near the upper limit), it is possible to increase the speed of progress of the game. . However, for example, in the case of transitioning to the second special gaming state every game, it is assumed that the progress of the game will be delayed as a result by securing the execution period of the second special gaming state. This is assumed to be a hindrance to improving the exhilaration of the game. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the variable display period is shortened when the number of stored special information reaches the upper limit, the effect shown in feature F1 etc. can be suitably exhibited. can.

Feature F11. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is made. is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is terminated as one game round, and the variable display of the symbols of each game round is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, open/close execution mode) that is advantageous for
Switching means for switching the starting ball entry section to a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the receiving state. (Electric accessories 71) and
A switching control means (a function for executing electric support support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance state is shorter than the first switching mode. mode) is provided.
The determination mode in which the determination means performs the determination is a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high, and a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high. A low probability mode is provided for
The normal gaming state includes a first normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching mode. mode and a third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode,
The game time control means has a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the symbol (a function for setting a variable display time of the symbol in the actuating opening display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (variable by MPU 602 of main controller 162) that shortens the variable display period of the symbols in the third normal gaming state to be shorter than the variable display period of the symbols in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of switching a display time table.

According to feature F11, the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entering section is reduced by transitioning from the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. However, in the third normal game state, the variable display period of the symbols is shortened compared to the second normal game state, so it is possible to suppress the progress speed of the game from slowing down due to a decrease in the frequency of ball entry. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature F12. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) that has a display section (for example, the operating port display section DR) and can variably display a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of the picture is started on the display section, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the judgment is displayed. Displaying the symbols and ending the variable display of the symbols is regarded as one game round, and the symbols are displayed so that the symbols of each game round are variably displayed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the display means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game time control means stops displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result, and the game state is changed to a normal game state by the player. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, open/close execution mode) that is advantageous for
Switching means for switching the starting ball entry section to a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering section and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the receiving state. (Electric accessories 71) and
A switching control means (a function for executing electric support support processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the switching means,
The switching control modes of the switching means by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the non-acceptance state is shorter than the first switching mode. mode) is provided.
The determination mode in which the determination means performs the determination is a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high, and a high probability mode in which the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively high. A low probability mode is provided for
The normal gaming state includes a first normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, a second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the high probability mode, and the first switching mode. mode and a third normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode,
If the determination result by the determination means in the first normal gaming state is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, the first normal gaming state passes through the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state. A first transition means for transition (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time reductions in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (the number of time reductions) when transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
A second transition means (MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. (a function of executing a process of transitioning to a third normal gaming state),
The game time control means has a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the symbol (a function for setting a variable display time of the symbol in the actuating opening display section by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The variable display period setting means is a period shortening means (variable by MPU 602 of main controller 162) that shortens the variable display period of the symbols in the third normal gaming state to be shorter than the variable display period of the symbols in the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of switching a display time table.

According to feature F12, the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entering section is reduced by transitioning from the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. However, in the third normal game state, the variable display period of the symbols is shortened compared to the second normal game state, so it is possible to suppress the progress speed of the game from slowing down due to a decrease in the frequency of ball entry. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

In particular, although the transition from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is configured to go through a special gaming state, it is configured to directly transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. Therefore, when the speed of progress of the game is accelerated when transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the difference can be highlighted. With such a configuration, the change can be easily understood without making the difference in the variable display period between the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state excessively large. Therefore, with the configuration that changes the progress speed of the game, it is possible to prevent the variable display period of the symbols from becoming extremely short, and to ensure the opportunity to visually confirm the variable display of the symbols.

Feature F13. comprising a payout means (payout device 222) that pays out a predetermined number of game balls based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section,
When a new ball enters the starting ball entry section under a situation where the number of stored special information has reached a preset upper limit, the acquired information storage means stores information about the entry ball into the starting ball entry section. It is configured so that it does not store special information based on
In the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the difference in the storage rate at which special information is stored by the acquired information storage means is smaller than the difference in the rate of balls entering the starting ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature F11 or feature F12, which is configured as follows.

According to feature F13, in the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state is given preferential treatment in that the number of game balls that are paid out based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section is larger. Ru. However, the number of special information acquired based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section can be made equal in the second normal game state and the third normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the differentiation between the two normal gaming states by shortening the variable display period described above from not functioning properly due to the third normal gaming state being inferior in terms of the number of special information as the game progresses.

Incidentally, in combination with feature F8, it is also possible to make the "payout means" shown in this feature and the "payout means" shown in feature F8 the same. In this case, the number of game balls that are put out based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section is the "first predetermined number", and the number of game balls that are put out based on the ball entering the variable ball entry section is the "second predetermined number". It is better to say "number".

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as ``The acquired information storage means prevents a new ball from entering the starting ball entering section under a situation where the number of stored special information has reached a preset upper limit. If this occurs, the special information based on the ball entry is not stored, and in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the second normal game state is better than the starting ball entry section. The gaming machine according to feature F11 or feature F12, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the number of pieces of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the same, while the frequency of ball entry increases. It is also possible to do this.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features F11 to F13 to features F1 to F10.

Further, each of the technical ideas shown in the features F1 to F13 may be applied to the features A group to E group.

<Feature G group>
The following characteristic group G is defined as ``a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature G1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A first special device that acquires first special information (for example, pending information regarding the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a first starting ball entry portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the gaming area; Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a first acquired information storage means (lower operation opening holding area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes the lottery process) that sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery such as a jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means; function) and
Second special information for acquiring second special information (retention information related to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the gaming area. an acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
a second acquired information storage means (right operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that performs a second lottery process (a lottery such as a jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means )and,
It has a first display section (for example, a display section DL for the lower operating port) and a second display section (for example, a display section DR for the right operating port), and a picture is displayed on each of the first display section and the second display section. A pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) that can be variably displayed;
Starting variable display of symbols on the first display section prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means. The first special stored in the first acquired information storage means is defined as one game round in which a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is ended. a first game round control means (for example, a function for executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means so that the symbols of each game round are displayed variably according to information; ,
Starting variable display of symbols on the second display section prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means. The second special stored in the second acquired information storage means is defined as one game round in which a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is ended. a second game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display means so that the symbols of each game time are variably displayed according to information; ,
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game time control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result. Based on the winning result and the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning result being stopped and displayed by the second game time control means, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, opening/closing execution mode). ) special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
It is configured such that a game round by the first game round control means and a game round by the second game round control means can be performed at the same time,
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode), a second normal gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with high probability mode and high frequency support mode), A third normal game state (normal game state compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) is provided,
In the third normal game state, the period required for a game round by the first game round control means is different from the period required for a game round by the first game round control means,
If the lottery result by the first lottery means is a predetermined winning result in the first regular game state, or if the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result, the first regular game is played. a first transition means (a function for executing processing for causing the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to transition to the second normal gaming state) from the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
a reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time savings in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time saving number) when transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
A second transition means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. (a function of executing a process of transitioning to a third normal gaming state),
The reference number of times corresponds to the first special information when the first special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means when the first transition means transitions to the second normal gaming state. A game machine characterized in that a game round to be played is defined to be completed before transition to the third normal game state.

According to feature G1, when a winning result occurs in the first normal gaming state and the transition to the second normal gaming state occurs, a reference number of times is set as the number of times the game can be played in the second normal gaming state. . Then, when the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times, a transition is made to the third normal gaming state. At this time, all the special information related to the first ball entry section will be consumed during the second normal game state, and carrying over to the third normal game state will be avoided. That is, in the third normal game state, the game round progresses based on the special information related to the second ball entry section. The game round corresponding to the first ball entry part and the game round corresponding to the second ball entry part are different in the required period (sum of the variable display period and fixed display period of the symbol), and the rhythm of game progress is different. It is possible. Therefore, by completely digesting the special information related to the first ball entry section before shifting to the third normal gaming state, it becomes possible to progress the game in the third normal gaming state in a rhythmic manner.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a first starting ball entry part (for example, the lower operating port 62a) provided in the game area" A first special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires first special information (for example, pending information regarding the lower operating port 62a) when a ball enters the ball. and a first acquired information storage means (lower operation opening holding area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means, and a storage area in the first acquired information storage means. a first lottery means (a function for executing the lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that sequentially performs the first lottery process (lotteries for jackpots, etc.) based on the first special information provided in the game area; A second special information acquisition means (main controller) that acquires second special information (holding information regarding the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters the second starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operation port 63a). A function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the device 162), and a second acquisition information storage means (a function for storing a plurality of pieces of second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means) (retention for the right operating port of the RAM 604). Area Rb) and a second lottery means (by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs a second lottery process (lotteries such as jackpots) based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. a function of executing a lottery process), a first display section (for example, a display section DL for a lower operating port) and a second display section (for example, a display section DR for a right operating port), A pattern display means (for example, the main display unit 81) capable of variably displaying a pattern on each of the two display sections, and prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or by the first lottery means. Based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed, variable display of the symbols is started in the first display section, a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed, and the variable display of the symbols is ended. controlling the symbol display means so that the symbols of each game cycle are displayed variably in accordance with the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means, with this as one game cycle; 1 game round control means (for example, a function of executing the game round control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or the second lottery means. Based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed, variable display of the symbols is started in the second display section, a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed, and the variable display of the symbols ends. The symbol display means is controlled so that the symbols of each game cycle are displayed variably in accordance with the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means, with each game cycle being determined as one game cycle. The lottery result by the second game time control means (for example, a function of executing the game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game time control means The symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game time control means. A special game state transition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 uses a special game state transition means to shift the game state to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). A normal gaming state corresponding to support mode) and a third normal gaming state (normal gaming state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode) are provided, and in the first normal gaming state, the first lottery means If the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result, or if the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result, the first normal game state passes through the special game state to the second normal game. A first transition means for transitioning to the second normal gaming state (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162), and a case of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state. , a reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time savings in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sets a reference number of times (time saving number), and the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state is set as the reference number of times. a second transition means for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (a function for executing processing for causing the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to shift to the third normal gaming state); and the reference number of times is determined when the first special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means when the first transition means transitions to the second normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that a game round corresponding to the information is defined to be completed before transition to the third normal gaming state. ” It is also possible.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A first special device that acquires first special information (for example, pending information regarding the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a first starting ball entry portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the gaming area; Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
a first acquired information storage means (lower operation opening holding area Ra of the RAM 604) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
A first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes the lottery process) that sequentially performs a first lottery process (a lottery such as a jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means; function) and
Second special information for acquiring second special information (retention information related to the right operating port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entry portion (for example, the right operating port 63a) provided in the gaming area. an acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
a second acquired information storage means (right operating port holding area Rb of the RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
A second lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that performs a second lottery process (a lottery such as a jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means )and,
It has a first display section (for example, a display section DL for the lower operating port) and a second display section (for example, a display section DR for the right operating port), and a picture is displayed on each of the first display section and the second display section. A pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) that can be variably displayed;
Starting variable display of symbols on the first display section prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means. The first special stored in the first acquired information storage means is defined as one game round in which a stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is ended. a first game round control means (for example, a function for executing game round control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means so that the symbols of each game round are displayed variably according to information; ,
Starting variable display of symbols on the second display section prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means or based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means. The second special stored in the second acquired information storage means is defined as one game round in which a stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the symbols is ended. a second game time control means (for example, a function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for controlling the pattern display means so that the symbols of each game time are variably displayed according to information; ,
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the first game time control means, or the lottery result by the second lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result. Based on the winning result and the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning result being stopped and displayed by the second game time control means, the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, opening/closing execution mode). ) special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
It is configured such that a game round by the first game round control means and a game round by the second game round control means can be performed at the same time,
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode) and a third normal gaming state (normal gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state are provided. and
If the lottery result by the first lottery means is a predetermined winning result in the first regular game state, or if the lottery result by the second lottery means is a predetermined winning result, the first regular game is played. a first transition means (a function for executing processing for causing the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 to transition to the second normal gaming state) from the special gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
a reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of time savings in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (time saving number) when transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state;
A second transition means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times. (a function of executing a process of transitioning to a third normal gaming state),
The reference number of times corresponds to the first special information when the first special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means when the first transition means transitions to the second normal gaming state. A game machine characterized in that a game round to be played is defined to be completed before transition to the third normal game state.

According to feature G2, when a predetermined winning result is obtained in the first normal gaming state and the transition to the second normal gaming state occurs, a reference number of times is set as the number of gaming times that can be executed in the second normal gaming state. be done. Then, when the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the reference number of times, a transition is made to the third normal gaming state. Here, the standard number of times is defined so that all the special information related to the first ball entry section can be digested during the second normal game state. Therefore, if the second normal game state changes to the third normal game state without a predetermined winning result, all special information related to the first ball entry section will be digested during the second normal game state. Therefore, carrying over to the third normal game state is avoided. That is, in the third normal game state, the game round progresses based on the special information related to the second ball entry section. In this way, by suppressing the intervention of the game round related to the first ball entry section, it becomes possible to progress the game in the third normal game state in a rhythmic manner.

Feature G3. The game according to feature G2, wherein at least in the third normal game state, the lottery by the second lottery means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery by the first lottery means. Machine.

In the configuration where the second ball entry section is given preferential treatment as shown in feature G3, by digesting the special information related to the first ball entry section before transitioning to the third normal game state, the third normal game It is possible to suppress a decline in the player's advantage in the situation.

Feature G4. The second transition means is configured such that the sum of the number of times the first game time control means executes the game time and the number of times the second game time control means performs the game time reaches the reference number of times in the second normal game state. Based on this, the second normal game state is configured to transition to the third normal game state,
The reference number of times is greater than the upper limit number of the first special information that can be stored in the first acquisition information storage means,
When the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit number at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game is executed based on the first special information. The total period of the variable display period and fixed display period of the symbols on the first display section for each game round is the shortest required period for the game round executed in the second normal game state to reach the reference number of times. The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be shorter than .

According to feature G4, whether or not the standard number of times has been reached is determined based on the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. The reference number of times is set to be greater than the storage upper limit number of the first special information, and the sum (total period) of the variable display period and fixed display period of the symbols on the first display section in the second normal game state is set to be greater than the storage upper limit number of the first special information. By making the period shorter than the minimum required period for the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state to reach the reference number of times, carryover of the first special information to the third normal gaming state can be suitably avoided. can. Thereby, the effect shown in feature G2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G5. The second transition means is configured such that the sum of the number of times the first game time control means executes the game time and the number of times the second game time control means performs the game time reaches the reference number of times in the second normal game state. Based on this, the second normal game state is configured to transition to the third normal game state,
The reference number of times is the upper limit number of first special information that can be stored in the first acquired information storage means, and the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means that reaches the upper limit number. and the maximum number of game times that can be executed by the second game time control means until each game time corresponding to the first special information is executed if the number of game times corresponding to the first special information is The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3.

According to feature G5, whether or not the standard number of times has been reached is determined based on the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. By setting the reference number of times to be greater than the sum of the storage upper limit number of the first special information and the number of game times corresponding to the second special information that can be executed until all the first special information is consumed, the third normal game state is set. It is possible to suitably avoid carrying over the first special information to. Thereby, the effect shown in feature G2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G6. The second transition means is configured such that the sum of the number of times the first game time control means executes the game time and the number of times the second game time control means performs the game time reaches the reference number of times in the second normal game state. Based on this, the second normal game state is configured to transition to the third normal game state,
In the second normal gaming state, if the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means reaches the upper limit number at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the first special information is For each game round, during the total period of the variable display period and fixed display period of the symbols on the first display section, the second game cycle control means causes the variable display and fixed display of the symbols on the second display section to be performed a predetermined number of times. It has a configuration that can be executed,
The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3, wherein the reference number of times is larger than the sum of the upper limit number and the predetermined number of times.

According to feature G6, whether or not the reference number of times has been reached is determined based on the sum of the game times related to the first special information and the game times related to the second special information. By setting the reference number of times to be greater than the sum of the storage upper limit number of the first special information and the number of game times corresponding to the second special information that can be executed until all the first special information is consumed, the third normal game state is set. It is possible to suitably avoid carrying over the first special information to. Thereby, the effect shown in feature G2 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature G7. A special ball entry section (for example, an upper variable winning part) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-receiving state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the receiving state. device 64);
A special ball entry section switching means (a function for executing opening/closing control by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for switching the special ball entry section to the receiving state in the special game state;
The gaming area includes a first downstream path (left route) in which the first starting ball entry section is provided, the second starting ball entry section, and the special ball entry section as a downstream path for the game ball to flow down. A second downstream path (right route) is provided, and in the first normal gaming state, the game ball is launched into the first downstream path rather than into the second downstream path. It is more advantageous for the player to do so, and in the second normal game state and the special game state, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball into the second downstream path than to shoot the game ball into the first downstream path. It is designed to be advantageous,
The first downstream path and the second downstream path are such that game balls flowing down the first downstream path cannot enter the second starting ball entry section, and game balls flowing down the second downstream path cannot enter the second starting ball entry section. 1. It is formed so that the ball cannot enter the starting ball entry section,
The special ball entry section is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting ball entry section in the second flow path, and when in the receiving state, allows game balls to enter the second starting ball entry section. It has a structure that prevents the flow from flowing down.
It is characterized by being equipped with an information display means (a function of displaying the remaining number of times on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75) for displaying information corresponding to the number of times the game has been played in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G6.

According to feature G7, the destination of the game ball is changed from the first downstream path to the second downstream path upon transition to the special gaming state. At this time, the special ball entering section enters the receiving state, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down to the second starting ball entering section. Thereby, the number of second special information stored at the start of the second normal gaming state can be reduced. Therefore, at the start of the second normal game state, it is possible to prevent both the game round related to the first special information and the game time related to the second special game state from repeating start/end. This is a configuration that displays information corresponding to the number of games played in the second normal game state (for example, the number of times played and the remaining number of times until the standard number of games is reached), and the display update speed is higher than the second normal game state. This is preferable in order to prevent the condition from becoming too rapid at the beginning.

Feature G8. The special game states include a first special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode compatible with 16R), and a second special game state (for example, an opening/closing execution mode compatible with 16R), and a second special game state in which the special ball entering section has fewer chances to switch to the receiving state than the first special game state. For example, an opening/closing execution mode compatible with 6R is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that the first lottery process by the first lottery means is configured such that a lottery result corresponding to the second special game state is more likely to be obtained than the first special game state. .

As shown in feature G8, when transitioning from the first normal game state to the special game state to the special game state, the launch destination of the game ball is changed from the first downstream path to the second downstream path. In this special game state, for example, the second special game state with fewer openings (number of rounds) is more likely to be selected, so the number of second special information stored before transitioning to the second normal game state is minimized as much as possible. can do.

Feature G9. A plurality of variable display periods of symbols are provided by the second game time control means, and when the number of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is less than a predetermined number, the variable The configuration is such that a predetermined variable display period is set as the display period,
The sum of the predetermined variable display period and fixed display period of symbols by the second game time control means is determined by the first game time control means in the first acquired information storage means upon transition to the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature G7 or feature G8, wherein the gaming machine is set to be longer than the total period of the variable display period and the fixed display period when the upper limit number of games are executed.

According to feature G9, if the number of stored second special information is less than a predetermined number when transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state, a predetermined variable display is performed as a variable display period. A period is set. All game rounds related to the first special information are executed during this predetermined variable display period. With such a configuration, at the start of the second normal gaming state, it is possible to suitably suppress repeating start/end of both the game round related to the first special information and the game time related to the second special gaming state. . This is preferable in order to achieve the effects shown in feature G7 and the like.

Feature G10. The second starting ball entry section is switchable between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter, and a non-receiving state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the receiving state,
A second starting ball entering section switching means for switching the second starting ball entering section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state (a function for executing opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). ,
The switching control modes of the second starting ball entering section by the second starting ball entering section switching means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second starting ball entering section that is lower than the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) is provided in which the period in which the device is in the non-acceptance state is short;
In the second normal gaming state, the second switching mode is set as the switching control mode,
The second game time control means controls the variation of the picture pattern on the second display section by reducing the number of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means in the second normal game state. It is configured so that the display period is short,
The first game time control means is configured to control, in the second normal game state, a variable display period of the symbols on the first display section regardless of the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G9, characterized in that the period is constant and shorter than the first normal gaming state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal game state, the switching control mode of the second starting ball entering section becomes the second switching mode, thereby increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entering section. As a result, in each game round related to the second starting ball entry section, the same or similar variable display period is set as the variable display period of the symbol, and the game round progresses at a constant rhythm and at a good tempo. Become.

Here, if the first special information remains at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game times related to the first special information will have the same variable display period, so the first special information The game sessions will also be played at a good pace. Thereby, the effects shown in feature 7 and the like can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature G11. In the second normal game state, the variable display period of the symbol set by the first game time control means is configured to be shorter than the variable display period of the symbol set by the second game time control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G10.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first special information is stored at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game rounds related to the first special information are quickly consumed. Become. This makes it possible to minimize the reference number of times set as a transition condition to the third normal gaming state, contributing to an improvement in the degree of freedom in setting the reference number of times.

Feature G12. In the second normal game state, the fixed symbol display period set by the first game round control means is configured to be shorter than the fixed symbol display period set by the second game round control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G11.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first special information is stored at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state, the game rounds related to the first special information are quickly consumed. Become. This makes it possible to minimize the reference number of times set as a transition condition to the third normal gaming state, contributing to an improvement in the degree of freedom in setting the reference number of times.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in features G2 to G12 to feature G1.

Further, each of the technical ideas shown in the features G1 to G12 may be applied to the features A to F groups.

<Feature H group>
The following characteristic group H is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on the player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature H1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Provided in the gaming area and switchable between a first state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a second state (closed state) in which entering the ball is more difficult than the first state. a starting ball entry part (right side operating ball entry part 63);
ball entry detection means (detection sensor 391d) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry section;
Valid period setting means for setting the valid period of ball entry into the starting ball entering section when the starting ball entering section switches from the second state to the first state (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sets the valid period of the ball entering the starting ball entering section). functions to be set) and
Privilege awarding means for awarding a privilege to the player when a game ball is detected by the ball entry detection means during the validity period (for example, a function of acquiring reservation information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 and a function of the payout device 222) function to pay out prize balls),
a passage section (through gate 66) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area can pass;
a predetermined information acquisition means (a function for acquiring the power reserve in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires predetermined information (power reserve) based on the passing of the game ball through the passage portion;
It is equipped with a predetermined information storage means (power storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means,
a lottery means (a function for executing a support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that performs a lottery based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means;
a pattern display means (main display unit 81) having a display section (through gate display section DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Prior to the lottery being conducted by the lottery means or based on the lottery being conducted by the lottery means, a variable display of a picture is performed on the display section, and after the variable display, the result of the lottery is responded to. a display control means (for example, a function for executing display control of the through gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
When the lottery by the lottery means results in a winning result, the starting ball entry section is switched from the second state to the first state, and under a predetermined condition (for example, opening time) in the first state. a switching control means (a function for executing opening/closing control of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the starting ball entering part from the first state to the second state when the following (progress) is established; Equipped with
The validity period setting means sets the validity period so that the validity period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.7 sec) even after the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state. It is configured to
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the starting ball entry section is switched from the first state to the second state, the display control means is configured to display the information before the expiration of the validity period if the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means. (a function for causing the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 to start variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display section DS) to start variable display of the pattern on the display section. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature H1, when the starting ball entry section is switched from the first state to the second state, the validity period continues for a predetermined period even after switching to the second state. Thereby, for example, game balls that flow into the starting ball entry section at the same time as the switching to the second state can also be eligible for benefits. This is preferable in order to avoid becoming a factor that reduces the player's desire to play, such as not being able to obtain the benefits that should have been obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the predetermined information is stored before the starting ball entry section switches to the second state, the variable display of the picture on the display section starts without waiting for the expiration of the validity period. be done. In this way, if the configuration is such that the variable display of the picture starts during the valid period and the valid period and the variable display period overlap at least in part, the starting ball entry section can be changed from the first state to the second state to the first state. In order to quickly advance the game by switching the state, it is possible to prevent the variable display period of the symbols from becoming extremely short. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in the present feature, "the display control means, when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the starting ball entry section is switched from the first state to the second state, Regarding "variable display starting means for starting variable display of the picture on the display section before the expiration of the validity period", "the display control means changes the starting ball entry section from the first state to the second state" "variable display start means for starting variable display of the picture on the display section before the predetermined period elapses if the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means" It is also possible.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A start that is provided in the gaming area and can be switched to a first state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter, and a second state (closed state) in which entering the ball is more difficult than the receiving state. A ball entry part (right side operating ball entry part 63),
ball entry detection means (detection sensor 391d) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry section;
Valid period setting means for setting the valid period of ball entry into the starting ball entering section when the starting ball entering section switches from the second state to the first state (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 sets the valid period of the ball entering the starting ball entering section). functions to be set) and
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring pending information in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information when a ball entering is detected by the ball entering detection means during the validity period;
a first lottery means (a function for executing a jackpot and special win lottery in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that performs a lottery based on the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
A special game state transition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 switches to an opening/closing execution mode) for shifting to a special game state more advantageous to the player than normal when a winning result is obtained in the lottery by the first lottery means. function to perform migration processing),
a passage portion (through gate 66) provided in the gaming area through which game balls flowing down the gaming area can pass;
a predetermined information acquisition means (a function for acquiring the power reserve in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that acquires predetermined information (power reserve) based on the passing of the game ball through the passage portion;
a predetermined information storage unit (power storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) that stores the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition unit;
a second lottery means (a function for executing a support lottery in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that performs a lottery based on the predetermined information stored in the predetermined information storage means;
a pattern display means (main display unit 81) having a display section (through gate display section DS) and capable of variably displaying a pattern on the display section;
Before the lottery is conducted by the second lottery means or based on the lottery being conducted by the second lottery means, variable display of symbols is started in the symbol display means, and the result of the lottery is A display control means (for example, a function for executing display control of the through gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for definitively displaying the corresponding picture;
If the lottery by the second lottery means results in a winning result, the starting ball entry section is switched from the second state to the first state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied under the situation where the first state is in the first state. switching control means (a function for executing opening/closing control of the electric accessory 71 by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the starting ball entry part from the first state to the second state when
The validity period setting means is configured to set the validity period so that the validity period continues for a predetermined period even after the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state. ,
If the predetermined information is stored when the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state, the display control means displays information on the display section before the expiration of the validity period. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable display start means (a function for causing the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 to start variable display of the symbols on the through gate display section DS) for starting variable display of the symbols.

According to feature H2, when the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state, the valid period continues for a predetermined period even after switching to the second state. Thereby, for example, game balls that flow into the starting ball entry section at the same time as the switching to the second state can also be eligible for benefits. This is preferable in order to avoid becoming a factor that reduces the player's desire to play, such as not being able to obtain the benefits that should have been obtained. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, if the predetermined information is stored before the starting ball entry section switches to the second state, the variable display of the picture on the display section starts without waiting for the expiration of the validity period. be done. In this way, if the configuration is such that the variable display of the picture starts during the valid period and the valid period and the variable display period overlap at least in part, the starting ball entry section can be changed from the first state to the second state to the first state. In order to quickly advance the game by switching the state, it is possible to prevent the variable display period of the symbols from becoming extremely short. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in this feature, "the display control means, when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state, Regarding "variable display starting means for starting variable display of the picture on the display section before the expiration of the validity period", "the display control means changes the starting ball entry section from the first state to the second state" If the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means when switching to the predetermined information storage means, variable display starting means starts variable display of the picture on the display section before the predetermined period elapses. It is also possible.

Feature H3. It has a ball passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the entrance part (right operating port 63a) of the starting ball entry part to the detection area (detection area DE) by the ball entry detection means,
According to feature H1 or feature H2, the predetermined period is a period determined based on the period required for the game ball to move from the entrance portion to the detection area (detection area DE). Game machine.

As shown in feature H3, by setting the above-mentioned predetermined period based on the period required for the game ball to move from the entrance part of the starting ball entrance part to the detection area, the predetermined period can be set in order to secure the players' profits. (validity period) can be prevented from becoming excessively long. This is a preferable configuration in order to suppress fraudulent activities related to the starting pitching section while ensuring profit security as shown in feature H1 and the like.

Feature H4. The variable display start means is configured to display the information in the case where the predetermined information is not stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state, and during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that when the predetermined information is newly acquired, variable display of the symbols is started during the predetermined period.

In a configuration in which the predetermined information is acquired based on the passing of the game ball through the passage section, the predetermined information is not necessarily acquired and stored before the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state. , a case may occur in which the predetermined information is acquired after switching to the second state. Therefore, if a predetermined information is newly acquired during a predetermined period, the variable display of the picture is started during the predetermined period.For example, the variable display of the picture is started after the elapse of the predetermined period. It can contribute to smoother game progress compared to the previous version.

Feature H5. When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state, the variable display start means is configured to display a variable display before the validity period has elapsed. According to any one of features H1 to H4, the variable display of the picture is started at the timing when the starting ball entry section switches from the second state to the first state. gaming machines.

As shown in feature H5, if the predetermined information is stored before the starting ball entering section switches to the first state, the variable display of the picture starts at the timing when the starting ball entering section switches to the first state. It will be done. By making good use of the predetermined period in this way, it is possible to achieve the effect of quickly switching to the next second state while ensuring a variable display period for the picture.

Feature H6. The display control means includes a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern on the display section (a function for setting a variable display period of the pattern on the through gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). have,
The switching control modes of the starting ball entry section by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high-frequency support mode) in which the period of the second state is shorter than that of the first switching mode. Frequency support mode) is provided.
Feature H5 is characterized in that when the second switching mode is selected, the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means is configured to be shorter than the predetermined period. gaming machines.

As shown in feature H6, in the second switching mode in which the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section increases, the variable display period is made shorter than the predetermined period and the fixed display of the symbol is started during the predetermined period. , the following effects can be expected. In other words, with the configuration in which the starting ball entry section switches to the first state after changing the pattern from variable display to confirmed display on the display section, it is possible to start the confirmed display before the end of the predetermined period (valid period), and the start It is possible to shorten the period until the ball entry section is switched back to the first state.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is defined as ``a case where the display control means starts the variable display section of the picture on the display section before the elapse of the predetermined period, and the variable display period elapses during the predetermined period.'' In this case, the gaming machine according to feature H5 is configured to start displaying the picture on the display section during the predetermined period.

Feature H7. The display control means includes a fixed display period setting means (a function for setting a fixed display time of a pattern on the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a fixed display period of the pattern on the display section. have,
The variable display starting means is configured to display the starting ball entering section when the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entering section switches from the first state to the second state. The display unit is configured to start variable display of the picture on the display unit at the timing of switching from the second state to the first state,
The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein in the second switching mode, the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is defined to match the predetermined period.

According to feature H7, since the confirmation display can be ended at the timing when the validity period has elapsed, if you win the lottery related to the predetermined information, the starting ball entry section can be immediately turned off as the validity period has elapsed. It becomes possible to switch to 1 state. As a result, the effects shown in feature H1 etc. can be suitably exhibited.

Feature H8. The display control means includes a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern on the display section (a function for setting a variable display period of the pattern on the through gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162). have,
The switching control modes of the starting ball entry section by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the second state is shorter than the first switching mode. Frequency support mode) is provided.
Features H1 to H7 are configured such that when the first switching mode is selected, the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means is equal to or longer than the predetermined period. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

In the first switching mode, the frequency of balls entering the starting ball entry section is lower than in the second switching mode. In such a state, by setting the variable display period to a predetermined period or more, it is possible to lengthen the interval period when the starting ball entry section is continuously switched to the first state. This is preferable in order to differentiate the first switching mode and the second switching mode.

Feature H9. It is equipped with a predetermined information storage means (power storage area 633 in the RAM 604 of the main controller 162) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the predetermined information acquisition means,
The display control means includes a variable display period setting means for setting a variable display period of the pattern on the display section (a function for setting a variable display period of the pattern on the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). , a fixed display period setting means (a function for setting a fixed display time of a pattern on the through-gate display section DS by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a fixed display period of the pattern on the display section,
has
When the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined information storage means before the starting ball entry section switches from the first state to the second state, the variable display start means is configured to display a variable display before the validity period has elapsed. The variable display of the picture is started at the timing when the starting ball entry section switches from the second state to the first state,
The starting ball entry section has an upwardly open entrance portion (right operating port 63a) and a shutter (shutter 331) that covers the entrance portion, and when the shutter is placed in a closed position, the starting ball entry portion When the section is in the second state, the shutter forms a bottom surface of a spherical passage that crosses above the inlet section, and the shutter is displaced from the closed position to the open position and enters the first state. It is configured such that the game ball on the shutter falls into the entrance part,
The switching control modes of the starting ball entry section by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode (high frequency support mode) in which the period of the first state is shorter than that of the first switching mode. Frequency support mode) is provided.
In the first switching mode, the variable display period and the fixed display period are set such that the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is longer than the predetermined period,
In the second switching mode, the variable display period and the fixed display period are set such that the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period is the same length as the predetermined period,
The period required for the game ball to pass over the shutter is shorter than the sum of the variable display period and the fixed display period in the first switching mode, and is shorter than the sum of the variable display period in the second switching mode and the fixed display period. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be longer than the sum of the fixed display period.

In the configuration shown in feature H9, when the shutter moves from the closed position to the open position, the game ball launched into the starting ball entering section enters the starting ball entering section. In a configuration in which the shutter forms the bottom (rolling surface) of the ball path, the game balls located on the shutter fall into the starting ball entrance part (entrance part) when the shutter moves to the open position. Here, the period during which the shutter is maintained in the closed position is longer or shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass over the shutter, thereby creating a difference in the frequency of ball entry, and switching between the first switching mode and the second switching mode. It is possible to achieve differentiation with Here, in order to make it possible to visually check the design, it is necessary to secure a certain amount of variable display period and fixed display period, but securing these periods will strengthen the restrictions on the period, which is the case for each mode mentioned above. This can be a major constraint on establishing differences. In this regard, if the technical idea shown in feature H1 is applied to the configuration shown in this feature, the progress speed of the game can be changed in order to diversify the games, but the visibility of the symbols will be reduced due to this. can be suppressed.

Note that the technical ideas shown in Features H1 to H9 may be applied to Features A to G.

<Feature J group>
The following characteristic group J is that ``a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a firing operation by the player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature J1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (actuating opening display parts DL, DR) so that the time play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
Information notification means (a function of displaying the counter image CF on the display screen 75a) for notifying information (counter image CF) indicating the number of remaining games until the transition to the third normal gaming state in the second normal gaming state; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J1, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state is higher than that in the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, information indicating the number of remaining games until the transition to the third normal gaming state is announced, and by indicating the path to the third normal gaming state, the expectation is that the transition to the third normal gaming state will occur. It is possible to encourage players to pay more attention to the game.

Feature J2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (actuating opening display parts DL, DR) so that the time play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets the upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
In the second normal gaming state, a first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state to which the number of games in the second normal gaming state will be transferred to when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit is notified. 1 notification means (a function of displaying the target image TF on the display screen 75a);
In the second normal gaming state, a second notification means (display screen 75a) for notifying second information (counter image CF) indicating the number of remaining games until the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state. 1. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of displaying a counter image CF on a screen.

According to feature J2, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state is higher than that in the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. Diversifying the games in this way can suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the level of attention to the games, but it is assumed that the complexity of the games will likely cause confusion for players. There is a concern that this will hinder the ability to achieve the effect of increasing attention. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal gaming state, information indicating the number of remaining gaming sessions and information indicating the transition destination when the remaining gaming sessions are exhausted are displayed, respectively. In other words, by displaying the goal and the distance to the goal, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature J3. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (actuating opening display parts DL, DR) so that the time play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
In the second normal gaming state, a first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state to which the number of games in the second normal gaming state is transferred when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit is notified. 1 notification means (a function of displaying the target image TF on the display screen 75a);
In the second normal gaming state, a second notification means (display screen 75 a function to display the counter image CF),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J3, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. Diversifying the games in this way can suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the level of attention to the games, but it is assumed that the complexity of the games will likely cause confusion for players. There is a concern that this will hinder the ability to achieve the effect of increasing attention. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, by displaying the target game state and the journey to the target in the second normal game state, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed and attention to the game is increased. The effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature J4. The game according to feature J2 or feature J3, wherein the second notification means is configured to notify the second information in parallel with the notification of the first information by the first notification means. Machine.

As shown in this feature, the second information indicating the route is notified in parallel to the first information indicating the goal, and by suppressing the first information from being displayed alone, the second normal It is possible to reduce the chance of being misunderstood that the current gaming state is the third normal gaming state based on the first information displayed in the gaming state.

Feature J5. A display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) is provided,
The first notification means and the second notification means are configured to notify the first information and the second information by displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen,
The first notification means has means for changing the display mode (for example, size, color, brightness, etc.) of the first information as the number of games played in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit;
The second notification means is characterized by having means for changing the display content (for example, the number displayed) of the second information as the number of games played in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4.

Regarding the second information indicating the number of remaining game rounds (strokes), the display content is updated in accordance with the progress of the game rounds, thereby making it clear that the transition to the third normal game state is approaching. On the other hand, the display mode of the first information indicating the third normal gaming state, which is the goal, is changed according to the progress of the game, so that it is indicated that the transition to the third normal gaming state is approaching. The functions shown can be suitably strengthened.

Feature J6. A display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a) is provided,
The first notification means and the second notification means are configured to notify the first information and the second information by displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen,
Changing means (notification/effect control device 143 and The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of changing the area ratio in the display control device 710.

In the configuration in which the first information and the second information are displayed, by changing the area ratio of the display area of each information, it is possible to change the target of attention as the game round is completed. Thereby, even if the amount of information provided increases, it is possible to suitably prevent this from becoming a factor that causes confusion for the player.

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to feature J6, wherein the changing means changes the display area of the first information when the second information becomes predetermined second information set in advance.

The second information will be updated as the playing time in the second normal gaming state progresses. Here, if the configuration is such that the display area of the first information is changed when the second information becomes predetermined second information, the two pieces of information can be associated with each other. With such a configuration, even when the user is paying close attention to the first information, it is possible to easily understand that the update of the second information has progressed to some extent. For example, if the second information is a counter whose value is updated as the game progresses, the display area of the first information may be changed when the counter value reaches a predetermined value.

Feature J8. The display area of the second information can be changed to a first area and a second area larger than the first area,
Feature J6 or feature characterized in that the changing means changes the display area of the first information when the display area of the second information changes from one of the first area and the second area to the other. A gaming machine described in J7.

If the configuration is such that the display area of the second information is changed in conjunction with switching of the display area of the second information (first area/second area), it is possible for the player to understand that the first information and the second information are related to each other. This makes it easier to encourage understanding that

Feature J9. The display area of the second information can be changed to a first area and a second area larger than the first area,
The display area of the first information can be changed to a third area and a fourth area larger than the third area,
The changing means changes the display area of the second information from the first area to the second area and then changes it back to the first area, and changes the display area of the first information from the third area to the second area. The gaming machine according to any one of features J6 to J8, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the change to the third region is not performed after changing to the fourth region.

When displaying the first information and the second information on the display screen, the amount of information to be displayed increases, which increases the area occupied by the display screen. Although it is effective to enlarge the display area of information in order to improve the degree of attention to the information, expanding the display area causes the occupied area to further increase. This is assumed to be a factor that takes up space on the display screen for displaying other information. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the size of the display area for the first information indicating the goal is increased to emphasize that the goal is approaching, while the second information indicating the journey is temporarily displayed. By promoting the update of information by expanding the display area, it is possible to suitably prevent the occupied area on the display screen from becoming excessively large in order to perform the notification function.

Feature J10. The changing means includes means for changing the display area of the first information and means for changing the display area of the second information, and the change means changes the display area of the first information and the display area of the second information. The gaming machine according to feature J6, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute the changes at different timings.

In a configuration in which the first information and the second information are displayed together, there is a concern that the need to view these two pieces of information simultaneously will increase the burden on the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the timing of changing the display area can be made different, it becomes possible to guide the line of sight to the information of interest, which can contribute to suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature J11. The second notification means is configured to start notification of the second information when transitioning to the second normal gaming state, and end the notification when transitioning to the third normal gaming state,
The first notification means is configured to start notification of the first information when transitioning to the second normal gaming state, and continue the notification even after transitioning to the third normal gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J10.

According to feature J11, the first information and the second information are announced in the second normal state, and the notification of the first information ends by transitioning to the third normal gaming state, whereas the notification of the second information is It will be continued. In this way, by continuing to notify the second information even in the third normal game state, it becomes possible to clearly convey to the player what the second information indicates.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in feature J3 to feature J11 to feature J1. In this case, it is preferable that the "information notification means" shown in feature J1 be the same as the "second notification means" shown in feature J3, etc.

Feature J12. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (actuating opening display parts DL, DR) so that the time play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
In the second normal gaming state, first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state to which the game will be transferred when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit; Notifying means (displaying the target image TF and the counter image CF on the display screen 75a A gaming machine characterized by having the following functions:

According to feature J12, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state is higher than that in the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. Diversifying the games in this way can suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the level of attention to the games, but it is assumed that the complexity of the games will likely cause confusion for players. There is a concern that this will hinder the ability to achieve the effect of increasing attention. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, in the second normal gaming state, information indicating the number of remaining gaming sessions and information indicating the transition destination when the remaining gaming sessions are exhausted are displayed, respectively. In other words, by displaying the goal and the distance to the goal, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed and the effect of increasing attention to the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature J13. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing game time control processing in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the result notification means (actuating opening display parts DL, DR) so that the time play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
In the second normal gaming state, first information (target image TF) indicating the third normal gaming state, which is a transition destination when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit; Notifying means (displaying the target image TF and the counter image CF on the display screen 75a A gaming machine characterized by having the following functions:

According to feature J13, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state is higher than that in the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. Diversifying the games in this way can suppress the monotony of the games and contribute to increasing the level of attention to the games, but it is assumed that the complexity of the games will likely cause confusion for players. There is a concern that this will hinder the ability to achieve the effect of increasing attention. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, by displaying the target game state and the journey to the target in the second normal game state, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is suppressed and attention to the game is increased. The effect can be suitably exhibited.

Note that it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in Feature J4 to Feature J11 to Feature J12 and Feature J13. In this case, the "first notification means" and "second notification means" shown in features J4 to J11 may be the same as the "notification means" shown in this feature.

Further, each of the technical ideas shown in the features J1 to J13 may be applied to the features A to H groups.

<Feature K group>
The following characteristic group K is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a firing operation by the player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature K1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing a game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (operation opening display parts DL, DR) so that the play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
Display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
When in the second normal gaming state, a suggestive image (target image TF and constraint image LF) suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed on the display screen. Display control means (notification/presentation control device 143 and display control device 710) that performs display control of the display means,
The display control means is configured to change the display range of the suggestion image on the display screen as the number of games in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit (the target image TF is controlled by the notification/effect control device 143). and a function of changing the display range of the restraint image LF).

According to feature K1, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state exceeds that of the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, a suggestion image suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed, and the display range of this suggestion image is changed as the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to players who are expecting a transition to the third normal gaming state that they are approaching the third normal gaming state, and encourage them to increase their attention to the game. can.

The configuration shown in this feature is defined as "a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a starting entry ball section (for example, right operating port 63a) provided in the game area". A special information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (pending information) when a ball enters the ball, and special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. an acquired information storage means (holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604) capable of storing the acquired information, and a determination as to whether special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information). A pattern that has a determination means (a function of executing a lottery process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) and a display section (for example, an actuation opening display section DR) that sequentially performs A display means (for example, the main display unit 81) and a variable display of the picture are started in the picture display means prior to the decision being made by the decision means or based on the decision being made by the decision means. and displaying a stop result corresponding to the result of the determination and ending the variable display of the symbols is regarded as one game round, and each game round is determined according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function for executing a game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the picture display means so that the picture symbols are displayed variably, and a determination result by the determination means that The game state is changed to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (e.g. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) is provided, and the normal game state is a first normal game state (low probability mode and a first normal gaming state compatible with the low-frequency support mode), and a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state (a second normal gaming state compatible with the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode). ), and a third normal gaming state (a third normal gaming state compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state, and the special gaming state is a second normal gaming state transition means (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the second normal gaming state; , an upper limit setting means (MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal game state when the second normal game state transition means moves to the second normal game state. a function of setting the number of time saving times in the second normal gaming state) and a function of shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit. 3 normal game state transition means (a function for executing processing for transition to the third normal game state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) and a display screen (display screen 75a), and the second normal game state Suggestion image display means (symbol display device 75) that displays a suggestion image (target image TF and restraint image LF) suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state on the display screen when Display range changing means for changing the size of the display range of the suggestion image on the display screen as the number of games in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit (a function of changing the display range of an image LF). ” It is also possible.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing a game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (on the actuating opening display parts DL and DR) so that the play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to a special state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a game state (for example, opening/closing execution mode),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
Display means (design display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
Display control means (notification/presentation control device 143 and display control device 710) that performs display control of the display means,
The display control means includes:
means for displaying on the display screen a pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determination means;
Means for displaying a suggestion image (target image TF and constraint image LF) suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state on the display screen when the second normal gaming state is in the second normal gaming state;
As the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit, the display range of the suggestion image (transition destination display area TE) and the display range of the symbol (second variable display area ME2 and third variable display area) on the display screen change. It has a display range changing means (a function of changing the display range of the target image TF and the constraint image LF in the notification/effect control device 143) that changes the display range so that the area ratio with the area ME3) changes. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature K2, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state is higher than that in the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, a suggestion image suggesting a transition to the third normal gaming state is displayed, and the display range of this suggestion image is changed as the number of games in the second normal gaming state approaches the upper limit. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to players who are expecting a transition to the third normal gaming state that they are approaching the third normal gaming state, and encourage them to increase their attention to the game. can.

On the display screen, not only the suggestion image but also a pattern corresponding to the determination result is displayed. In such a configuration in which the suggestion image and the pattern are displayed on the display screen, by changing the area ratio between the suggestion image and the pattern, the suggestion function can be strengthened by cooperation between the two.

Feature K3. The display range changing means changes the display range of the suggestion image to a predetermined display range (for example, a maximum display range) when the number of games in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit and shifts to the third normal game state. a first changing means for expanding the display range of the suggestion image so that the number of games in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit, and a second changing means for gradually expanding the display range of the suggestion image within a range not exceeding the predetermined display range; The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, characterized by having a changing means.

As shown in feature K3, if the suggested image is gradually enlarged to approach the maximum display, the suggested image becomes more noticeable as the number of games approaches the upper limit, and the attention improvement effect shown in feature K1 etc. is achieved. It can be made to perform suitably.

If the configuration shown in this feature is applied to a type of gaming machine that displays a pattern, etc. that corresponds to the judgment result on the display screen, the player's attention will be directed to the suggested image, and the pattern that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information will be displayed. Even if the display is repeated, it can be suppressed from becoming a factor that reduces the desire of the player who plays the game in the expectation that the result will be a determination result corresponding to predetermined determination information.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to feature K3, wherein the second changing means enlarges the suggestion image so that the display range of the suggestion image before the change is included in the display range of the suggestion image after the change. .

As shown in feature K4, if the display range after change includes the display range before change, the amount of eye movement of the player who is gazing at the suggested image in the process of approaching the upper limit can be reduced. I can do it. This is advantageous in reducing the chance of missing a change in the suggested image. If the configuration is configured to reduce the chances of being missed in this way, there is no need to increase the amount of change in the size of the suggestion image excessively, and even if an upper limit is set for the size of the suggestion image, the suggestion image will not be overlooked. The number of times the image size is changed can be suitably increased.

Feature K5. The display screen is configured to display a pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determination means,
The display range changing means is configured to gradually expand the display range of the suggestion image as the number of games in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit,
A feature characterized in that the display control means includes means for hiding the picture when expanding the display range of the suggestion image to a range that includes at least a part of the display range of the picture. The gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K4.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in a configuration in which a pattern corresponding to the determination result is displayed on the display screen, by making it appear as if the suggested image has invaded the display range of the pattern, the state is shifted to the third normal game state. This can suitably suggest that the transition is near. As already explained, one of the requirements for transition to the third normal gaming state is that the determination result does not correspond to the predetermined determination information. However, it is feared that for players who are expecting to receive predetermined judgment information, emphasizing that the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information may be a factor that reduces their desire to play. Ru. Therefore, when the game progresses to a certain extent in the second normal game state, the display range of the symbol is eroded by the suggestion image and the symbol is hidden, thereby emphasizing that the determination result does not correspond to the predetermined determination information. This can be avoided, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

Feature K6. Features K1 to K5 are characterized in that the display control means has means for setting a game round in which the display range of the suggestion image is changed based on the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

In a configuration where the second normal game state ends when the upper limit is reached, the opportunity to expand the display range is influenced by the upper limit. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by predetermining the game round in which the display range is to be changed according to the upper limit, it becomes possible to appropriately change the display range (enlarged display).

Feature K7. The suggestion image includes a character part (target image TF) indicating the third normal game state and a plurality of decorative parts (restricted image LF) displayed so as to overlap the character part,
According to any one of features K1 to K6, the display control means includes a number changing means for changing the number of decorative parts in accordance with a change in the display range of the suggestion image. gaming machines.

As shown in this feature, by having a configuration in which the number of decorative parts attached to a character image is changed according to changes in the display range, even if the difference between before and after the change in the display range is small, This reduces the chance that something that has been done will be overlooked. This is preferable in order to diversify the manner in which the display range can be changed.

Feature K8. The display range changing means is configured to gradually expand the display range of the suggestion image as the number of games in the second normal game state approaches the upper limit,
The decorative portion is an image configured such that the player recognizes that the decorative portion is obstructing enlargement of the character portion;
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the number changing means is configured to reduce the number of decorative parts in accordance with the expansion of the display range of the suggestion image.

As shown in this feature, as the display range expands, by reducing the number of decorative parts configured to be recognized as hindering expansion, it is possible to suitably encourage understanding that the upper limit is approaching. I can do it.

Feature K9. Any one of features K1 to K8, characterized in that the display range changing means is configured to change the display range in accordance with the start of the game repeat operation by the play time control means. The gaming machine described in .

When changing the display range as shown in feature K1 etc., it is preferable to secure a certain period of time for the change in order to promote the change. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the display range is changed at the start of the game repeat operation as shown in this feature, it is possible to use the operation period of the game repeat operation as a period for changing the display range, which is a practically preferable configuration. can be realized.

Feature K10. The gaming machine according to feature K9, wherein the display range changing means changes the display range of the suggestion image regardless of the determination result by the determining means in a game round in which the display range of the suggestion image is changed.

In the gaming machine of the type shown in feature K1 etc., there are cases where a jackpot result etc. occurs during the second normal gaming state and the challenge to the third normal gaming state ends. Here, if you avoid changing the display range based on a jackpot result etc. even though the display range should have been changed in the game round, this will become a foothold and cause the above-mentioned The end of the challenge will soon be revealed. Therefore, in the configuration in which the display range is changed at the start of the game repetition operation as shown in feature K9, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by changing the display range regardless of the determination result.

Note that the technical ideas shown in Features K1 to K10 may be applied to Features A to J.

<Feature L group>
The following characteristic group L is defined as "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launcher that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature L1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing a game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (operation opening display parts DL, DR) so that the play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
The predetermined determination information includes first information (information corresponding to a jackpot result) and second information (information corresponding to a special win result),
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first information and the transition to the special gaming state occurs, the gaming state is transitioned to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state. A second normal gaming state transition means (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
The gaming state is determined based on the fact that the number of games played in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit without the judgment result by the judgment means corresponding to the first information in the second normal gaming state. a third normal gaming state transition means (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state;
A pattern display that has a display screen (for example, the display screen 75a) and can variably display a pattern (for example, a pattern) in a predetermined display area (for example, a second variable display area ME2 or a third variable display area ME3) on the display screen. means (for example, the symbol display device 75);
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means, or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of the picture is started in the pattern display means, and the display corresponds to the judgment result by the judging means. Equipped with display control means (for example, notification/effect control device 143 and display control device 710) that stops and displays the pattern,
As the predetermined display area, a first display area (second variable display area ME2) and a second display area (third variable display area ME3) larger than the first display area are provided,
The display control means corresponds to the determination result of the determination means in both the first display area and the second display area in game rounds other than the final game round corresponding to the upper limit in the second normal game state. While the symbols are stopped and displayed, in the final game round in the second normal game state, the symbols corresponding to the determination result are stopped in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to display.

In the configuration shown in feature L1, in the final game round in which the upper limit is reached in the second normal gaming state, the determination result (for example, a jackpot result) corresponding to the predetermined determination information is not obtained (for example, the result is a losing result or a special winning result). ) is the condition for transition to the third normal gaming state. Here, as shown in this feature, if the prerequisite is to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player on the condition that the judgment result corresponds to predetermined judgment information, then the predetermined judgment information It is assumed that displaying a judgment result other than the judgment result corresponding to the above in an emphasized manner may cause a feeling of discomfort to the player. In other words, there is a concern that due to the diversification of games, the effect of increasing attention to the games will not be achieved effectively. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the final game round, the judgment result is intentionally not displayed in the relatively large second display area, and the judgment result is displayed only in the relatively small first display area. This can prevent such inconveniences from occurring. Thereby, the effect of increasing attention to the game due to the diversification of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature L2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing a game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (operation opening display parts DL, DR) so that the play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means is a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the gaming state is changed to a special gaming state (for example, opening/closing execution mode) based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. Special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
The predetermined determination information includes first information (information corresponding to a jackpot result) and second information (information corresponding to a special win result),
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first information and the transition to the special gaming state occurs, the gaming state is transitioned to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state. A second normal gaming state transition means (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the second normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
The gaming state is determined based on the fact that the number of games in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit without the judgment result by the judgment means corresponding to the first information in the second normal gaming state. a third normal gaming state transition means (a function for executing processing for transitioning to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state;
A pattern display means (for example, a pattern display device 75) having a display screen (for example, a display screen 75a) and capable of variably displaying a pattern in a predetermined display area on the display screen;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means, or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of a pattern is started in the pattern display means, and a pattern corresponding to the result of the judgment is displayed. Equipped with display control means (for example, notification/effect control device 143 or display control device 710) for stopping display,
As the predetermined display area, a first display area (second variable display area ME2) and a second display area (third variable display area ME3) larger than the first display area are provided,
The display control means is configured to display the first display area and the display control unit when a determination result corresponding to the first information (for example, a jackpot result) is obtained in the final game round corresponding to the upper limit in the second normal gaming state. A symbol corresponding to the judgment result is stopped and displayed in both of the second display areas, and in the final game round, a judgment result corresponding to the second information (for example, a special winning result) or a judgment not corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is made. In the case of a negative result (for example, a negative result), the first display area of the first display area and the second display area is configured to stop displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result. A gaming machine with special features.

In the configuration shown in feature L2, in the final game round in which the upper limit is reached in the second normal gaming state, the determination result corresponding to the first information (for example, a jackpot result) is not obtained (for example, it is a losing result or a special winning result). ) is the condition for transition to the third normal gaming state. Here, as shown in this feature, if it is assumed that the player will move to a gaming state advantageous on the condition that the judgment result corresponds to the first information, then the first information will be used. Judgment results other than the judgment results that were given, that is, judgment results that correspond to the second information (e.g., special winning results) or judgment results that do not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (e.g., miss results) are displayed in an emphasized manner. It is assumed that this will cause players to feel uncomfortable. In other words, there is a concern that due to the diversification of games, the effect of increasing attention to the games will not be achieved effectively. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the final game round, the symbol corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in both the first display area and the second display area. On the other hand, when the judgment result corresponds to the second information or the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, the picture corresponding to the judgment result is not displayed in the relatively large second display area, and the By configuring the display to be performed in a small first display area, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed. Thereby, the effect of increasing attention to the game due to the diversification of the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature L3. The display control means displays the determination results in both the first display area and the second display area regardless of the determination result by the determination means in game times other than the predetermined game times in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to feature L2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to stop and display a picture corresponding to.

According to feature L3, in game rounds other than the final game round, the picture corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed in both the first display area and the second display area. By using both the first display area and the second display area in this way, the relationship between the two display areas is communicated to the player until the final game, and the symbols in the second display area are hidden. Even if this happens, there is a technical significance in that it can be suppressed from becoming a factor that confuses players.

Feature L4. The display control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the result by the determination means in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area in the last game round in the second normal game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that, when the game is played, the symbols in the second display area are hidden.

As shown in feature L4, if the symbols in the second display area are hidden in advance, for example, a place where a still image, a moving image, etc. indicating a transition to the third normal game state is displayed in the second display area and You can secure time appropriately. In addition, if the symbols in the second display area are hidden as shown in this feature, for example, the symbols in the second display area may remain unchanged, or the symbols that were stopped and displayed in the previous game may remain as they are. It is avoided that this happens. This is preferable in order to prevent the player from being confused due to discrepancies between the displays in the first display area and the second display area.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature may be described as, for example, ``The display control means displays a determination result that corresponds to the second information or a determination result that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information in the final game round in the second normal game state. , feature L2 or "The gaming machine described in feature L3."

Feature L5. The display control means causes a symbol corresponding to the determination result to be stopped and displayed in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area in the last game round in the second normal game state. In this case, any one of features L1 to L3 is characterized in that the symbols in the second display area are not displayed variably but are hidden based on the start of the game repeat operation in the final game time. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature L5, the symbols that were stopped and displayed in the previous game round are hidden from view at the start of a predetermined game round. In this way, by avoiding sudden disappearance of the picture in the second display area during variable display, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the picture is hidden.

Feature L6. When the symbols in the second display area are hidden, the display control means controls a transition to the third normal gaming state in an area (maximum display range) that includes at least a part of the second display area. The gaming machine according to any one of features L3 to L5, characterized by having a suggesting means.

As shown in feature L6, if a transition to the third normal gaming state is suggested instead of hiding the symbols in the second display area, it is possible to suitably prevent the suggestion from being overlooked.

Feature L7. The display control means is configured to display the second normal game in a predetermined area (information display area IE) outside the first display area and the second display area on the display screen when transitioning to the second normal gaming state. Displaying an image showing a third normal gaming state which is a transition destination from the gaming state,
Feature L6 is characterized in that, when the picture in the second display area is hidden, the suggestion means enlarges and displays the image in an area including at least a part of the second display area as the suggestion. The game machine described.

As shown in feature L7, according to the configuration in which an image displayed in a predetermined area is enlarged and displayed in an area including at least a part of the second display area, the image can be grasped in advance. Even if the display period in the second display area is shortened, it is possible to prevent the image from becoming difficult to grasp. In this way, relaxing the restrictions regarding the period is advantageous in terms of smoothing the progress of the game.

Feature L8. The second display area is provided at the center of the display screen, and the first display area is provided at a corner of the display screen, according to any one of features L1 to L7. Game machine.

As shown in this feature, by arranging the second display area in the center of the display screen and the first display area in the corner of the display screen, the picture corresponding to the game result will be visible to the eye in the final game round. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of sticking.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the features L1 to L8 may be applied to the features A to K groups.

<Feature M group>
The following characteristic group M is as follows: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature M1. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing a game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (operation opening display parts DL, DR) so that the play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the game state based on the fact that the symbol corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player;
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
Information display means (symbol display device 75) that displays numerical information (counter value in counter image CF) when in the second normal gaming state;
Display control means (notification/presentation control device 143 and display control device 710) that performs display control of the information display means,
The display control means includes:
As the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, the numerical information is sequentially updated to approach predetermined numerical information (for example, "0") as the game rounds progress, and when the upper limit is reached. an information updating means (a function of executing a countdown display in the notification/effect control device 143 and the display control device 710) that changes the numerical information to the predetermined numerical information;
Switching means for switching the information update means to a first update state (for example, subtraction level 1) and a second update state (for example, subtraction level 2) in which the update range of the numerical information for each game is larger than the first update state. (a function of switching the subtraction level in the notification/performance control device 143).

According to feature M1, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state is higher than that in the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal gaming state, the numerical information displayed on the display screen is updated sequentially so as to approach the predetermined numerical information, and when the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, the numerical information is changed to the predetermined numerical value. It becomes information. The player can predict the remaining time until the transition to the third normal game state by looking at the numerical information displayed on the display screen. Here, the update state of the numerical information is provided with a first update state and a second update state, and by switching between these update states, the update speed of the numerical information, etc. can be changed. With such a switching function, it is possible to suitably suppress monotony of the game by causing a change in rhythm in the game progress until the transition to the third normal game state.

Feature M2. A game board (game board 60) on which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
A special information acquisition means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 acquires the information function to execute acquisition processing),
Acquired information storage means (held ball storage area 632 of RAM 604) capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes a lottery process) function) and
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation (fluctuating display of symbols in the actuating mouth display parts DL and DR) is started. , the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination and the termination of the game repeating operation as one game time, and the game of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means (for example, a function of executing a game time control process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that controls the notification means (operation opening display parts DL, DR) so that the play operation is performed;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed from the normal game state to the game state based on the fact that the symbol corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed by the game time control means. A special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for game state transition in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for transitioning to a special game state (for example, open/close execution mode) advantageous to the player;
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state compatible with low probability mode and low frequency support mode) and a second normal gaming state (high probability mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. A second normal gaming state (compatible with probability mode and high frequency support mode), and a third normal gaming state (compatible with high probability mode and low frequency support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state (game status) is provided,
A second normal gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 executes processing for shifting to the second normal gaming state) function) and
When the second normal gaming state transition means shifts to the second normal gaming state, upper limit setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) sets an upper limit of the number of games (time saving number) in the second normal gaming state. function to set the number of time saving times),
a third normal gaming state transition means (main controller 162) for shifting the gaming state from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state based on the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaching the upper limit; (a function of executing processing for transition to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602);
Information display means (symbol display device 75) that displays numerical information (counter value in counter image CF) when in the second normal gaming state;
Display control means (notification/presentation control device 143 and display control device 710) that performs display control of the information display means,
The display control means includes:
As the numerical information, display numerical information that correlates with the number of remaining games in the second normal gaming state until the transition to the third normal gaming state, until the number of games in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit. Information updating means for updating the numerical information as the game progresses (a function for executing a countdown display in the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710);
Switching means for switching the information update means to a first update state (for example, subtraction level 1) and a second update state (for example, subtraction level 2) in which the update range of the numerical information for each game is larger than the first update state. (a function of switching the subtraction level in the notification/performance control device 143).

According to feature M2, after transitioning from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state via the special gaming state, the number of games played in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, so that the number of games in the second normal gaming state is higher than that in the second normal gaming state. Furthermore, a transition is made to a third normal game state which is advantageous to the player. In the second normal game state, numerical information correlated with the remaining game times is displayed on the display screen. The player can predict the remainder up to the third normal game state by looking at the numerical information displayed on the display screen. Here, the update state of the numerical information is provided with a first update state and a second update state, and by switching between these update states, the update speed of the numerical information, etc. can be changed. With such a switching function, it is possible to suitably suppress monotony of the game by causing a change in rhythm in the game progress up to the third normal game state.

Feature M3. The display control means displays, as the numerical information, numerical information corresponding to a numerical value greater than the product of the upper limit and the update width in one game in the first update state, when transitioning to the second normal gaming state. It is configured to
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2, wherein the information updating means is configured to update the information so that the numerical value indicated by the numerical information decreases.

As shown in this feature, when the value indicated by the numerical information is subtracted every time a game is played, the numerical information displayed at the time of transition to the second normal gaming state should be estimated to be larger than the above upper limit. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in setting the first update state and the second update state can be suitably increased.

Feature M4. Features M1 to M3 are characterized in that the display control means has means for setting a game time for switching the update state by the switching means based on the upper limit set by the upper limit setting means. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

In a configuration where the second normal gaming state ends when the upper limit is reached, the opportunity to switch the update state is influenced by the upper limit. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by predetermining the number of game rounds in which the update state is to be switched according to the upper limit, it becomes possible to appropriately update numerical information toward predetermined numerical information. .

Feature M5. Any one of features M1 to M4, characterized in that the switching means includes means for switching the update state from the first update state to the second update state during the second normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in .

If the update state is switched from the first update state to the second update state as shown in this feature, it is possible to increase the update speed of numerical information toward the third normal gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention of the player to the transition to the third normal gaming state.

Feature M6. In the first update state and the second update state, the number of updates in one game round is the same, and in the second update state, numerical information is updated by one update more than in the first update state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, characterized in that the width is increased.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by setting the number of updates to be the same and providing a difference in the update width in one update, it is possible to enhance the sharpness of updating numerical information.

Feature M7. In the first update state and the second update state, the width of the numerical information that is changed in one update is the same, and in the second update state, the width of the numerical information is changed by one game more than in the first update state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the number of times updates are executed during a game is increased.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the subtraction rhythm can be changed by increasing the number of updates rather than increasing the number of changes at one time.

Feature M8. A pattern display means (a function for executing display control processing by the notification/performance control device 143 and the display control device 710) that displays a pattern variably and finally stops displaying a pattern corresponding to the determination result by the determination device,
The symbol display means is configured to determine the number of times the symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determination device is temporarily stopped and displayed before the symbol corresponding to the determination result by the determination device is displayed in a final halt according to the number of times the numerical information is updated during one game round. The gaming machine according to feature M7.

If the update of the numerical information is linked to the display of the picture as shown in feature M8, there is a chance that the update will be overlooked even though the display range of the numerical information is made smaller so that it can coexist with other information on the display screen. can be reduced.

Feature M9. The display control means switches the display mode (for example, color and brightness) of the numerical information between a first display mode corresponding to the first update state and a second display mode corresponding to the second update state. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8, characterized in that the gaming machine has a means.

In a configuration in which the update speed is changed by switching the update state of numerical information, as shown in feature M1, etc., the display range of numerical information becomes smaller, making the change more likely to be overlooked. Therefore, if the display mode of numerical information is switched according to the update status as shown in this feature, it is possible to reduce the chances of a change in update speed being overlooked without increasing the display range blindly. .

Note that the technical ideas shown in the features M1 to M9 may be applied to the features A to L groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means (game ball firing handle 41) operated by a player, a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a It is equipped with a ball path (guiding path 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) that guides the game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game part (such as a nail) arranged in the game area, and each of these game parts A gaming machine that provides a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing section (general prize opening 61, etc.).

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 41... Game ball firing handle, 60... Game board, 62... Lower operating ball entry part, 62a... Lower operating opening, 63... Right operating ball entry part, 63a... Right operating opening, 64... Upper variable winning device, 65... Lower variable winning device, 70... Ball entering unit, 75... Symbol display device, 75a... Display screen, 81... Main display unit, 110... Game ball firing mechanism as game ball firing means , 162...Main control device, 191...Power supply/launch control device, 311...Upper prize opening, 315...Shutter, 323...Middle passage section, 331...Shutter, 335a, 336a...Protrusion section, 345...Shutter, 602... MPU, 604...RAM, 632...Holding ball storage area, CF...Counter image, D...Main display section, DL...Display section for lower operating port, DR...Display section for right operating port, DS...Display section for through gate, IE...Information display area, LF...Restricted image, ME1...First variable display area, ME2...Second variable display area, ME3...Third variable display area, PE...Game area, SE1...First specific area, SE2...First 2 Specific area, TF...Target image.

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters a starting ball entry section provided in the gaming area;
acquired information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
determining means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means, or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, a game repeating operation is started, and the game repeating operation is set as a notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment. A game cycle in which the notification means is controlled so that the game cycle operation is performed in each game cycle according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the completion of the operation being regarded as one game cycle. control means;
The determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and the game state is changed to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means. A special game state transition means for transitioning to a special game state,
The normal gaming states include a first normal gaming state, a second normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state, and a third normal gaming state that is even more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. A gaming state is provided,
The predetermined determination information includes first information and second information,
When the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the first information and the transition to the special gaming state occurs, the gaming state is transitioned to the second normal gaming state upon completion of the special gaming state. A second normal game state transition means,
Upper limit setting means for setting an upper limit for the number of games in the second normal gaming state when the second normal gaming state transitioning means causes the second normal gaming state to be transferred to the second normal gaming state;
The gaming state is determined based on the fact that the number of games played in the second normal gaming state has reached the upper limit without the judgment result by the judgment means corresponding to the first information in the second normal gaming state. a third normal gaming state transition means for shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state;
a pattern display means having a display screen and capable of variably displaying a pattern in a predetermined display area on the display screen;
Prior to the judgment being made by the judging means, or based on the judgment being made by the judging means, variable display of the picture is started in the pattern display means, and the display corresponds to the judgment result by the judging means. and a display control means for stopping and displaying the picture,
The predetermined display area includes a first display area and a second display area larger than the first display area,
The display control means corresponds to the determination result of the determination means in both the first display area and the second display area in game rounds other than the final game round corresponding to the upper limit in the second normal game state. While the symbols are stopped and displayed, in the final game round in the second normal game state, the symbols corresponding to the determination result are stopped in the first display area of the first display area and the second display area. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to display.

Images